Maharashtra State Board Hindi Yuvakbharati 12th Digest Guide Textbook Answers Solutions

Maharashtra State Board Hindi Yuvakbharati 12th Digest Pdf 2021-2022, Hindi Digest Std 12 Pdf Download, Yuvakbharati Hindi 12th Textbook Pdf, 12th Ka Hindi Book Pdf Maharashtra Board, 12th Commerce Hindi Book Guide Question and Answer PDF Free Download.

Maharashtra State Board Yuvakbharati Hindi Digest Std 12 Text Book Solutions Answers Pdf

Hindi Yuvakbharati 12th Digest Pdf | 12th Commerce ka Hindi Book Pdf Maharashtra Board

Hindi Digest Std 12 Pdf Download विशेष अध्ययन हेत

Class 12th Hindi Guide व्यावहारिक हिंदी

Yuvakbharati Hindi 12th Textbook Pdf परिशिष

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Textbook Solutions

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Biology Solutions Digest

Maharashtra State Board 12th Std Biology Textbook Solutions Digest

Maharashtra State Board Class 12 Textbook Solutions

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Class 9 Political Science Chapter 6 International Problems Textbook Questions and Answers

1. Choose the right option and rewrite the sentence:

Question 1.
Which among the following is an International problem?
(a) Border dispute between Maharashtra and Karnataka
(b) Kaveri water sharing question
(c) Problems of refugees
(d) Naxalism in Andhra Pradesh
Answer:
(c) Problems of refugees

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Question 2.
Which among the following rights are not included in human rights?
(a) Right to work
(b) Right to information
(c) Children’s rights
(d) Equal pay for equal work
Answer:
(b) Right to information

Question 3.
Which among the following days is observed at an international level?
(a) Teachers’ Day
(b) Children’s Day
(c) Earth Day
(d) Flag Day
Answer:
(c) Earth Day

2. Explain with reasons whether the following statements are true or false:

Question 1.
It is necessary that all the nations should cooperate in order to find remedies of environmental degradation.
Answer:
True.

  • The threat to the environment caused by pollution or by leakage of oil or gas does not remain restricted to one nation.
  • Its effects are long term so it becomes necessary for nations to act with each other’s consent and cooperation in order to deal with these effects.

Question 2.
Sino-Indian relations are friendly.
Answer:
False.
The conflict between India and China is connected to two issues

  • Border issue and
  • Status of Tibet. India made several efforts to sort this border dispute by means of dialogue. But it has not met with much success.

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

3. Complete the following chart:

Question 1.
Human Rights
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 6
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 5

Question 2.
Degradation of the Environment
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 8
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 7

Question 3.
Terrorism
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 10
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 11

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

4. Prepare the following concept map:

Question 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 13
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 7

5. Write your own opinion about :

Question 1.
Explain India’s position in establishing human rights.
Answer:
(i) The Preamble of the Indian Constitution contains the objectives of the Constitution.

(ii) It secures to its citizens: justice, social, economic and political; Liberty of thought, expression, belief, faith and worship; Equality of status and opportunity; and Fraternity assuring the dignity of the individual and unity and integrity of the Nation.

(iii) Fundamental Rights are assured to all the citizens of India.

(iv) In order to make these objectives effective, Fundamental Rights and Directive Principles of State Policy were incorporated in Part III and Part IV of our Constitution.

(v) The Supreme Court of India and the High Courts of all states issue Writs, such as:

  • Habeas Corpus
  • Mandamus
  • Prohibition
  • Certiorari
  • Quo Warranto to protect human rights.

Question 2.
Narrate the effects of terrorism and suggest remedies to control it.
Answer:
(i) The 21st century terrorism is an organised system of violence and intimidation. There is a need to empathise, understand, cooperate and coordinate our efforts in dealing with terrorism at the national and international level.

(ii) Terrorism includes taking hostages; firing or bombing civilian localities that are undefended such as hospitals or schools, inhuman treatment to prisoners and destruction of property.

(iii) This leads to feeling of insecurity and helplessness among the people who are prone to terrorism. Their faith in social security and police protection is lowered and they may be psychologically affected.

(iv) Terrorism affects economic growth, political stability and social welfare of the people. It burdens our defence and police system as well. Hence the government cannot focus on its constructive programmes.

(v) Citizens should be alert about unattended luggage or bags at public places and be vigilant about suspicious men around them. They must immediately report to the authorities about the same.

(vi) The youth of the nation should volunteer in police and armed forces. The civilians must always cooperate with the police and government authorities to nab the terrorists.

Class 9 Political Science Chapter 6 International Problems Additional Important Questions and Answers

Choose the correct option from the given options and rewrite the statements:

Question 1.
United Nations Conference on human environment was called at Stockholm from ________.
(a) 5th to 16th June, 1972
(b) 5th to 16th July, 1972
(c) 5th to 16th June, 1971
(d) 5th to 16th July 1971
Answer:
5th to 16th June, 1972

Question 2.
The United Nations General Assembly adopted the International Covenant on Civil and Political Rights (ICCPR) in ______.
(a) 1948
(b) 1966
(c) 1964
(d) 1962
Answer:
1966

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Question 3.
In 1997, the conference at Kyoto laid down the protocols for the developed countries for preventing climate change. For how many years did it come to be applied?
(a) 10 years
(b) 12 years
(c) 15 years
(d) 16 years
Answer:
15 years

Question 4.
How many Articles are there in the United Nations Declaration of Human Rights?
(a) 30
(b) 20
(c) 40
(d) 50
Answer:
30

Question 5.
When was the Declaration of the Rights of Child proclaimed?
(a) 30th November 1959
(b) 20th November 1959
(c) 20th December 1959
(d) 30th December 1959
Answer:
20th November 1959

Question 6.
When was the first Earth Day celebrated?
(a) 21st April, 1970
(b) 22nd April, 1970
(c) 23rd April, 1970
(d) 20th April, 1970
Answer:
22nd April, 1970

Question 7.
What led to the boycott of the regime in South Africa?
(a) Expatriation of Prisoners of War
(b) Racial Segregation
(c) Disobedience of the UN
(d) Asylum to international terrorists
Answer:
Racial Segregation

Question 8.
Which conference in 1997 laid down the protocols for developed countries for prevention of climatic changes?
(a) Conference at Copenhagen
(b) Conference at Amsterdam
(c) Conference at Kyoto
(d) Conference at Shimla
Answer:
Conference at Kyoto

Question 9.
Which institute/organisation is responsible for taking action against violation of human rights?
(a) Self Help Groups and NGOs
(b) Human Rights Commission
(c) Corporate bodies
(d) National Investigation Agency
Answer:
Human Rights Commission

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

State whether the following statements are true or false with reasons:

Question 1.
Human rights are necessary for living as a human being.
Answer:
True.
The concept of human rights has emerged from the concept of natural rights. Natural rights are those rights that we are endowed with because we are bom as human beings. In the same vein, human rights are those rights that are necessary for living as a human being.

Question 2.
The scope of human rights is limited.
Answer:
False.
The scope of human rights has in fact, broadened due to several issues of global nature like contagious diseases, the threat to environment, natural disasters, etc. Human rights today also include goals like protection of the environment and sustainable development.

Question 3.
Only internal security is threatened due to terrorist attacks.
Answer:
False.
The aim of a terrorist attack is not to endanger the geographical boundaries, but to challenge a regime in a country or refuse to acknowledge the existence of the State. This means that due to increasing terrorism, the internal security of a country is threatened in addition to its external security.

Question 4.
Once the refugees reach a safe place, they have new challenges.
Answer:
True.
Once the refugees reach a safe place, they need to find work, a place to live and other problems of a day to day nature. If the language and culture in the other nation are different, then adjusting to that poses difficulties. There is also no assurance that the people of a nation which gives shelter to the refugees will accept them.

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Explain the concept:

Question 1.
Human Rights
Answer:
The concept of human rights has emerged from the concept of natural rights. Natural rights are those rights that we are endowed with because we are born as human beings. Human rights are those rights that are necessary for living as a human being and as a constituent of society.

Question 2.
Refugees
Answer:
People who have to leave their motherland against their wishes or are forced to go to other nations, seeking refuge or for security are called as refugees. People become refugees due to torture or persecution for belonging to a particular race or religion, due to war or a disaster, etc. In such situations people are forced to leave their own country and seek shelter in another country.

Question 3.
Terrorism
Answer:
Terrorism is spreading fear and terror in a society by using or threatening to use violence against common and innocent people for achieving political goals. Terrorism can be described as organised and planned violence.

Question 4.
Traditional War
Answer:
Traditional war is a conflict between two or more sovereign states. In such wars, the geographical boundaries between nations acquire importance, i.e. national security is connected with geographical boundaries.

Question 5.
Stockholm Conference 1972.
Answer:
(i) In order to discuss the immediate and long term problems related to the environment and to find solutions on them, a United Nations Conference on human environment was called at Stockholm from 5th to 16th June, 1972.

(ii) It was stressed that it is the responsibility of all nations to cooperate to overcome pollution.

(iii) The developing nations feel that the developed nations are more responsible for the decline of the environment and they should take the responsibility for stopping the decline.

(iv) Non-governmental organisations working in the field of environmental protection were also present and assumed a bigger role in the decision making process at international conferences regarding the environment.

(v) The issue of the protection of the common global wealth was raised.

(vi) A consensus emerged that it was the responsibility of all the nations to protect these resources.

(vii) It was after this conference that the United Nations created the United Nations Environment Programme (UNEP).

(viii) Many international treaties about environment were signed after this conference.

(ix) Several rules were made about the protection of environment. Environmental movements started on a large scale at national as well as at the international level.

Complete the following Chart/Concept Maps:

Question 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 2
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 2

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Question 2.
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 4
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems 3

Answer the following questions in brief:

Question 1.
Which difficulties are faced by people who are forced to leave their own country?
Answer:
(i) When people of any country are forced to leave their own country as refugees, they have to face many problems.

(ii) The most important problem is to decide where to go. They have questions like will that nation give us shelter.

(iii) Secondly, they have to also take along with them other members of their family. It involves a lot of physical and emotional stress.

(iv) Apart from this, there are problems caused by natural elements like heat, rain, storms, as well as shortages of food, sickness, an enemy in pursuit, etc. In this process, many people lose their lives.

Question 2.
What was the Stockholm Conference of 1972 about?
Answer:
In order to discuss the immediate and long-term problems related to the environment and to find solutions to them, a United Nations Conference on human-environment was called at Stockholm from 5th to 16th June 1972.

Question 3.
What are the new challenges faced by refugees on reaching a safe place?
Answer:
(i) Once the refugees reach a safe place, they have new challenges. They need to find work, a place to live and other problems of a day to day nature.

(ii) If the language and culture in the other nation are different, then adjusting to that poses difficulties. There is no assurance that the people in the nation which gives shelter to the refugees will accept them.

Question 4.
What did the Environmental Conference of Rio (1992) emphasise on?
Answer:
(i) In this conference, the idea of sustainable development was stressed upon.

(ii) Different treaties regarding bio-diversity, climate change due to greenhouse gases, protection of forests, etc. were signed.

Question 5.
State the highlights of the conference on climatic change at Paris (2015).
Answer:
(i) A conference on climate change was held at Paris in November 2015.

(ii) An appeal was made in this conference that all nations should make concerted efforts to stop climate change and global warming and that the developed countries should help the developing countries to acquire the technology to achieve these goals.

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Question 6.
What measures have been taken so far to save the refugees?
Answer:
(i) In 1951, some provisions were made regarding the question of refugees at the international level. One such provision was that the refugees will not be forcefully sent back to their country against their wishes.

(ii) Similarly an office of the High Commissioner of the United Nations has been established to solve their problems.

Question 7.
Give some examples of refugees.
Answer:
(i) Before the Second World War, the Jews were tortured in Germany.

(ii) Their citizenships and properties were confiscated. Due to this, the Jews became refugees.

(iii) In 1971, the people in East Pakistan turned refugees and came to India seeking refuge due to political and religious persecution.

(iv) In the last few years due to the war-like situation in Iraq and Syria, a lot of people are leaving Syria as refugees. We can cite many such example of refugees.

Question 8.
Which problems are faced by the host nation that agrees to provide shelter to the refugees?
Answer:
(i) As the number of refugees increases, the strain on the economy of the host nation increases. A shortage of essential goods is created; there may be an increase in crime or even inflation.

(ii) The locals may lose their jobs; a problem of law and order may crop up. Many such problems may emerge.

(iii) Due to these problems, many nations are not ready to give shelter to refugees and to resettle them.

Question 9.
Which steps can be taken for preservation of human rights?
Answer:
(i) If all nations safeguarded and fostered human rights, exploitation and violence would reduce. All people would be able to achieve their own development safely and securely.

(ii) Human rights could be more effectively implemented if the environment is safeguarded and if terrorism is completely wiped out.

(iii) No group of people will have to become refugees. For this, all nations have to come together, cooperate with each other, take concrete action and bring about actual change.

Question 10.
Many nations are not ready to give shelter to refugees. Why?
Answer:
Many nations are not prepared to give shelter to refugees because:

  • As the number of refugees increases, the strain on the economy of the host nation increases.
  • A shortage of essential goods is created; there may be an increase in crime or even inflation.
  • The locals may lose their jobs; a problem of law and order may crop up.
  • Many such problems may emerge.

Question 11.
The problems relating to the environment are inherently of a global nature. How?
Answer:
(i) The threat to the environment caused by pollution or by leakage of oil or gas does not remain restricted to one nation.

(ii) The visible effects of the decline of environment are extinction of species of plants and animals, decrease in the fertility of soil, water shortage, fluctuation in the proportion of rainfall, global warming, drying up of rivers and lakes, pollution of rivers and seas, incidence of newer diseases, acid rain, thinning of the ozone layer, etc.

(iii) Even if some of the effects are restricted to particular nations, these problems reach global proportions due to their long term effects, while some problems are inherently of a global nature.

Maharashtra Board Class 9 Political Science Solutions Chapter 6 International Problems

Question 12.
How is terrorist war different from traditional war?
Answer:
(i) Terrorist conflict is different from traditional war.

(ii) Traditional war is a conflict between two or more sovereign states.

(iii) In such wars, the geographical boundaries between nations acquire importance, i.e. national security is connected with geographical boundaries.

(iv) On the other hand, in the case of terrorism, terrorist groups can cause violence in any part of the world from anywhere in the world.

(v) The aim of a terrorist attack is not to endanger the geographical boundaries, but to challenge a regime in a country or refuse to acknowledge the existence of the state.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 1.
Match the columns in the following table and explain them:

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
Farsightedness Nearby object can be seen clearly Bifocal  lens
Presbyopia Faraway object can be seen clearly Concave  lens
Nearsightedness Problem of old age Convex  lens

Answer:

Column 1 Column 2 Column 3
Farsightedness Faraway object can be seen clearly Convex  lens
Presbyopia Problem of old age Bifocal  lens
Nearsightedness Nearby object can be seen clearly Concave  lens

1. Farsightedness:
Hypermetropia or farsightedness is the defect of vision in which a human eye can see distant objects clearly but is unable to see nearby objects clearly.
In this case the image of a nearby object would fall behind the retina instead of on the retina.

Possible reasons for hypermetropia:
(1) Curvature of the cornea and the eye lens decreases. Hence, the converging power of the eye lens becomes less.
(2) The distance between the eye lens and retina decreases (relative to the normal eye) and the focal length of the eye lens becomes very large due to the flattening of the eyeball.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 1

2. Presbyopia:
Presbyopia is the defect of vision in which aged people find it difficult to see nearby objects
comfortably and clearly without spectacles.

Reason of presbyopia: The power of accommodation of eye usually decreases with ageing. The muscles near the eye lens lose their ability to change the focal length of the lens.

Therefore, the near point of the eye lens shifts rarther from the eye, This defect is corrected using a. convex lens of appropriate power. The lens converges light rays before they fall on the eye lens such that the action of the eye lens forms the image on the retina.

3. Nearsightedness:
Myopia or nearsightedness is the defect of vision in which a human eye can see nearby objects distinctly but is unable to see distant objects clearly as they appear indistinct.
In this case the image of a distant object is formed in front of the retina instead of on the retina.
[Figs. 7.29 (a), 7.29 (b)]

Possible reasons for myopia:
(1) The curvature of the cornea and the eye lens increases. The muscles near the lens cannot relax so that the converging power of the lens remains large. (2) The distance between the eye lens and the retina increases as the eyeball elongates.

Myopia is corrected using a suitable concave lens. Light rays are diverged by the concave lens before they strike the eye lens. A concave lens of proper focal length is chosen to produce the required divergence. Hence, after the converging action of the eye lens, the image is formed on the retina. [Fig. 7.29 (c)]
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 2

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 2.
Draw a figure explaining various terms related to a lens.
Answer:
(1) Centre of curvature (C): The centres of the spheres whose parts form the surfaces of a lens are called the centres of curvature of the lens. A lens has two centres of curvature C1, and C2 for its two spherical surfaces.

(2) Radii of curvature (R1, R2): The radii of the spheres whose parts form surfaces of a lens are called the radii of curvature of the lens.

(3) Principal axis: The imaginary straight line passing through the two centres of curvature of a lens is called the principal axis of the lens.

(4) Optical centre (O): The point inside a lens on the principal axis, through which light rays pass without changing their path is called the optical centre (O) of the lens.

(5) Principal focus (F): When light rays parallel to the principal- axis are incident on a convex lens, they converge at a point on the principal axis. This point is called the principal focus (F) of the convex lens. Light rays travelling parallel to the principal axis of a concave lens diverge after refraction in such a way that they appear to be coming out of a point on the principal axis. This point is called the principal focus of the concave lens. A lens has two principal foci F1 and F2.
[Note: In this chapter, the terms focus and the principal focus are used in the same sense.]

(6) Focal length (f): The distance between the optical centre and the principal focus of a lens is called the focal length (f) of the lens.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 3
C1, C2: Centres of curvature, R1, R2: Radii of curvature, O: Optical centre.
The cross sections of convex and concave lenses are shown in parts (a) and (b) of Fig. 7.4. The surface marked as 1 is part of sphere S1 while the surface marked as 2 is part of sphere S2.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 4
P1, P2, P3: Incident rays of light,
Q1, Q2, Q3: Refracted rays of light, O: Optical centre
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 5
F1, F2: Principal foci of the lens, f: Focal length of the lens

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 3.
At which position will you keep an object in front of a convex lens so as to get a real image of the same size as the object? Draw a figure.
Answer:
At 2F1.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 6

Question 4.
Give scientific reasons:
a. A simple microscope is used for watch repairs.
Answer:
(1) when an object is placed within the focal length of a magnifying glass or simple microscope (convex lens), its larger and erect image is obtained on the same side of the lens as that of the object.

(2) By adjusting the distance between the object and the lens, the image can be obtained at the minimum distance of distinct vision. Thus, a watch repairer can see the minute parts of a watch more clearly with the aid of a magnifying glass (a simple microscope) than with the naked eye, without any stress on the eye. Hence, watch repairers use a magnifying glass (a simple microscope) while repairing the watches.

b. One can sense colours only in bright light.
Answer:
(1) The retina in the eye is made of many light sensitive cells. The rod-shaped cells respond to the intensity of light while the cone-shaped cells j respond to various colours.
(2) The cone-shaped cells do not respond to faint light. They function only in bright light. Hence, one can sense colours only in bright, light.

c. We cannot clearly see an object kept at a distance less than 25 cm from the eye.
Answer:
(1) When we try to see a nearby object, the eye lens becomes more rounded and its focal length decreases. Then a clear image of the object is formed on the retina of the eye.
(2) The focal length of the eye lens cannot be decreased beyond some limit. Therefore we cannot clearly see an object kept at a distance less than 25 cm from the eye.

Question 5.
Explain the working of an astronomical telescope using refraction of light.
Answer:
Construction of a refracting telescope: It consists of two convex lenses called the objective lens (directed towards the object) and the eyepiece (directed towards the eye). The focal length and diameter of the objective lens are respectively greater than the focal length and diameter of the eyepiece. The objective lens is fitted at one end of a long metal tube.

A metal tube of smaller diameter is fitted in this metal tube and the eyepiece is fitted at the outer end of the smaller tube. With the help of a screw it is possible to change the distance between the eyepiece and the objective lens by sliding the tube fitted with the eyepiece. The principal axes of the objective lens and the eyepiece are along the same line. A telescope is usually mounted on a stand.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 7

Working: When the objective lens is pointed towards the distant object to be observed, the rays of light from the distant object, which are almost parallel to each other, pass through the objective lens. The objective lens collects maximum amount of light as it is large in size. It forms a real, inverted and diminished image in the focal plane of the objective lens. Now, the position of the eyepiece is adjusted such that this image falls just within the focal length of the eyepiece and serves as the object for the eyepiece which works as a simple microscope.

The final image is highly magnified, virtual, on the same side as that of the object and inverted with respect to the original object. The final image can be observed by keeping the eye close to the eyepiece. If the image formed by the objective lens lies in the focal plane of the eyepiece, the final image is formed at infinity.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 6.
Distinguish between the following:
a. Farsightedness (Hypermetropia) and Nearsightedness (Myopia).
Answer:
Farsightedness:

  1. In hypermetropia, a human eye can see distant distinctly but is unable to see nearby objects clearly.
  2. In this case, the image of a nearby object would be formed behind the retina.
  3. This defect can be corrected using a convex lens of appropriate power.

Nearsightedness:

  1. In myopia, a human eye can see near objects distinctly, but is unable to see distant objects clearly.
  2. In this case, the image of a distant object is formed in front of the retina.
  3. This defect can be corrected using a concave lens of appropriate power.

b. Concave lens and Convex lens.
Answer:
Concave lens:

  1. A concave lens has its surfaces curved inwards.
  2. It is thicker at the edges than in the middle.
  3. It can form only a virtual image.
  4. It can form only a diminished image.

Convex lens:

  1. A convex lens has its surfaces puffed up outwards.
  2. It is thicker in the middle than at the edges.
  3. It can form a real image as well as a % virtual image.
  4. It can form a magnified, diminished or the same sized image (relative to the object) depending on the position of the object.

Question 7.
What is the function of the iris and the muscles connected to the lens in the human eye?
Answer:
When the incident light is very bright, the muscles of the iris stretch to reduce the size of the pupil. When the incident light is dim, the muscles of the iris relax to increase the size of the pupil. Thus, the iris controls the size of the pupil and thereby regulates the amount of light entering the eye. (Fig. 7.26)

When a distant object is to be observed, the ciliary muscles relax so that the eye lens becomes flat. This increases the focal length of the lens. Therefore, a sharp image of the distant object is formed on the retina.
Thus, we can see a distant object clearly. (Fig. 7.27)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 8
when an object closer to the eye is to be observed. the ciliary muscles contract increasing the curvature. of the eye lens. The eye lens, therefore, becomes rounded. This decreases the focal length of the lens. Therefore, a sharp image of the nearby object is formed on the retina. Thus, we can see a nearby object clearly. (Fig. 7.27)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 9

Question 8.
Solve the following examples:
i. Doctor has prescribed a lens having I power + 1.5 D. What will be the focal length of the lens? What is the type of the lens and what must be the defect of vision?
Solution:
Data: P = + 1.5 D, f = ?
Focal length of the lens, f = \(\frac{1}{P}=\frac{1}{1.5 \mathrm{D}}\)
= \(\frac{10}{15}\) m = 0.6667 m = 0.67 m
P is positive. This shows that the lens is convex. The defect of vision is farsightedness (hypermetropia).

ii. 5 cm high object is placed at a distance of 25 cm from a converging lens of focal length of 10 cm. Determine the position, size and type of the image.
Solution:
Data: Converging lens, f = 10 cm
u = – 25 cm, h1 = 5 cm, v = ?, h2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 10
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 11
The height of the image = -3.3 cm (inverted image ∴ minus sign).
(iii) The image is real, inverted and smaller than the object.

iii. Three lenses having powers 2, 2.5 and 1.7 D are kept touching in a row. What is the total power of the lens combination?
Solution:
Data: P1 = 2 D, P2 = 2.5 D, P3 = 1.7 D, P = ?
Total power of the lens combination,
P = P1 +P2 + P3
= 2 D + 2.5 D + 1.7 D
= 6.2 D.

iv. An object kept 60 cm from a lens gives a virtual image 20 cm in front of the lens. What is the focal length of the lens? Is it a converging lens or diverging lens?
Solution:
Data: u = -60 cm, v = -20 cm, f = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 12
∴ The focal length of the lens, f = – 30 cm. As f is negative, it is a diverging lens.

Project:

Question 1.
Make a Powerpoint presentation about the construction and use of binoculars. (Do it your self)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 80)

Question 1.
Indicate the following terms related to spherical mirrors in figure 7.1: pole, centre of curvature, radius of curvature, principal focus.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 13
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 14

Question 2.
How are concave and convex mirrors constructed?
Answer:
The given part of a hollow spherical glass can be converted into a concave mirror by (i) polishing (silvering) its inner side (inner surface or concave surface) to make it reflecting or (ii) coating its outer side with a thin layer of silver and painting it with red colour to protect the silver coating.
[Note: Case (i) corresponds to the front surface silvered concave mirror.]

The given part of a hollow spherical glass can be converted into a convex mirror by (i) polishing (silvering) its outer side (outer surface or convex surface) to make it reflecting or (ii) coating its inner side with a thin layer of silver and painting it with red colour to protect the silver coating.
[Note: Case (i) corresponds to the front surface silvered convex mirror. ]

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 85)

Question 1.
From equations (1) and (2) what is the relation between h1, h2, u and v?
Answer:
M = \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\) …….(1)
Also, M = \(\frac{v(\text { image distance })}{u \text { (object distance) }}\)……(2)
\(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\) = \(\frac{v}{u}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Try this (Text Book Page No. 88)

(1) Try to read a book keeping it very far from your eyes.
(2) Try to read a book keeping it very close to your eyes.
(3) Try to read a book keeping it at a distance of 25 cm from your eyes.
At which time do you see the alphabets clearly? Why?
Answer:
Minimum distance of distinct vision: Though the focal length of the eye lens is adjustable, it cannot be decreased below a certain limit. Hence, if an object is very close to the eye, it cannot be seen clearly. For a normal human eye, the minimum distance from the eye at which an object is clearly visible without stress on the eye, is called the minimum distance of distinct vision. For the normal human eye, it is 25 cm.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 89)

Question.
(1) Why do we have to bring a small object near the eyes in order to see it clearly?
(2) If we bring an object closer than 25 cm from the eyes, when can we not see it clearly even though it subtends a bigger angle at the eye?
Answer:
(1) when a small object is brought near the eyes, its apparent size increases. Therefore, it is
seen clearly.

(2) Minimum distance of distinct vision: Though the focal length of the eye lens is adjustable, it cannot be decreased below a certain limit. Hence, if an object is very close to the eye, it cannot be seen clearly. For a normal human eye, the minimum distance from the eye at which an object is clearly visible without stress on the eye, is called the minimum distance of distinct vision. For the normal human eye, it is 25 cm.

Try this (Text Book Page No. 91)

Question 1.
Take a burning incense stick in your hand and rotate it fast along a circle.
Answer:
A circle of red light is seen.

Question 2.
Draw a cage on one side of a cardboard and a bird on the other side. Hang the cardboard with the help of a thread. Twist the thread and leave It. What do you see and why?
Answer:
The bird appears to be inside the cage. This happens due to persistence of vision.
Persistence of vision: We see an object when its image is formed on the retina. The image disappears when the object is removed from our sight. But this is not instantaneous and the image remains imprinted on the retina for about \(\frac{1}{16}\) th of a second after the removal of the object. The sensation on the retina persists for a while. This effect is known as the persistence of vision.

It is due to persistence of vision that we continue to see the object in its position for about \(\frac{1}{16}\) th of a second after it is removed.
Example: When a burning stick of incense is moved fast in a circle, a circle of red light is seen.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Can you tell? (Text Book Page No. 91)

Question 1.
How do we perceive different colours?
Answer:
(1) In nature we field objects of various colours. Perception of colour means to be able to respond to colour.
(2) We can distinguish between various colours due to perception of colour.
(3) The cone-shaped cells on the retina of the eye respond to the various colours when light is bright and communicate to the brain about the colours of the image formed on the retina. This gives us the proper idea about the colours of the object.
(4) If, in the retina of a person, the cone-shaped cells responding to certain specific colours are absent, the person is unable to distinguish between the colours. As a result, he lacks perception of colour.

Fill in the blanks and rewrite the statements:

Question 1.
The focal length of a………..lens is positive.
Answer:
The focal length of a convex lens is positive.

Question 2.
The focal length of a………..lens is negative.
Answer:
The focal length of a concave lens is negative.

Question 3.
The magnification produced by a………..lens is always positive.
Answer:
The magnification produced by a concave lens is always positive.

Question 4.
The power of a………..lens is positive.
Answer:
The power of a convex lens is positive.

Question 5.
The power of a………..lens is negative.
Answer:
The power of a concave lens is negative.

Question 6.
The focal length of a lens with power 2.5 D is………..
Answer:
The focal length of a lens with power 2.5 D is 40 cm (0.4 m).

Question 7.
The power of a lens with focal length 20 cm is………..
Answer:
The power of a lens with focal length 20 cm is 5D.

Question 8.
The minimum distance of distinct vision for a normal human eye is………..
Answer:
The minimum distance of distinct vision for a normal human eye is 25 cm.

Question 9.
If two lenses with focal lengths 10 cm and 20 cm respectively are kept in contact with each other, the effective power of the combination is………..
Answer:
If two lenses with focal lengths 10 cm and 20 cm respectively are kept in contact with each other, the effective power of the combination is 15 D.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 10.
A………..lens is used as a simple microscope.
Answer:
A convex lens is used as a simple microscope.

Rewrite the following statements by selecting the correct options:

Question 1.
Inside water, an air bubble behaves………..
(a) like a flat plate
(b) like a concave lens
(c) like a convex lens
(d) like a concave mirror
Answer:
Inside water, an air bubble behaves like a concave lens.

Question 2.
…………represents the lens formula.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 15
Answer:
(b) \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\) represents the lens formula.

Question 3.
The power of a convex lens of focal length 25 cm is………..
(a) +4.0 D
(b) 0.25 D
(c) -4.0 D
(d) -0.4D
Answer:
The power of a convex lens of focal length 25 cm is +4.0 D

Question 4.
A lens does not produce any deviation of a ray of light passing through………..
(a) it’s centre of curvature
(b) it’s optical centre
(c) it’s principal focus
(d) an axial point at a distance 2F from its centre
Answer:
A lens does not produce any deviation of a ray of light passing through its optical centre.

Question 5.
The image formed by a concave lens is always………..
(a) virtual and erect
(b) real and erect
(c) virtual and inverted
(d) real and inverted
Answer:
The image formed by a concave lens is always virtual and erect.

Question 6.
A convex lens forms a virtual image of an object placed………..
(a) at infinity
(b) at a distance 2F from the lens
(c) at a distance F from the lens
(d) between the principal focus and the optical centre of the lens.
Answer:
A convex lens forms a virtual image of an object placed between the principal focus and the optical centre of the lens.

Question 7.
When an object is placed at 2F1 of a convex lens, its image is formed………..
(a) at F1
(b) at 2F2
(c) beyond 2F2
(d) on the same side as the object
Answer:
When an object is placed at 2F1 of a convex lens, its image is formed at 2F2

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 8.
To obtain an image of the same size as that of an object with the help of a convex lens, the object should be placed………..
(a) at infinity
(b) beyond F1
(c) between F1 and 2F1
(d) at 2F1
Answer:
To obtain an image of the same size as that of an object with the help of a convex lens, the object should be placed at 2F1

Question 9.
When an object is placed between O and F1 in front of a convex lens, the image formed is ………..
(a) enlarged and erect
(b) diminished and erect
(c) real and enlarged
(d) diminished and inverted
Answer:
When an object is placed between O and F1 in front of a convex lens, the image formed is enlarged and erect.

Question 10.
When an object is placed at any finite distance from a concave lens, the image is formed ………..
(a) between F1 and 2F1
(b) beyond 2F1
(c) at F1
(d) between F1 and O on the same side as the object.
Answer:
When an object is placed at any finite distance from a concave lens, the image is formed between F1 and O on the same side as the object.

Question 11.
A student obtained a clear image of window grills on the screen. But the teacher told him to get the image of a tree far away, instead of the window. To get a clear image, the lens must be ……….. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
(a) moved towards the screen
(b) moved away from the screen
(c) moved behind the screen
(d) moved far away from the screen
Answer:
A student obtained a clear image of window grills on the screen. But the teacher told him to get the image of a tree far away, instead of the window. To get a clear image, the lens must be moved towards the screen.

Question 12.
The image obtained while finding the focal length of a convex lens is ……….. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
(a) real and erect
(b) virtual and erect
(c) real and inverted
(d) virtual and inverted
Answer:
The image obtained while finding the focal length of a convex lens is real and inverted.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 13.
Yash found out f1 and f2 of a symmetric convex lens experimentally. Then which of the following conclusions is true? (Practice Activity Sheet – 4)
(a) f1 = f2
(b) f1 > f2
(c) f1 < f2
(d) f1 ≠ f2
Answer:
(a) f1 = f2

State whether the following statements are true or false: (If a statement is false, correct it and rewrite it.)

Group (A)

Question 1.
Power of a lens, P = \(\frac{1}{f}\).
Answer:
True.

Question 2.
If the power of a lens is 2 D, its focal length = 0.5 m.
Answer:
True.

Question 3.
A concave lens is a converging lens. (March 2019)
Answer:
False. (A concave lens is a diverging lens.)

Question 4.
A convex lens is a diverging lens.
Answer:
False. (A convex lens is a converging lens.)

Question 5.
A concave lens always forms a virtual image.
Answer:
True.

Question 6.
A convex lens always forms a virtual image.
Answer:
False. (A convex lens forms a real image or a virtual image depending on the object distance.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 7.
Due to the light sensitive cells in the eye, we get information about the brightness or dimness of the object and the colour of the object.
Answer:
True.

Question 8.
The focal length of a concave lens is negative.
Answer:
True.

Question 9.
The magnification produced by a concave lens is positive or negative depending on the object distance.
Answer:
False. (The magnification produced by a concave lens is always positive.)

Question 10.
The magnification produced by a convex lens is positive or negative depending on the object distance.
Answer:
True.

Question 11.
A concave lens is used as a magnifying glass.
Answer:
False. (A convex lens is used as a magnifying glass.)

Question 12.
A convex lens is used as a simple microscope.
Answer:
True.

Question 13.
A concave lens is used to correct myopia.
Answer:
True.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 14.
A convex lens is used to correct hypermetropia.
Answer:
True.

Group (B)

Question 1.
When red light falls on the eyes, the cells responding to red light get excited more than those responding to other colours and we get the sensation of red colour.
Answer:
True.

Question 2.
When an object is placed in front of a concave lens, its image is obtained on the opposite side of the object.
Answer:
False. (When an object is kept in front of a concave lens, its image is obtained on the same side of the lens as the object.)

Question 3.
The image formed by a concave lens is always virtual.
Answer:
True.

Question 4.
The principal focus of a convex lens is virtual.
Answer:
False. (The principal focus of a convex lens is real.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 5.
An object of height 2 cm forms an image of height 3 cm when placed in front of a concave lens.
Answer:
False. (An object of height 2 cm forms an image of height less than 2 cm when placed in front of a concave lens.)

Question 6.
Absence of rod like cells results in colour blindness.
Answer:
False. (Absence of conical cells results in colour-blindness.)

Question 7.
Nearsightedness can be corrected using spectacles having convex lenses.
Answer:
False. (Nearsightedness can be corrected using spectacles having concave lenses.)

Question 8.
Farsightedness can be corrected using spectacles having convex lenses of suitable focal length.
Answer:
True.

Question 9.
As one grows old, ciliary muscles become weak.
Answer:
True.

Question 10.
In a simple microscope, the object is placed within the focal length of the convex lens.
Answer:
True.

Question 11.
A compound microscope forms an erect and real image of a small object.
Answer:
False. (A compound microscope forms an inverted and virtual image of a small object.)

Question 12.
In a compound microscope, a real image acts as an object for the eyepiece.
Answer:
True.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 13.
In television, we see a continuous picture due to persistence of vision.
Answer:
True.

Question 14.
The conical cells can respond differently to red, green and blue colours.
Answer:
True.

Question 15.
The rod like cells respond to colours and communicate the presence of colours in the retinal image of the brain.
Answer:
False. (The rod like cells respond to the intensity of light and communicate the degree of brightness and darkness, to the brain.)

Question 16.
The conical cells respond to the intensity of light and communicate the degree of brightness and darkness to the brain.
Answer:
False. (The conical cells respond to colours and communicate the presence of colours in the retinal image to the brain.)

Question 17.
Generally, using the same objective lens, but different eyepieces, different magnification can be obtained.
Answer:
True.

Find the odd one out and give the reason:

Question 1.
Simple microscope, Compound microscope, Telescope, Myopia.
Answer:
Myopia. It is a defect of vision; others are instruments.

Question 2.
Myopia, Presbyopia, Hypermetropia, Spectrometer.
Answer:
Spectrometer. It is an instrument; others are defects of vision.

Question 3.
Presbyopia, Retina, Nearsightedness, Farsightedness.
Answer:
Retina. It is a part of the eye; others are defects of vision.

Question 4.
Compound microscope, Kaleidoscope, Simple microscope, Astronomical telescope.
Answer:
Kaleidoscope. Others are optical instruments.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 5.
TV, Motion picture, Complete circle formed by a revolving burning incense stick, Colour blindness.
Answer:
Colour-blindness. Others are examples of persistence of vision.

Question 6.
Planets, Stars, Satellites, Rainbow.
Answer:
Rainbow. Others are celestial bodies.

Considering the correlation between the words of the first pair, pair the third word accordingly with proper answer:

Question 1.
Nearsightedness: Elongated eyeball :: Farsightedness:………
Answer:
Flattened eyeball

Question 2.
Convex lens : Converging :: Concave lens :………..
Answer:
Diverging

Question 3.
Object at 2F1 of a convex lens : Image at 2F2 :: Object at F1 :………..
Answer:
Image on the opposite side at infinity

Question 4.
Magnification positive : Erect image :: Magnification negative :………..
Answer:
Inverted image

Question 5.
Convex lens : Positive power of the lens :: Concave lens:
Answer:
Negative power of the lens.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 6.
\(\frac{1}{f(\text { in metre })}\) : Power of the lens (in dioptre) :: \(\frac{\text { Image distance }}{\text { Object distance }}\)
Answer:
Magnification.

Question 7.
Focal length : Metre :: Power of a lens :………..
Answer:
Dioptre.

Question 8.
Iris : Pupil :: Ciliary muscles :……….
Answer:
Eye lens

Question 9.
Nearsightedness : Concave lens :: Farsightedness :………..
Answer:
Convex lens

Question 10.
Nearsightedness : Image in front of the retina :: Farsightedness :………..
Answer:
Image behind the retina

Question 11.
Observation of stars and planets : Telescope :: Repairing a watch :……….
Answer:
Simple microscope

Question 12.
Cinema : Persistence of vision :: Rainbow :………
Answer:
Refraction, dispersion and internal reflection of light.

Match the following:

Question 1.

Column A Column B
(1) Conical cells (a) Intensity of light
(2) Rod like cells (b) Colour of an image
(3) Pupil (c) Iris
(4) Cornea (d) Aperture
(e) Transparent

Answer:
(1) Conical cells – Colour of an image
(2) Rod like cells – Intensity of light
(3) Pupil – Aperture
(4) Cornea – Transparent.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 2.

Column A Column B
(1) Magnification (a) \(\frac{1}{f}\)
(2) Power of a lens (b) \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\)
(3) Focal length (c) f
(4) Distance of an object from a lens (d) u
(e) \(\frac{h_{1}}{h_{2}}\)

Answer:
(1) Magnification: \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\)
(2) Power of a lens: \(\frac{1}{f}\)
(3) Focal length: f
(4) Distance of an object from a lens: u.

Question 3.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 16
Answer:
(1) Lens: \(\frac{1}{f}: \frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}\)
(2) Magnification: \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\)
(3) Refractive index: \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\)

Question 4.

Column A Column B
(Convex lens) (a) Image virtual, erect and enlarged
(1) Object at 2F1 (b) Image real, inverted and of the same size
(2) Object between F1 and 2F1 (c) Image real, inverted and highly diminished
(3) Object between O and F1 (d) Image real, inverted and highly enlarged
(4) Object at infinity (e) Image real, inverted and enlarged

Answer:
(1) Object at 2F1 – Image real, inverted and of the same size
(2) Object between F1 and 2F1 – Image real, inverted and enlarged
(3) Object between O and F1 – Image virtual, erect and enlarged
(4) Object at infinity – Image real, inverted and highly diminished

Question 5.

Column A Column B
(1) Nearsightedness (a) Ciliary muscles become weak
(2) Farsightedness (b) Image in front of the retina
(3) Presbyopia (c) Colour-blindness
(d) Image behind the retina

Answer:
(1) Nearsightedness – Image in front of the retina
(2) Farsightedness – Image behind the retina
(3) Presbyopia – Ciliary muscles become weak

Question 6.

Column A Column B
(1) Convex lens (a) To see small objects clearly
(2) Astronomical telescope (b) To observe minute objects
(3) Compound microscope (c) To observe astronomical objects such as stars, planets, etc.
(4) Simple microscope (d) Presbyopia
(e) Power of a lens

Answer:
(1) Convex lens – Presbyopia
(2) Astronomical telescope – To observe astronomical objects such as stars, planets, etc.
(3) Compound microscope – To observe minute objects
(4) Simple microscope – To see small objects clearly.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 7.

Column A Column B
(1) Persistence of vision (a) Lenses and mirrors are used
(2) Reflecting telescope (b) To see objects far away from us
(3) Telescope (c) Motion picture
(4) Compound microscope (d) To observe blood
(e) Convex lens

Answer:
(1) Persistence of vision – Motion picture
(2) Reflecting telescope – Lenses and mirrors are used
(3) Telescope – To see objects far away from us
(4) Compound microscope – To observe blood corpuscles.

Name the following:

Question 1.
Name the lens which forms a real image or a virtual image depending on the position of the object.
Answer:
A convex lens.

Question 2.
Name the lens which produces magnification always less than 1.
Answer:
A concave lens.

Question 3.
Name the lens which always forms an image virtual and smaller than the object.
Answer:
A concave lens.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 4.
Name the lens used to obtain the image on a screen.
Answer:
A convex lens.

Question 5.
Name the lens for which the image always lies between the object and the lens.
Answer:
A concave lens.

Question 6.
Name the instrument used to observe bacteria.
Answer:
A compound microscope.

Question 7.
Name the instrument used to observe planets.
Answer:
An astronomical telescope.

Answer the following questions in one sentence each:

Question 1.
An object is placed at 60 cm from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. State the nature and size of the image relative to that of the object.
Answer:
The image is real, inverted and smaller than the object.

Question 2.
If an object is placed at 50 cm from a convex lens of focal length 25 cm, what will be the image distance?
Answer:
The image distance will be.50 cm.

Question 3.
An object is placed at 40 cm from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. State the nature and the size of the image relative to that of the object.
Answer:
The image is real, inverted and of the same size as that or the object.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 4.
An object is placed at 30 cm from a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. State the nature and the size of the image relative to that of the object.
Answer:
The image is real, inverted and larger than the object.

Question 5.
An object is placed at 15 cm from a convex lens of focal length 25 cm. State the nature and size of the image relative to that of the object.
Answer:
The image is virtual, erect and larger than the object.

Question 6.
State the type of lens that can be used to burn paper in sunlight at noon.
Answer:
A convex lens can be used to burn paper in sunlight at noon.

Question 7.
State the type of lens used to correct myopia.
Answer:
A concave lens is used to correct myopia.

Question 8.
State the type of lens used to correct hypermetropia.
Answer:
A convex lens is used to correct hypermetropia.

Question 9.
If two lenses with focal lengths 10 cm and – 20 cm respectively are kept in contact with each other, what will be the effective power of the combination of the lenses?
Answer:
The effective power of the combination of the lenses will be + 5 D.

Question 10.
If two lenses with focal lengths – 10 cm and 40 cm respectively are kept in contact with each other, what can you say about the behaviour of the combination of the lenses?
Answer:
The combination of the lenses will behave as a concave lens.

Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
What is a lens?
Answer:
A lens is a transparent material bound by two surfaces, out of which at least one surface is spherical.
[Note: A lens is normally made of glass or plastic.]

Question 2.
In which instruments have you seen a lens?
Answer:
We have seen a lens in a microscope and a telescope.

Question 3.
How is a lens different from a mirror?
Answer:
A mirror has one reflecting surface. By reflection of light, it forms an image of the object placed in front of it. A mirror is not transparent. A lens has two surfaces that form an image by refraction of light. A lens is transparent.

Question 4.
Make a list of optical devices you know.
Answer:
Microscope, telescope, binoculars, camera, projector.

Question 5.
Do you know which is the natural optical device?
Answer:
Yes. The eye is the natural optical device.

Question 6.
What is a convex lens?
Answer:
A lens having both spherical surfaces puffed up outwards is called a convex lens or double convex lens or biconvex lens. It is thicker in the middle than at the edges.
[Note: A convex lens is also called a converging lens.]

Question 7.
What is a concave lens?
Answer:
A lens having both spherical surfaces curved inwards is called a concave lens or double concave lens or biconcave lens. It is thicker at the edges than in the middle.
[Note: A concave lens is also called a diverging lens.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 8.
Draw neat labelled diagrams: Types of lenses.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 17
[Note: Positive meniscus behaves as a convex lens as it is thicker in the middle than at the edges. Negative meniscus behaves as a concave lens as it is thicker at the edges than in the middle.]

Question 9.
In general, when a ray of light passes through a lens, there occurs a change in its direction of propagation. Why?
Answer:
The working of a lens is similar to that of a triangular prism. When a ray of light passes through a lens, it is refracted twice: When entering the lens and when emerging from the lens. There is a change 5 in its direction of propagation every time and as both the changes occur in the same sense, the direction of propagation of the emergent ray is different from that of the incident ray.

Question 10.
State the rules used for drawing ray diagrams for the formation of an image by a convex lens.
Answer:
Rules used for drawing ray diagrams for the formation of an image by a convex lens:
(1) When the incident ray is parallel to the principal axis, the refracted ray passes through the principal focus.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 18
(2) When the incident ray passes through the principal focus, the refracted ray is parallel to the principal axis.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 19
(3) When the incident ray passes through the optical centre of the lens, it passes without changing its direction.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 20

Question 11.
In the case of a convex lens, show the path of the refracted ray when the incident ray of light (1) is parallel to the principal axis of the lens (2) passes through the focus of the lens (3) passes through the optical centre of the lens.
Answer:
1.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 21

2.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 22

3.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 23

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 12.
Draw neat and well labelled ray diagrams for image formation by convex lens when an object is (1) at infinity (2) beyond 2F1 (3) at 2F1 (4) between F1 and 2F1 (5) at focus F1 (6) between focus F1 and optical centre O. Also, in each case, state the position, nature and size of the image relative to that of the object.
Answer:
(1) Object at infinity:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 24
In this case, the image is formed at focus F2 of the convex lens. It is real, inverted and highly diminished (point-sized).

(2) Object beyond 2F1:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 25
In this case, the image is formed between F2 and 2F2. It is real, inverted and diminished.

(3) Object at 2F1:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 26
In this case, the image is formed at 2F2. It is real, inverted and of the same size as that of the object.

(4) Object between F1 and 2F1:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 27
In this case, the image is formed beyond 2F2. It is real, inverted and magnified (enlarged).

(5) Object at focus F1:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 28
In this case, the image is formed at infinity. It is real, inverted and infinitely large (highly magnified).

(6) Object between focus F1 and optical centre O:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 29
In this case, the image is formed on the same side of the lens as the object. It is virtual, erect and larger than the object.
[Note: Here, the image is virtual. Hence, it is shown by a dotted line.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 13.
Observe the following figure and complete the table: (March 2019)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 30
Answer:

Point Answer
(i) Position of the object Between F1 and O
(ii) Position of the image On the same side of the lens as the object
(iii) Size of the image Very large
(iv) Nature of the image Virtual and erect

Question 14.
At which position will you keep an object in front of a convex lens to get a real image smaller than the object? Draw a figure.
Answer:
The object should be placed beyond 2F1.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 31

Question 15.
State the rules used for drawing ray diagrams for the formation of an image by a concave lens.
Answer:

  1. When the incident ray is parallel to the principal axis, the refracted ray, when extended backwards, passes through the principal focus.
  2. When the incident ray is directed towards the principal focus F2, the refracted ray is parallel to the principal axis.
  3. When the incident ray passes through the optical centre of the lens, it passes without changing its direction.

Question 16.
State the characteristics of an image formed by a concave lens.
Answer:
The image formed by a concave lens is always virtual, erect and smaller than the object. It is on the same side of the lens as the object. Generally, it is formed between the optical centre of the lens and the principal focus F1. If the object is at infinity, the image is a point image formed at F1.

Question 17.
In the case of image formation by a concave lens, what can you say about the position, nature and size of the image relative to the size of the object?
Answer:
Image formation by a concave lens :
(1) If the object is at infinity, the image is formed at the focus of the lens, on the same side of the lens as the object. It is virtual, erect and much smaller than the object (point image).

(2) If the object is at any finite distance from the lens, the image is formed on the same side of the lens as the object and between the focus and the optical centre of the lens. It is virtual, erect and smaller than the object. The image distance is less than the object distance.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 18.
Draw a ray diagram to show image formation by a concave lens.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 32
PQ : Object
P’Q’ : Image (virtual, therefore shown by a dotted line),
O : Optical centre,
F1 : Principal focus,
f : Focal length of the lens
[Note: If in a Board examination, incomplete diagram (as shown below) is given, students should complete it and label its parts as shown in Figure.]
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 33

Question 19.
State the Cartesian sign convention for refraction of light (image formation) by a lens.
Answer:
Cartesian sign convention for refraction of light (image formation) by a lens:
In this case, the optical centre (O) of the lens is taken as the origin and the principal axis of the lens is taken as X-axis of the coordinate system.

(1) The object is always placed at the left of the lens.
All distances parallel to the principal axis are measured from the optical centre of the lens.
(2) All distances measured to the right of the origin are taken as positive while distances measured to the left of the origin are taken as negative.
(3) Distances measured perpendicular to and above the principal axis are taken as positive.
(4) Distances measured perpendicular to and below the principal axis are taken as negative.
(5) The focal length of a convex lens is positive and that of a concave lens is negative. (Fig. 7.21)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 34
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 35

Question 20.
(i) What is a lens formula? (ii) State it.
Answer:
(i) The relationship between the object distance (u), image distance (v) and focal length (J) of a lens is called the lens formula.
(ii) It is \(\frac{1}{v}-\frac{1}{u}=\frac{1}{f}\)
[Note: The lens formula holds good for all values of u and v and is applicable to a convex lens as well as a concave lens. The sign convention for u, v and f must tie used in solving numerical examples.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 21.
What is meant by the magnification produced by a lens? State the formulae for it.
Answer:
The magnification (M) produced by a lens is the ratio of the height of the image (h2) to the height of the object (h1).
M = \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\)……….(1)
Also M = \(\frac{v(\text { image distance })}{u \text { (object distance) }}\)……………(2)

Question 22.
When is the magnification produced by a lens (1) positive (2) negative?
Answer:
The magnification produced by a lens is
(1) Positive when the image is virtual (as it is erect)
(2) Negative when the image is real (as it is inverted).

Question 23.
Express the magnification produced by a lens in terms of the focal length of the lens and (1) the object distance (2) the image distance.
Answer:
Magnification (M) produced by a lens
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 36
where f is the focal length of the lens:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 37
(2) From eq. (2), we have
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 38

Question 24.
An object is kept in front of a lens of focal length + 10 cm. Describe the nature of the image in the following cases: (1) The object” distance is 25 cm. (2) The object distance is 5 cm.
Answer:
Since, the focal length of the lens ( +10 cm) is positive, it is a convex lens.
(1) If an object is kept at 25 cm from the lens, the image will be real, inverted and smaller than the object.
(2) If an object is kept at 5 cm from the lens, the image will be virtual, erect and larger than the object.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 25.
Anu and Anand have concave and convex lenses respectively. They took lenses in sunlight and tried to burn two pieces of paper of equal areas and temperature. State which lens will burn the paper. Give the reason. Explain with the help of a diagram, why the other paper did not burn.
Answer:
(1) The convex lens will burn the paper. See Fig. 7.22 for reference. The ray of sunlight will converge at the principal focus of the lens. Hence, if the paper is held at the focus, it will burn due to concentration of heat energy.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 39
(2) The paper held in front of the concave lens, will not burn. For reference, see Fig. 7.23. The concave lens will diverge the rays of sunlight falling on it. Hence, the paper will not burn.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 40

Question 26.
To obtain a magnified real image of a small film strip, which type of lens is used? Where is the film strip placed to obtain the image on the screen?
Answer:
To obtain a magnified real image of a small film strip, a convex lens is used. The film strip is placed between F1 and 2F1 and the screen is placed on the other side of the lens.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 27.
When an object of height 2 cm is placed in front of a convex lens, the height of the image is found to be 3 cm. State the nature and position of the image giving reason.
Answer:
When an object is placed between the optical centre and the principal focus of a convex lens, the image formed by the lens is virtual and larger than the object. When an object is placed between F1 and 2F1 the image formed by the lens is real and larger than the object.

In the above case, if the image is virtual, it will be erect and on the same side of the lens as that of the object. If the image is real, it will be inverted and beyond 2F2 on the other side of the lens with respect to the object.

Question 28.
You are given a lens which gives a virtual, erect and enlarged image. What type of lens is it?
Answer:
Since the lens gives a virtual, erect and enlarged image, it must be a convex lens.

Question 29.
When an object of height 3 cm is placed in front of a concave lens, the height of the image is found to be 6 cm. State, giving the reason, whether the given statement is true or false.
Answer:
When an object is placed in front of a concave lens, the image formed by the lens is always smaller than the object. In the statement given in the question, the height of the image is reported as greater than that of the object. Hence, the statement given in the question is false.

Question 30.
State two uses of a concave lens.
Answer:

  1. A concave lens is used to correct myopia (nearsightedness).
  2. In some optical instruments, a combination of a concave lens and a convex lens is used.

Question 31.
State two uses of a convex lens.
Answer:
A convex lens is used (1) to read words in small print (2) to correct hypermetropia (Far-sightedness).

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 32.
An object is kept in front of a lens of j focal length – 20 cm. Describe the nature of the image when the object distance is 25 cm.
Answer:
Since the focal length of the lens (- 20 cm) is negative, it is a concave lens.
If an object is kept at 25 cm from the lens, the image will be virtual, erect and smaller than the object.
[Note: The nature of the image is independent of the object distance as it is a concave lens.]

Question 33.
An object is placed in front of a convex lens of focal length 20 cm. If the object distance is changed from 60 cm to 40 cm, what can you say about the size of the image relative to that of the object?
Answer:
In this case, the focal length (f) of the lens is 20 cm.
∴ 2f = 40 cm.
When the object distance is 60 cm (which is greater than 2f), the image will be smaller than the object. When the object distance becomes 40 cm (which is equal to 2f), the image will be of the same size as that of the object.

Question 34.
What is the power of a lens?
Answer:
The capacity of a lens to converge or diverge incident rays is called its power. The power (P) of a lens is the inverse of the focal length (f) of the lens.
P = \(\frac{1}{f}\)

Question 35.
What is the unit of power of a lens? Define it.
Answer:
The unit of power of a lens is the dioptre (D).
One dioptre is the power of a lens whose focal length is one metre.
1 dioptre (D) = \(\frac{1}{1 \text { metre }(\mathrm{m})}\)
[Note: The dioptre, the SI unit of power of a lens, is denoted by D.]

Question 36.
What is the sign of the power of (i) a convex lens (ii) a concave lens?
Answer:
The power of a convex lens is positive while that of a concave lens is negative.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 37.
If there is an increase or decrease in the focal length of a lens, what will be the effect on the power of the lens?
Answer:
The power of a lens is the inverse of its focal length. Hence, if there is an increase in the focal length of a lens, the power of the lens will decrease accordingly. Similarly, if there is a decrease in the focal length of a lens, the power of the lens will increase accordingly.

Question 38.
If two lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are kept in contact with each other, state the formula for the focal length of the combination. If P1 and P2 are the powers of these lenses, state the formula for the power of the combination.
Answer:
If two lenses of focal lengths f1 and f2 are kept in contact with each other, the focal length (f) of the combination is given by \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{f_{1}}+\frac{1}{f_{2}}\)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 41
[Two lenses kept in contact with each other]
If P1 and P2 are the powers of these lenses, the power (P) of the combination is given by P = P1 + P2.
[Note: The figures are given only for reference.]

Question 39.
Draw a neat labelled diagram to show the structure of the human eye.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 42

Question 40.
What is cornea?
Answer:
The cornea is a thin and transparent cover (membrane) on the human eye through which light enters the eye. Maximum refraction of light rays entering the eye occurs at the cornea.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 41.
What is iris?
Answer:
The iris is a dark fleshy screen (muscular diaphragm) behind the cornea in the human eye. Its colours are different for different people.

Question 42.
What is pupil?
Answer:
The pupil is a small circular opening of changing diameter at the centre of the iris in the human eye.

Question 43.
What is the use of the pupil in the human eye?
Answer:
The pupil in the human eye is useful for controlling and regulating the amount of light entering the eye. The pupil contracts in the presence of too much light and dilates when light is insufficient, thus changing the amount of light entering the eye.

Question 44.
With reference to the functioning of the pupil in the human eye, what is adaptation?
Answer:
The tendency of the pupil in the human eye to adjust the opening for light, depending on the intensity of incident light, to control and regulate the amount of light entering the eye is called adaptation.

Question 45.
What is the shape and the size of the human eyeball?
Answer:
The human eyeball is approximately spherical in shape with a diameter of about 2.4 cm.

Question 46.
Name the part of the human eye that forms a transparent bulge on the surface of the eyeball.
Answer:
The cornea forms a transparent bulge on the surface of the eyeball.

Question 47.
Which part of the human eye is located just behind the pupil?
Answer:
A transparent biconvex crystalline lens is located just behind the pupil in the human eye.

Question 48.
What is retina?
Answer:
The retina is a light sensitive screen consisting of a delicate membrane with a large number of light sensitive cells.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 49.
What is the nature of the eye lens and what does the eye lens do?
Answer:
The eye lens is a double convex transparent crystalline lens, just behind the pupil. The eye lens provides small adjustment of focal length to form a real and inverted sharp image on the retina.

Question 50.
What happens when light falls on the retina?
Answer:
When light falls on the retina, light sensitive cells of the retina are activated. They generate electrical signals which are passed by optic nerves to the brain. The brain interprets the signals and processes the information such that we perceive the object as it is.

Question 51.
What are ciliary muscles?
Answer:
The muscles which hold the eye lens in its position, and bring about changes in the shape (curvature) of the eye lens, and hence of focal length are known as ciliary muscles.

Question 52.
What is the focal length of the eye lens of a normal eye in relaxed position of eye muscles?
Answer:
The focal length of the eye lens of a normal eye in relaxed position of eye muscles is about 2 cm.

Question 53.
Where does the second focal point of the eye lens of a normal eye in relaxed position of eye muscles lie?
Answer:
The second focal point of the eye lens of a normal eye in relaxed position of eye muscles lies on the retina.

Question 54.
What is meant by power of accommodation of the eye?
Answer:
The ability of the eye lens to adjust its focal length is called the power of accommodation of the eye.

Question 55.
Explain the term power of accommoda¬tion of the eye.
(OR)
Write a short note on the power of accommodation of the eye.
Answer:
Power of accommodation of the eye: The eye lens is held in its position by the ciliary muscles. When we look at a nearby object, the ciliary muscles compress the eye lens so that it becomes rounded. Hence, the focal length of the eye lens decreases. Therefore, the image is formed on the retina of the eye and hence the nearby object is seen clearly.

When we look at a distant object, the ciliary muscles relax so that the eye lens becomes flat. Hence, the focal length of the eye lens increases. Therefore, the image is formed on the retina of the eye and hence the distant object is seen clearly. This ability of the eye lens to adjust its focal length is called the power of accommodation of the eye.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 56.
What is meant by accommodation? How is it brought about?
Answer:
The process of focusing the eye on objects at different distances is called accommodation. It is brought about by changing the curvature of the f elastic eye lens making it thinner or thicker.

Question 57.
The human eye is very similar to a photographic camera. The figure given shows the main parts of a photographic camera. Now answer the following questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 43
(1) Name the parts of the human eye similar to the following parts of the photographic camera :
(a) Photographic film (b) Aperture.
(2) State one difference between the human eye lens and camera lens.
(3) Name the muscles which adjust the curvature of the eye lens.
(4) Which phenomenon of light is responsible for the working of the eye?
Answer:
(1) (a) The retina in the human eye is similar to the photographic film in a camera.
(b) The pupil in the human eye is similar to the aperture in a camera.
(2) In a photographic camera, the focal length of the lens changes when the position of the lens is changed. In the human eye, the focal length of the eye lens is changed by the ciliary muscles and the distance of the image from the eye lens is fixed.
(3) The ciliary muscles adjust the curvature of the eye lens.
(4) The refraction of light is responsible for the working of the eye.

Question 58.
Have you seen a photographic camera in which a film is used? Compare the human eye with it. State similarities between them. State the points of difference between them.
Answer:
Yes, we have seen a photographic camera in which a film is used.
Cameras, in general, have various shapes and sizes. Some cameras are much bigger than the human eye while some are smaller than the human eye. Here we shall consider a simple camera.

Similarities: In the case of a camera as well as the human eye, it is possible to control the amount of incoming light with the help of a diaphragm and an aperture. Both use a convex lens for focusing. The photographic film in a camera is coated with a photosensitive material. The retina in the eye consists of a large number of light sensitive cells. The photographic film in a camera is processed using chemicals and then prints (photographs) can be obtained using the appropriate paper.

In the human eye, the electrical signals generated by light sensitive cells are passed by optic nerves to the brain which interprets them.

Differences: Cameras come in a variety of sizes and shapes unlike the human eye. Unlike the human eye, a wide variation in exposure time is possible in the case of cameras. The human eye is sensitive in the visible region (red to violet) of the electromagnetic spectrum, while a much wider range of the electromagnetic spectrum can be covered with cameras designed for specific J purposes. In comparison with the human eye, a wider view and range can be covered by a camera.

In comparison with the human eye, a wider intensity (of light) range can be covered with a camera. The retina is indispensable in the human eye, while cameras without a photographic film have been designed with the help of photosensitive materials and are in current use.

[Note: With advances in technology, improved cameras are designed all the time, and the list of differences between the human eye and a camera in general would be practically endless.]

Question 59.
What is meant by the minimum distance of distinct vision?
Answer:
The minimum distance from the normal eye, at which an object is clearly visible without stress on the eye is called the minimum distance of distinct vision.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 60.
Explain the term minimum distance of distinct vision.
(OR) Write a short note on distance of distinct vision.
Answer:
Minimum distance of distinct vision; Though the focal length of the eye lens is adjustable, it cannot be decreased below a certain limit. Hence, if an object is very close to the eye, it cannot be seen clearly. For a normal human eye, the minimum distance from the eye at which an object is clearly visible without stress on the eye, is called the minimum distance of distinct vision. For the normal human eye, it is 25 cm.

Question 61.
State four reasons related to problems of vision.
Answer:
Problems of vision are related to (i) weakening of ciliary muscles (ii) change in the size of the eyeball (iii) irregularities on the surface of cornea (iv) formation of a membrane over the eye lens.

Question 62.
What is myopia or nearsightedness? What are the possible reasons of myopia? How is myopia corrected? Explain with diagrams.
Answer:
Myopia or nearsightedness is the defect of vision in which a human eye can see nearby objects distinctly but is unable to see distant objects clearly as they appear indistinct.
In this case the image of a distant object is formed in front of the retina instead of on the retina. [Figs. 7.29 (a), 7.29 (b)]

Possible reasons of myopia: (1) The curvature of the cornea and the eye lens increases. The muscles near the lens cannot relax so that the converging power of the lens remains large. (2) The distance between the eye lens and the retina increases as the eyeball elongates.

Myopia is corrected using a suitable concave lens. Light rays are diverged by the concave lens before they strike the eye lens. A concave lens of proper focal length is chosen to produce the required divergence. Hence, after the converging action of the eye lens, the image is formed on the retina. [Fig. 7.29 (c)]
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 44

Question 63.
Observe the following diagram and answer the questions.
(a) Which eye defect is shown in this diagram?
(b) What are the possible reasons for this eye defect?
(c) How is this defect corrected? Write it in brief.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 45
Answer:
(a) Myopia or Nearsightedness

(b) Possible reasons for the defect:
(i) The curvature of the cornea and the eye lens increases. The muscles near the lens cannot relax so that the converging power of the lens remains large.
(ii) The eyeball elongates so that the distance between the lens and the retina increases.

(c) Correction of the defect: This defect can be corrected using spectacles with concave lenses.
A concave lens diverges the incident rays and these diverged rays can be converged by the lens in the eye to form an image on the retina.

Question 64.
What is the sign of the power of the lens used to correct myopia?
Answer:
The power of the lens used to correct myopia is negative.
[Note: It is a concave lens. Negative focal length Negative power.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 65.
In a Std. X class, out of 40 students, 10 students use spectacles, 2 students have ( positive power and 8 students have negative power of lenses in their spectacles.
Answer the following questions:
(1) What does the negative power indicate?
(2) What does the positive power indicate?
(3) Generally which type of spectacles do most of the students use?
(4) What defect of eyesight do most of the students suffer from?
(5) Give two possible reasons for the above defect.
Answer:
(1) The negative power indicates a concave lens or myopia.
(2) The positive power indicates a convex lens or hypermetropia.
(3) Generally, most of the students use spectacles with concave lenses.
(4) Most of the students suffer from myopia.
(5) Two possible reasons for myopia:

  1. The curvature of the cornea and the eye lens increases. The muscles near the lens cannot relax so that the converging power of the lens remains large.
  2. The distance between the eye lens and the retina increases as the eyeball elongates.

Question 66.
What is hypermetropia or farsightedness? What are the possible reasons of hypermetropia? How is hypermetropia corrected? Explain with figures.
Answer:
Hypermetropia or farsightedness is the defect of vision in which a human eye can see distant objects clearly but is unable to see nearby objects clearly.
In this case the image of a nearby object would fall behind the retina instead of on the retina.
[Figs. 7.31 (a), 7.31 (b)]

Possible reasons of hypermetropia:
(1) Curvature of the cornea and the eye lens decreases. Hence, the converging power of the eye lens becomes less. (2) The distance between the eye lens and retina decreases (relative to the normal eye) and the focal length of the eye lens becomes very large due to the flattening of the eyeball.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 46
Hypermetropia is corrected using a suitable convex lens. Light rays are converged by the convex lens before they strike the eye lens. A convex lens of proper focal length is chosen to produce the required convergence. Hence, after the converging action of the eye lens, the image is formed on the retina. [Fig. 7.31 (c)]

Question 67.
What is the sign of the power of the lens used to correct hypermetropia?
Answer:
The power of the lens used to correct hypermetropia is positive.
[Note: It is a convex lens. Positive focal length ∴ Positive power.]

Question 68.
Given below is a diagram showing a defect of human eye.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 47
Study it and answer the following questions:
(1) Name the defect shown in the figure. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
(2) Give two possible reasons for this defect of eye in human beings.
(3) Name the type of lens used to correct the eye defect.
(4) Draw a labelled diagram to show how the defect is rectified by using the lens.
Answer:
A lens having both spherical surfaces puffed up outwards is called a convex lens or double convex lens or biconvex lens. It is thicker in the middle than at the edges.
[Note: A convex lens is also called a converging lens.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 69.
Observe the following figures and complete the table. (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 48

Question 70.
What is presbyopia? State the reason for this defect. How is presbyopia corrected?
Answer:
Presbyopia is the defect of vision in which aged people find it difficult to see nearby objects comfortably and clearly without spectacles.

Reason of presbyopia: The power of accommodation of eye usually decreases with ageing. The muscles near the eye lens lose their ability to change the focal length of the lens.
Therefore, the near point of the eye lens shifts farther from the eye.

This defect is corrected using a convex lens of appropriate power. The lens converges light rays before they fall on the eye lens such that the action of the eye lens forms the image on the retina.

Question 71.
What is a bifocal lens?
Answer:
A bifocal lens is a lens of which the upper part is a concave lens to correct myopia and the lower part is a convex lens to correct hypermetropia.

[Note: A person suffering from myopia as well as hypermetropia, uses a bifocal lens. Nowadays, the defects of vision such as myopia and hypermetropia can be corrected using contact lenses or by laser surgery.]

Question 72.
(A) Anil cannot see the blackboard writing clearly, but he can see nearby objects clearly.
(i) What is the eye defect he is suffering from?
(ii) How is it corrected?
(B) Anil’s uncle cannot see nearby objects clearly, but he can see distant objects clearly.
(i) What is the eye defect he is suffering from?
(ii) How is it corrected?
Answer:
(A) Anil cannot see the blackboard writing clearly, but he can see nearby objects clearly.
(i) This defect is called myopia (nearsightedness).
(ii) It is corrected using spectacles having concave lenses of appropriate power.

(B) Anil’s uncle cannot see nearby objects clearly, but he can see distant objects clearly.
(i) This defect is called hypermetropia (farsightedness).
(ii) It is corrected using, spectacles having convex lenses of appropriate power.

Question 73.
When are bifocal lenses used in spectacles?
Answer:
When a person cannot see nearby objects as well as distant objects clearly, bifocal lenses are used in spectacles.

Question 74.
Aniket from Std. X uses spectacles. The power of the lenses in his spectacles is -0.5 D. Answer the following questions:
(1) State the type of’ lenses used in his spectacles.
(2) Name the defect of vision Aniket is suffering from.
(3) Find the focal length of the lenses used in his spectacles.
Answer:
(1) Concave lenses are used in the spectacles used by Aniket.
(2) Aniket is suffering from myopia (near-sightedness).
(3) Focal length of the lenses used in his spectacles
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 49
= -2 m (Concave lens ∴ Minus sign)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 75.
Sunita from Std. X uses spectacles. Her spectacle number is -1.5 D. Answer the following questions:
(1) Name the defect of eye from which she is suffering.
(2) What type of lens is she using?
(3) Find the focal length of the lens.
Answer:
(1) Myopia.
(2) Concave.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 50
(Concave lens ∴ minus sign)
This is the focal length of the lens.

Question 76.
Surabhi from Std. X uses spectacles. The power of the lenses in her spectacles is 0.5 D. Answer the following questions from the given information: (March 2019)
(i) Identify the type of lenses used in her spectacles.
(ii) Identify the defect of vision Surabhi is suffering from.
(iii) Find the focal length of the lenses used in her spectacles.
Answer:
(i) Convex lenses are used in the spectacles used by Surabhi.
(ii) Surabhi is suffering from hypermetropia (farsightedness).
(iii) Focal length of the lenses used in her spectacles
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 51

Question 77.
My grandfather uses a bifocal lens in his spectacles. Explain why.
Answer:
In old age, people usually suffer from both myopia and hypermetropia. Therefore, they need spectacles having bifocal lenses.

The upper part of a bifocal lens is a concave lens to correct myopia. The lower part of a bifocal lens is a convex lens to correct hypermetropia.

Question 78.
State uses of concave lens.
Answer:

  1. Concave lenses are used for proper working of medical equipment, scanner, CD player – the instruments that employ laser rays.
  2. One or more concave lenses are used in a small safety device, fitted in the peep hole in a door, due to which we can see a large area outside the door.
  3. Concave lenses are used in spectacles to correct nearsightedness (myopia).
  4. A concave lens is used to spread light emitted by the small bulb in a torch over a wide area.
  5. A concave lens is used in front of the eyepiece or inside the eyepiece fitted in a camera, telescope and microscope – the instruments employing convex lenses.

Question 79.
State uses of a convex lens.
Answer:
Convex lenses are used in a simple microscope, compound microscope, refracting telescope, camera, projector, spectroscope, spectacles for correcting farsightedness (hypermetropia) and binoculars.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 80.
What is meant by the apparent size of an object? With a neat and labelled diagram, explain the relation between the apparent size of an object and the angle subtended by the object at the eye.
Answer:
An object appears small or big depending upon the size of its image formed on the retina of the eye. The size of an object as perceived by the eye is called the apparent size of the object. Consider two objects of the same size, one held near the eye and the other away from the eye as shown in the following figure (Fig. 7.34). The nearby object (PQ) appears larger than the distant object (P1Q1).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 52
Also, the angle a subtended by the nearby object at the eye is larger than the angle β subtended by the distant object at the eye. This shows that the apparent size of an object depends upon the angle subtended by the object at the eye. The greater the angle subtended by the object at the eye, the greater is the apparent size of the object. Similarly, the smaller the angle subtended by the object at the eye, the smaller is the apparent size of the object.

Question 81.
With a neat labelled diagram, explain the working of a simple microscope. State uses of a simple microscope.
(OR)
What does a simple microscope consist of? What is the order of magnification obtained by a simple microscope? What is a simple microscope used for?
Answer:
A simple microscope consists of a convex lens of short focal length, usually fixed in a suitable frame with a handle or mounted on a stand.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 53
The object is placed in front of the convex lens of short focal length such that the object distance is less than the focal length. The image is virtual and larger than the object. It is formed on the same side of the lens as the object.

A maximum magnification of about 20 can be obtained by a simple microscope. A simple microscope is used by watch repairers to observe small parts of a watch and by jewellers to examine ornaments. A simple microscope (also called a magnifying glass) is also used to read words in small print.

Question 82.
With a neat labelled diagram, explain the construction and working of a compound microscope.
Answer:
Construction of a compound microscope:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 54
(1) A compound microscope consists of a metal tube fitted with two convex lenses at the two ends. These lenses are called the objective lens (the lens directed towards the object) and the eyepiece (the lens directed towards the eye). Both the lenses are small in size, but the cross section of the objective lens is less than that of the eyepiece. The objective lens has a short focal length. The focal length of the eyepiece is more than that of the objective lens.

(2) The metal tube is mounted on a stand. The principal axes of the objective lens and the eyepiece are along the same line. The distance between the object and the objective lens can be changed with a screw. It is possible to change the distance between the objective lens and the eyepiece.

Working :
(1) The object to be observed is illuminated and placed in front of the objective lens, slightly beyond the focal length of the objective lens. Its real, inverted and enlarged image is formed by the objective lens on the other side.

(2) This intermediate image lies within the focal length of the eyepiece. It serves as an object for the eyepiece. The eyepiece works as a simple microscope. The final image is virtual, highly enlarged and inverted with respect to the original object. It can be formed at the minimum distance of distinct vision from the eyepiece. The final image is observed by keeping the eye close to the eyepiece.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 83.
State two uses of a compound microscope.
Answer:
Uses of a compound microscope:

  1. It is used to observe blood corpuscles, plant and animals cells, microorganisms like bacteria, etc.
  2. It is used in a pathological laboratory to observe blood, urine, etc.
  3. It is a part of a travelling microscope used for measurement of very small distance.

Question 84.
What will happen if in a compound microscope, the objective lens is large in size and has a focal length?
Answer:
If the objective lens of a compound microscope is large in size, in addition to the light coming from an object, other unwanted light will be incident on the objective lens. Hence, the image will not be seen clearly. If the objective lens has a large focal length, the magnification produced by it will be less.

Question 85.
(a) In which type of microscope do you find the lens arrangement as shown in the following diagram? (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 55
(b) Write in brief, the working of this microscope.
(c) Where is this microscope used?
Answer:
(a) Compound microscope.

(b)
An object appears small or big depending upon the size of its image formed on the retina of the eye. The size of an object as perceived by the eye is called the apparent size of the object. Consider two objects of the same size, one held near the eye and the other away from the eye as shown in the following figure (Fig. 7.34). The nearby object (PQ) appears larger than the distant object (P1Q1).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 56
Also, the angle a subtended by the nearby object at the eye is larger than the angle β subtended by the distant object at the eye. This shows that the apparent size of an object depends upon the angle subtended by the object at the eye. The greater the angle subtended by the object at the eye, the greater is the apparent size of the object. Similarly, the smaller the angle subtended by the object at the eye, the smaller is the apparent size of the object.

(c) A simple microscope is used by watch repairers to observe small parts of a watch and by jewellers to
examine ornaments. A simple microscope (also called a magnifying glass) is also used to read words in small print.

Question 86.
(i) Which type of microscope has the arrangement of lenses shown in the following figure?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 57
(ii) Label the figure correctly.
(iii) Write the working of this microscope.
(iv) Where is this microscope used?
(v) Suggest a way to increase the efficiency of this microscope. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
(i) Compound microscope.

(ii)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 58

(iii) Working:
(1) The object to be observed is illuminated and placed in front of the objective lens, slightly beyond the focal length of the objective lens. Its real, inverted and enlarged image is formed by the objective lens on the other side.

(2) This intermediate image lies within the focal length of the eyepiece. It serves as an object for the eyepiece. The eyepiece works as a simple microscope. The final image is virtual, highly enlarged and inverted with respect to the original object. It can be formed at the minimum distance of distinct vision from the eyepiece. The final image is observed by keeping the eye close to the eyepiece.

(iv)

  1. It is used to observe blood corpuscles, plant and animals cells, microorganisms like bacteria. etc.
  2. It is used in a pathological laboratory to observe blood, urine, etc.
  3. It is a part of a travelling microscope used for measurement of very small distance.

(v) Lenses with appropriate focal lengths should be selected.

Question 87.
State the use of a telescope.
Answer:
A telescope is used to observe a distant object such as mountain, moon, planet, star in the magnified form.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 88.
Observe the following figure and answer the questions. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
(a) Which optical instrument shows arrangement of lenses as shown in the figure?
(b) Write in brief the working of this optical instrument.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 59
(c) How can we get different magnifications in this optical instrument?
(d) Draw the figure again and labelled it properly.
Answer:
(a) Refracting telescope.

(b) working: When the objective lens is pointed towards the distant object to be observed, the rays
of light from the distant object, which are almost parallel to each other. pass through the objective lens. The objective lens collects maximum amount of light as it is large in size. It forms a real, inverted and diminished image in the focal plane of the objective lens. Now, the position of the eyepiece is adjusted such that this image falls just within the focal length of the eyepiece and serves as the object for the eyepiece which works as a simple microscope.

The final image is highly magnified, virtual, on the same side as that of the object and inverted with respect to the original object. The final image can be observed by keeping the eye close to the eyepiece. If the image formed by the objective lens lies in the focal plane of the eyepiece, the final image is formed at infinity.

(c) We can get different magnifications by using the eyepiece with different focal lengths.

(d)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 60

Question 89.
What is persistence of vision? Give one example of persistence of vision.
Answer:
Persistence of vision: We see an object when its image is formed on the retina. The image disappears when the object is removed from our sight. But this is not instantaneous and the image
remains imprinted on the retina for about \(\frac{1}{16}\) th of a second after the removal of the object.

The sensation on the retina persists for a while. This effect is known as the persistence of vision. It is due to persistence of vision that we continue to see the object in its position for about \(\frac{1}{16}\) th of a second after it is removed.
Example: When a burning stick of incense is moved fast in a circle, a circle of red light is seen.

Question 90.
Name two devices whose working is based on the phenomenon of persistence of vision.
(OR)
Name any two applications based on persistence of vision.
Answer:
The working of a television set and motion picture is based on the phenomenon of persistence of vision.
[Note: These are the examples of persistence of vision in daily life.

Question 91.
How is the phenomenon of persistence of vision used in motion pictures?
Answer:
In motion pictures, photographs of a moving object are taken at the rate of more than sixteen pictures per second. These photographs are projected on the screen at the same rate.
Each picture is slightly different from the other. As a result of persistence of vision, we get the impression of observing the object in continuous motion.

Question 92.
Name the two types of light sensitive cells present in the retina of the human eye. What are their functions?
Answer:
(1) The retina of the human eye contains a large number of light sensitive cells. These cells are of two shapes : (i) rods and (ii) cones.
(2) The rod-like cells respond to the intensity of light.
(3) The conical cells respond to various colours of light. They respond differently to red, green and blue colours. They do not respond to faint light.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 93.
When do you say that a person is colour blind?
Answer:
When a person is unable to distinguish between certain colours, he is said to be colour blind.
[Note: (i) Except for being colour-blind, their eyesight is normal, (ii) Rod-shaped cell ≡ rod-like cell, cone-shaped cell = Conical cell.]

Question 94.
Explain the perception of colour in the human eye.
(OR)
Explain in short perception of colour.
(OR)
Write a note on perception of colour.
Answer:
(1) In nature we firld objects of various colours. Perception of colour means to be able to respond to colour.
(2) We can distinguish between various colours due to perception of colour.
(3) The cone-shaped cells on the retina of the eye respond to the various colours when light is bright and communicate to the brain about the colours of the image formed on the retina. This gives us the proper idea about the colours of the object.
(4) If, in the retina of a person, the cone-shaped cells responding to certain specific colours are absent, the person is unable to distinguish between the colours. As a result, he lacks perception of colour.

Question 95.
What is colour-blindness?
Answer:
(1) The retina of the human eye contains a large number of light sensitive cells. These cells are of two shapes : (i) rods and (ii) cones.
(2) The cone-shaped cells respond to various colours of light when light is bright.
(3) Thus, the perception of colour is due to the presence of the cone-shaped cells in the retina.
(4) In the retina of some persons, cone-shaped cells responding to certain specific colours are absent. Hence, these persons are unable to distinguish between certain colours, i.e., they are colour-blind. This defect is known as colour¬blindness.

Question 96.
Why are some persons colour-blind? What is the cause of this defect?
Answer:
In the retina of some persons, cone-shaped cells responding to certain specific colours are absent. Hence, these persons are unable to distinguish between certain colours, i.e., they are colour-blind.

Question 97.
What are the difficulties faced by a colour-blind person?
Answer:
(1) A colour-blind person cannot distinguish between different colours. For example, he cannot distinguish between red and green colours. Also he cannot distinguish between blue and green colours. Red and green, both appear grey. Since a colour¬blind person cannot distinguish between red and green colours, it is difficult for him to cross a road. There is a possibility of an accident while crossing a road.

(2) A colour-blind person cannot distinguish between two objects of different colours, which are otherwise identical, e.g., clothes.

(3) A colour-blind person may have an inferiority complex and hence may find it difficult to mix with other persons.

Give scientific reasons:

Question 1.
A convex lens is known as a converging lens.
Answer:
When rays of light parallel to the principal axis of a convex lens pass through the lens, they converge to a point on the principal axis. Hence, a convex lens is known as a converging lens.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 2.
A concave lens is called a diverging lens.
Answer:
When rays of light parallel to the principal axis of a concave lens pass through the lens, they appear to diverge from a point on the principal axis. Hence, a concave lens is called a diverging lens.

Question 3.
In old age, a bifocal lens is necessary for some persons.
Answer:
(1) Some people, in old age, suffer from myopia (nearsightedness) as well as hypermetropia (farsightedness).
(2) Myopia is corrected using a concave lens of appropriate power. Hypermetropia is corrected using a convex lens of appropriate power. Therefore, they need a bifocal lens.

Question 4.
A person suffering from myopia (nearsightedness) uses spectacles of concave lenses.
Answer:
(1) A person suffering from myopia can see nearby objects clearly as the image of a nearby object is formed on the retina, but cannot see distant objects clearly as the image of a distant object is formed in front of the retina instead of on the retina.

(2) A concave lens diverges the rays of light passing through it. When spectacles of concave lenses of appropriate power are used, the parallel rays coming from a distant object are diverged to proper extent before they are incident on the eye lens. Therefore, after the converging action of the eye lens, the image of a distant object is formed on the retina of the eye and hence the distant object can be seen clearly.

Question 5.
A person suffering from hypermetropia (farsightedness) uses spectacles of convex lenses.
Answer:
(1) A person suffering from hypermetropia can see distant objects clearly as the image of a distant object is formed on the retina, but cannot see nearby objects clearly as the image of a nearby object would be formed behind the retina instead of on the retina.

(2) A convex lens converges the rays of light passing through it. When spectacles of convex lenses of appropriate power are used, the rays of light coming from a nearby object are converged to proper extent before they are incident on the eye lens. Therefore after the converging action of the j eye lens, the image of a nearby object is formed on j the retina of the eye and hence the nearby object | can be seen clearly.

Question 6.
You cannot enjoy watching a movie from a very short distance from the screen in a cinema hall.
Answer:
(1) The less the distance between the screen in a cinema hall and the person watching the movie, the more is the intensity of light falling on the eye.
(2) This results in great contraction of the pupil of the eye causing a strain. Hence, you cannot enjoy watching a movie from a very short distance from the screen in a cinema hall.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 7.
The rays of light travelling through the optical centre of a lens pass without changing their path.
Answer:
The portion of a lens near the optical centre is like a very thin slab of glass. Hence, the rays of light travelling through the optical centre of a lens pass without changing their path.

Question 8.
A convex lens converges the rays of light falling on it.
Answer:

  • A convex lens can be regarded as made of a very large number of portions of triangular prisms. The bases of these prisms are towards the central thicker portion of the lens.
  • A ray of light passing through a prism bends towards its base. Hence, a convex lens converges the rays falling on it.

Question 9.
A concave lens diverges the rays of light falling on it.
Answer:

  • A concave lens can be regarded as made of a very large number of portions of triangular prisms. The bases of these prisms are towards the edges of the less, i.e, away from the central thinner portion of the lens.
  • A ray of light passing through a prism bends towards its base. Hence, a concave lens diverges the rays of light falling on it.

Question 10.
When a burning stick of incense is moved fast in a circle, a circle of red light is seen.
Answer:
The impression of the image on the retina lasts for about \(\frac{1}{16}\) th of a second after the removal of the object. If a burning stick of incense is moved at a rate of more than sixteen revolutions per second, we see a circle of red light due to persistence of vision.

Question 11.
Colour-blind persons are unable to distinguish between different colours.
Answer:
(1) The cone-shaped cells in the retina of a person respond to colours. This makes the perception of colours possible.
(2) In the retina of colour-blind persons, cone-shaped cells responding to certain specific colours are absent. Hence, they are unable to distinguish between different colours.

Question 12.
It is risky to issue a driving license to a person suffering from colour-blindness.
Answer:
A colour-blind person cannot distinguish between different colours. If a driver is colour-blind, he will not be able to distinguish between the colours of the signal and the colours on different sign boards. This will lead to an accident. Hence, it is risky to issue a driving license to a person suffering from colour-blindness.

Distinguish the following:

Question 1.
Real image and Virtual image.
Answer:
Real image:

  1. A real image is formed when the light rays starting from an object meet after reflection or refraction.
  2. It can be projected on a screen.
  3. It is inverted with respect to the object.

Virtual image:

  1. A virtual image is formed when the light rays starting from an object (when extended backward) appear to meet after reflection or refraction.
  2. It cannot be projected on a screen.
  3. It is erect with respect to the object.

Question 2.
Simple microscope and Compound microscope.
Answer:
Simple microscope:

  1. In a simple microscope, only one convex lens is used.
  2. In this case, the object is placed within the focal length of the convex lens.
  3. Its magnifying power is much less than that of a compound microscope.
  4. It is used to observe minute parts of a watch, to read words in small print, etc.

Compound microscope:

  1. In a compound microscope, two convex lenses, objective and eyepiece, are used.
  2. In this case, the object is placed beyond the focal length of the objective lens.
  3. Its magnifying power is much greater than that of a simple microscope.
  4. It is used to observe blood corpuscles, plant and animal cells, etc.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Question 3.
Compound microscope and Astronomical refracting telescope.
Answer:
Compound microscope:

  1. In a compound microscope, the focal length and cross section of the objective lens are respectively smaller than the focal length and cross section of the eyepiece.
  2. In this case, to observe the object, the distance between the object and the objective lens is adjusted.
  3. It forms a magnified image of a small object.
  4. It is used to observe blood corpuscles, plant and animal cells, etc.

Astronomical refracting telescope:

  1. In an astronomical refracting telescope, the focal length and cross section of the objective lens are respectively greater than the focal length and cross section of the eyepiece.
  2. In this case, to observe the object, the distance between the objective lens and eyepiece is adjusted.
  3. It forms a near image of a distant object.
  4. It is used to observe sateulites, planets, stars, etc.

Question 4.
Simple microscope and Astronomical refracting telescope.
Answer:
Simple microscope:

  1. In a simple microscope, only one convex lens is used.
  2. In this case, the object is placed within the focal length of the convex lens.
  3. In this case, the image is erect.
  4. It is used to observe minute parts of a watch, to read words in small print, etc.

Astronomical refracting telescope:

  1. In an astronomical refracting telescope, two convex lenses, objective lens and eyepiece are used.
  2. In this case, the object is far away from the objective lens.
  3. In this case, the image is inverted.
  4. It is used to observe satellites, planets, stars, etc.

Read the following paragraph and answer the questions given below it:

Construction of a compound microscope:
(1) A compound microscope consists of a metal tube fitted with two convex lenses at the two ends. These lenses are called the objective lens (the lens directed towards the object) and the eyepiece (the lens directed towards the eye). Both the lenses are small in size, but the cross section of the objective lens is less than that of the eyepiece. The objective lens has a short focal length. The focal length of the eyepiece is more than that of the objective lens.(2) The metal tube is mounted on a stand. The principal axes of the objective lens and the eyepiece are along the same line. The distance between the object and the objective lens can be changed with a screw. It is possible to change the distance between the objective lens and the eyepiece.
Working:
(1) The object to be observed is illuminated and placed in front of the objective lens, slightly beyond the focal length of the objective lens. Its real, inverted and enlarged image is formed by the, objective lens on the other side.
(2) This intermediate image lies within the focal length of the eyepiece. It serves as an object for the eyepiece. The eyepiece works as a simple microscope. The final image is virtual, highly enlarged and inverted with respect to the original object. It can be formed at the minimum distance of distinct vision from the eyepiece. The final image is observed by keeping the eye close to the eyepiece.
Use: This microscope is used to observe blood cells, microorganisms, etc.

Question 1.
In a compound microscope, which lens has greater focal length?
Answer:
In a compound microscope, the eyepiece has greater focal length.

Question 2.
Where do you place the object to be observed with a compound microscope?
Answer:
In a compound microscope, the object to be observed is placed in front of the objective lens, slightly beyond the focus of the objective lens.

Question 3.
State which distance is adjusted to observe the object with a compound microscope.
Answer:
To observe the object with a compound microscope, the distance between the object and objective lens is adjusted.

Question 4.
State the nature of the final image in compound microscope relative to the object.
Answer:
In a compound microscope, the final image is highly enlarged, inverted and virtual relative to the object.

Question 5.
State the use of a compound microscope.
Answer:
A compound microscope is used to observe blood cells, microorganisms, etc.

Fill in the blanks for a convex lens:

Question 1.

f (m) 0.2 —————– 0.1
P (D) ————— 2 ——————

Answer:
[P (D) = \(\frac{1}{f(\mathrm{m})}\)]

f (m) 0.2 0.5 0.1
P (D) 5 2 10

Question 2.

h1 (cm) —————- 5 10
h2 (cm) -30 -20 —————-
M -2 —————– -0.5

Answer:
[M = \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}\)]

h1 (cm) 15 5 10
h2 (cm) -30 -20 -5
M -2 -4 -0.5

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Solve the following numerical problems:

Problem 1.
An object Is kept at 60 cm in front of a convex lens. Its real image is formed at 20 cm from the lens. Find the focal length or the lens.
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, u = -60 cm,
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 61
The focal length of the lens = 15 cm.

Problem 2.
The focal length of a convex lens is 20 cm. If an object of height 2 cm is placed at 30 cm from the lens, find (i) the position and nature of the Image (ii) the height of the image (iii) the magnification produced by the lens.
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, f = 20 cm,
u = -30 cm, h1 = 2 cm, v = ?, h2 = ?, M = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 62
The image will be formed at 60 cm from the lens and on the other side of the lens with respect to the object. It is a real image.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 63
h2 is negative. This shows that the image is inverted.
The height of the image -4 cm.
(iii) M = \(\frac{h_{2}}{h_{1}}=\frac{-4 \mathrm{cm}}{2 \mathrm{cm}}\) = -2
M is negative, indicating that the image is inverted.
The magnification produced by the lens = -2.

Problem 3.
When a pm of height 3 cm is fixed at 10 cm from a convex lens, the height or the virtual image formed is 12 cm. Find the focal length of the lens.
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, h1 =3 cm,
h2 = 12 cm (virtual image), u = -10 cm, f = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 64
The focal length of the lens = 13.33 cm [approximately]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Problem 4.
At what distance from a convex lens of focal length 2.5 m should a boy stand so that his image is half his height?
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, f= 2.5 m,
M= –\(\frac{1}{2}\), u=?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 65
∴ u = -3f = -3 × 2.5 m = -7.5 m
This is the object distance.
The boy should stand at 7.5 m from the convex lens so that his image is half his height.

Problem 5.
A convex lens forms a real image or a pencil at a distance of 40 cm from the lens. The image formed is of the same size as the object. Find the focal length and power of the lens. At what distance is the pencil placed from the lens?
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, v = 40 cm,
M = -1, f = ?, h1 = ?, u = ?
M = = -1 = \(\frac{v}{u}\)
∴ u = -v = -40 cm (object distance)
The pencil is placed at 40 cm from the convex lens.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 66
The focal length of the lens 20 cm.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 67
The power of the lens = 5 D.

Problem 6.
A spherical lens is used to obtain an image on a screen. The size of the image is four times the size of the object. What is the type of lens and at what distance is the screen placed from the lens?
Solution:
Data: M = -4, type of lens? v = ?
As the image formed by the lens is obtained on a screen, it is a real image. The lens is, therefore, a convex 1ens.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 68
The distance of the screen from the lens = 5f.

Problem 7.
An object of height 5 cm Is held 20 cm away from a converging lens of focal length 10 cm. Find the position, nature and size of the image formed.
Solution:
Data: Converging lens (convex lens),
f = 10 cm, h1 = 5 cm, u = -20 cm, v = ?, h2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 69
The image is real and inverted. it is formed at 20 cm from the lens and on the other side of the lens relative to the object.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 70
The height of the image, h2 = -5 cm
Thus, it is numerically the same as the height of the object.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Problem 8.
An object is placed at 10 cm from a convex lens of focal length 12 m. Find the position and nature of the image.
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, u = -10 cm,
f = 12 cm, v = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 71
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 72
∴ v = -60 cm
It is negative.
The image is formed at 60 cm from the lens and on the same side of the lens relative to the object. It is virtual, erect, and enlarged.

Problem 9.
An object of height 4 cm is placed in front of a concave lens of focal length 40 cm. If the object distance is 60 cm, find the position and height of the image.
Solution:
Data: f = -40 cm (concave lens),
u = -60 cm, h1 = 4 cm, v = ?, h2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 73
The image Is formed at 24 cm from the lens.
It is on the same side as the object.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 74
The height of the image is 1.6 cm.

Problem 10.
What is the power of a convex lens having focal length 0.5 m?
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, f= 0.5 m, P = ?
P = \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{0.5 \mathrm{m}}\) = 2D
The power of the lens = 2D.

Problem 11.
The power of a convex lens is 2.5 dioptres. Find its focal length.
(OR)
Calculate the focal length of a corrective lens having power +2.5 D.
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, P = +2.5 D, f = ?
P = \(\frac{1}{f}\)
∴ 2.5 D = \(\frac{1}{f}\)
∴ f = \(\frac{1}{2.5 \mathrm{D}}\) = 0.4 cm = 40 cm
The focal length of the lens = 40 cm.

Problem 12.
Two convex lenses of focal length 20 cm each are kept in contact with each other. Find the power of their combination.
Solution:
Data: f1 = 20 cm = 0.2 m,
f2 =20 cm = 0.2 m, P (combination) = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 75
∴ Focal length of the combination or the lenses, f = 0.1 m.
P = \(\frac{1}{f}=\frac{1}{0.1 \mathrm{m}}\) = 10 D
The power of the combination of the lenses, P = 10 D.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Problem 13.
Two convex lenses of equal focal lengths are kept in contact with each other. If the power of their combination is 20 D, find the focal length of each convex lens.
Solution:
Data: Convex lens, P = 20 D, f1 = f2 = ?
The focal length (f) of the combination of the lenses is given by
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 76
This gives the focal length or each convex lens.

Problem 14.
If a convex lens of focal length 10 cm and a concave lens of focal length 50 cm are kept in contact with each other, (i) what will be the focal length of the combination? (ii) what wiil be the power of the combination? (iii) what will be the behaviour of the combination (behaviour as a convex lens/concave lens)?
Solution:
Data: f1 = +10 cm = +0.1 m (convex lens),
f2 = -50 cm = -0.5 m (concave lens),
f (combination) = ?, P (combination) = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 77
The focal length or the combination of the lenses = 0.125 m = 12.5 cm.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses 78
The power of the combination of the lenses 8.D.
(iii) The focal length of the combination of the lenses is positive. This shows that the combination will behave as a convex lens.

Numerical problems for practice:

Problem 1.
Find the focal length of a convex lens which produces a real image at 60 cm from the lens when an object is placed at 40 cm in front of the lens.
Answer:
24 cm

Problem 2.
Find the focal length of a convex lens which produces a virtual image at 10 cm from the lens when an object is placed at 5 cm from the lens.
Answer:
10 cm

Problem 3.
A real image is obtained at 30 cm from a convex lens of focal length 7.5 cm. Find the distance of the object from the lens.
Answer:
u = -10 cm

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Problem 4.
An object is kept at 20 cm in front of a convex lens and its real image is formed at 60 cm from the lens. Find (1) the focal length of the lens (2) the height or the image if the height of the object is 6 cm.
Answer:
(1) 15 cm
(2) h2 = -18 cm]

Problem 5.
An object is kept at 10 cm in front of a convex lens. Its image is formed on the screen at 15 cm from the lens. Calculate (1) the focal length of the lens (2) the magnification produced by the lens.
Answer:
(1) 6 cm
(2)M = -1.5

Problem 6.
An object is kept at 60 cm in front of a convex lens of focal length 15 cm. Find the image distance and the nature of the image. Also find the magnification produced by the lens.
Answer:
v = 20 cm. The image is real, inverted and smaller than the object. M = –\(\frac{1}{3}\)]

Problem 7.
An object of height 2 cm is kept at 30 cm from a convex lens. Its real image is formed at 60 cm from the lens. Find the focal length and power of the lens.
Answer:
f = 20 cm, P = 5 D

Problem 8.
If the power of a lens is 4 dioptres, find its focal length.
Answer:
25 cm

Problem 9.
Find the power of a convex lens of focal length 40 cm.
Answer:
2.5 D

Problem 10.
Find the power of a convex lens of focal length 12.5 cm.
Answer:
8 D

Problem 11.
If for a lens, f = – 20 cm, what is the power of the lens?
Answer:
-5 D

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Problem 12.
An object of height 4 cm is kept in front of a concave lens of focal length 20 cm. If the object distance is 30 cm, find the position and the height of the image.
Answer:
v = -12 cm, h2 = 1.6 cm

Problem 13.
If two convex lenses of focal lengths 10 cm and 5 cm are kept in contact with each other, what is their combined focal length?
Answer:
\(\frac{10}{3}\) cm [approximately 3.33 cm]

Problem 14.
If a convex lens of focal length 20 cm and a concave lens of focal length 30 cm are kept in contact with each other, (i) What will be the focal length of the combination? (ii) What will be the power of the combination? (iii) What will be the behaviour of the combination?
Answer:
(i) f = 60 cm
(ii) P = \(\frac{5}{3}\) D = 1.6667 D (approximately)
(iii) The combination will behave as a convex lens.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 7 Lenses

Problem 15.
A concave lens of focal length 12 cm and a convex lens of focal length 20 cm are kept in contact with each other, (i) Find the focal length of the combination, (ii) What will be the behaviour of the combination?
Answer:
(i) f = -30 cm
(ii) The combination will behave as a concave lens.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 1.
Fill in the blanks and explain the completed statements:
a. Refractive index depends on the………….of light.
Answer:
Refractive index depends on the velocity of light.
It is an experimental fact. (There is no question of explanation.)

b. The change in…………of light rays while going from one medium to another is called refraction.
Answer:
The change in the direction of propagation of light rays while going from one medium to another is called refraction. This is definition of refraction. It is assumed that the ray of light passes obliquely from one medium to another. (There is no question of explanation.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 2.
Prove the following statements:
a. If the angle of incidence and angle of emergence of a light ray falling on a glass slab are i and e respectively, prove that i = e. (Practice Activity Sheet – 4)
Answer:
In the following figure, SR || PQ and NM is the refracted ray. Hence, r = i1.
Now gna = sin i/sin r and ang = sin i1/ sin e.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 1
Also gna = \(\frac{1}{{ }_{\mathrm{a}} n_{\mathrm{g}}}\)
∴ \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{\sin e}{\sin i_{1}}\)
As r = i1, it follows that sin i = sin e
∴ i = e.

b. A rainbow is the combined effect (an exhibition) of the refraction, dispersion, and total internal reflection of light (taken together). (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
(OR)
With a neat labelled diagram, explain how the formation of rainbow occurs.
Answer:
(1) The formation of a rainbow in the sky is a combined result of refraction, dispersion, internal reflection and again refraction of sunlight by water droplets present in the atmosphere after it has rained.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 2
Here, for simplicity only violet and red colours are shown. The remaining five colours lie between these two.

(2) The sunlight is a mixture of seven colours: violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange and red. After it has stopped raining, the atmosphere contains a large number of water droplets. When sunlight is incident on a water droplet, there is (i) refraction and dispersion of light as it passes from air to water (ii) internal reflection of light inside the droplet and (iii) refraction of light as it passes from water to air.

(3) The refractive index of water is different for different colours, being maximum for violet and minimum for red. Hence, there is dispersion of light (separation into different colours) as it passes from air to water. [ See above Figure for reference.]

(4) The combined action of different water droplets, acting like tiny prisms, is to produce a rainbow with red colour at the outer side and violet colour at the inner side. The remaining five colours lie between these two.
The rainbow is seen when the sun is behind the observer and water droplets in the front.

Question 3.
Mark the correct answer in the following questions :
A. What is the reason for the twinkling of stars?
(i) Explosions occurring in stars from time to time
(ii) Absorption of light in the earth’s atmosphere
(iii) Motion of stars
(iv) Changing refractive index of the atmospheric gases
Answer:
Changing refractive index of the atmospheric gases.

B. We can see the Sun even when it is little below the horizon because of
(i) reflection of light
(ii) refraction of light
(iii) dispersion of light
(iv) absorption of light
Answer:
refraction of light

C. If the refractive index of glass with respect to air is 3/2, what is the refractive index of air with respect to glass?
(i) \(\frac{1}{2}\)
(ii) 3
(iii) \(\frac{1}{3}\)
(iv) \(\frac{2}{3}\)
Answer:
(iv) \(\frac{2}{3}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 4.
Solve the following examples:
a. If the speed of light in a medium is 1.5 × 108 m/s, what is the absolute refractive index of the medium? (Practice Activity Sheet – 1 and 4)
Solution:
Data: v = 1.5 × 108 m/s,
c = 3 × 108 m/s, n = ?
n = \(\frac{c}{v}=\frac{3 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}}{1.5 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}}\) = 2
This is the absolute refractive index of the medium.

b. If the absolute refractive indices of glass and water are \(\frac{3}{2}\) and \(\frac{4}{3}\) respectively, what is the refractive index of glass with respect to water?
Solution:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 3
This is the refractive index of glass with respect to water.

Project:

Question 1.
Using a laser and soap water. study the refraction of light under the guidance of your teacher. (Do it your self)

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 73)

Question 1.
What is meant by reflection of light?
Answer:
Reflection of light: When light is incident on the surface of an object, in general, it is deflected in different directions. This process is called reflection of light.

Question 2.
What are the laws of reflection?
Answer:
Laws of reflection of light:

  1. The incident ray and the reflected ray of light are on the opposite sides of the normal to the reflecting surface at the point of incidence and all the three are in the same plane.
  2. The angle of incidence j and the angle of reflection are equal in measure.

Can you recall? (Text Book page No. 75)

Question 1.
If the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium is 2n1 and that of the third medium with respect to the second medium is 3n2, what and how much is 3n1.
Answer:
3n1 is the refractive index of the third medium with respect to the first medium.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 4
3n1 = 2n1 × 3n2.

[Suppose medium 1 = air, medium 2 ≡ ice and medium 3 ≡ diamond. Then, 2n1 ÷ 1.31, 3n2 = 1.847
3n1 = 2n1 × 3n2 = 1.31 × 1.847 = 2.42 which is the refractive index of diamond with respect to air.]

Can you tell? (Textbook page No. 76)

Question 1.
Have you seen a mirage which is an illusion of the appearance of water on a hot road or in a desert?
Answer:
Due to the changes in refraction of light, the light rays coming from a distant object appear to be coming from the image of the object inside the ground. This is called a mirage. When the earth’s surface is heated by the sun, the temperature of air increases. This produces a layer of hot air of lower density (mass per unit volume) and lower refractive index at the surface.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 5
Hot air works as an optically rarer medium relative to cool air. When the temperature changes rapidly in the vertical direction, as refraction of light takes place, the angle of refraction changes continuously. The rays of light from the top of an object such as a car or tree cross the rays from the bottom of the object on their way to the observer’s eye.

Hence, an inverted image is formed below the object’s true position and downward towards the surface in the direction of air at higher temperature. In this case, some rays of light bend back up into the denser air above figure. Mirage produces an impression of water near the hot ground.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 2.
Have you seen that objects beyond and above a holy fire appear to be shaking? Why does this happen?
Answer:
The temperature of air beyond and above a holy fire changes all the time. Hence, the density of air also changes constantly. Hence, the direction of propagation of the rays of light approaching us from the objects beyond and above the holy fire changes constantly. Therefore, those objects appear to be shaking.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 77)

Question 1.
From incident white light how will you obtain white emergent light by making use of two prisms?
Answer:

  • Take a prism. Allow white light to fall on it.
  • Obtain a spectrum.
  • Take a second identical prism. Place it parallel to the first prism in an upside down position with the first prism [as shown in Figure]
  • Allow the colours of the spectrum to pass through the second prism.
  • Obtain the beam of light emerging from the other side of the second prism.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 6
The beam of light emerging from the other side of the second prism is a beam of white light.

Explanation: White light is made up of seven colours. The first prism produces dispersion of white light while the second prism combines light of different colours to produce white light again. The net deviation of a ray of light is zero.
[Note: This experiment is due to sir Isaac Newton. It proved that it was not the prism which added colours to the white light but a property of the white light itself.]

Question 2.
You must have seen chandeliers having glass prisms. The light from a tungsten bulb gets dispersed while passing through these prisms and we see coloured spectrum. If we use an LED light instead of a tungsten bulb, will we be able to see the same effect?
Answer:
Light emitted by LED (light-emitting-diode) does not have all wavelengths in the region 400 nm to 700 nm. Hence, its spectrum is not the same as that of light from a tungsten bulb or as that of sunlight.

Fill in the blanks and rewrite the statements:

Question 1.
The phenomenon of change in the………..of light when it passes obliquely from one transparent medium to another is called refraction.
Answer:
The phenomenon of change in the direction of propagation of light when it passes obliquely from one transparent medium to another is called refraction.

Question 2.
The refractive index depends upon the…………of propagation of light in different media.
Answer:
The refractive index depends upon the velocity of propagation of light in different media.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 3.
The process of separation of light into its component colours while passing through a medium is called………..
Answer:
The process of separation of light into its component colours while passing through a medium is called dispersion of light.

Question 4.
When a light ray travels obliquely from air to water, it bends………the normal at the point of incidence.
Answer:
When a light ray travels obliquely from air to water, it bends towards the normal at the point of incidence.

Question 5.
When a light ray travels obliquely from benzene to air, it bends…………the normal at the point of incidence.
Answer:
When a light ray travels obliquely from benzene to air, it bends away from the normal at the point of incidence.

Question 6.
In glass, the speed of red ray is……violet ray.
Answer:
In glass, the speed of red ray is greater than that of violet ray.

Question 7.
The speed of light in glass is………in water.
Answer:
The speed of light in glass is less than that in water.

Question 8.
The speed of light in water is…………in benzene.
Answer:
The speed of light in water is greater than that in benzene.

Question 9.
Rainbow occurs due to refraction, dispersion,……….and again refraction of sunlight by water droplets.
Answer:
Rainbow occurs due to refraction, dispersion, internal reflection and again refraction of sunlight by water droplets.

Question 10.
In dispersion of sunlight by a glass prism,………..ray is deviated the least.
Answer:
In dispersion of sunlight by a glass prism, red ray is deviated the least.

Rewrite the following statements by selecting the correct options:

Question 1.
The change in the direction of propagation of light when it passes obliquely from one transparent medium to another is called………
(a) dispersion
(b) scattering
(c) refraction
(d) reflection
Answer:
(c) refraction

Question 2.
When a ray of light travels from air to glass slab and strikes the surface of separation at 90°, then it…………
(a) bends towards the normal
(b) bends away from the normal
(c) passes unbent
(d) passes in zigzag way
Answer:
(c) passes unbent

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 3.
If a ray of light passes from a denser medium to a rarer medium in a straight line, the angle of incidence must be…………
(a) 0°
(b) 30°
(c) 60°
(d) 90°
Answer:
(a) 0°

Question 4.
A ray of light strikes a glass slab at an angle of 50° with the normal to the surface of the slab. What is the angle of incidence?
(a) 50°
(b) 25°
(c) 40°
(d) 100°
Answer:
(a) 50°

Question 5.
If a ray of light propagating in air strikes a glass slab at an angle of 60° with the surface of the slab, the angle of refraction is…………
(a) more than 30 °
(b) less than 30 °
(c) 60°
(d) 30°
Answer:
(b) less than 30 °

Question 6.
A ray of light gets deviated When it passes obliquely from one medium to another medium because………..
(a) the colour of light changes
(b) the frequency of light changes
(c) the speed of light changes
(d) the intensity of light changes
Answer:
(c) the speed of light changes

Question 7.
The speed of light in turpentine oil is 2 × 108 m/s. The absolute refractive index of turpentine oil is about……..[Speed of light in vacuum ≈ 3 × 108 m/s]
(a) 1.5
(b) 2
(c) 1.3
(d) 0.67
Answer:
(a) 1.5

Question 8.
LASER stands for………..
(a) light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation
(b) light and sound energy radiation
(c) light and simulated energy radiation
(d) light amplification by sound energy radiation
Answer:
(a) light amplification by stimulated emission of radiation

Question 9.
Out of the following……….has the highest absolute refractive index.
(a) fused quartz
(b) diamond
(c) crown glass
(d) ruby
Answer:
(b) diamond

Question 10.
The absolute refractive index…………
(a) is expressed in dioptre
(b) is expressed in m/s
(c) of air is about \(\frac{4}{3}\)
(d) has no unit
Answer:
(d) has no unit

Question 11.
The speed of light in a medium of refractive index n is………., where c is the speed of light
in vacuum.
(a) \(\frac{c}{n}\)
(b) nc
(c) \(\frac{n}{c}\)
(d) \(\sqrt{\frac{c}{n}}\)
Answer:
(a) \(\frac{c}{n}\)

Question 12.
The speed of light in a transparent medium having absolute refractive index 1.25 is……….[Speed of light in vacuum ≈ 3 × 108 m/s]
(a) 1.25 × 108 m/s
(b) 2.4 × 108 m/s
(c) 3.0 × 108 m/s
(d) 1.5 × 108 m/s
Answer:
(b) 2.4 × 108 m/s

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 13.
…………light is deviated the maximum in the spectrpm of white light obtained with a glass prism.
(a) Red
(b) Yellow
(c) Violet
(d) Blue
Answer:
(c) Violet

Question 14.
………..light is deviated the least in the spectrum of white light obtained with a glass prism.
(a) Red
(b) Yellow
(c) Violet
(d) Blue
Answer:
(a) Red

Question 15.
A ray of light makes an angle of 50° with the surface S1 of the glass slab. Its angle of incidence will be………….(March 2019)
(a) 50°
(b) 40°
(c) 140°
(d) 0°
Answer:
(a) 50°

Question 16.
A glass slab is placed in the path of convergent light. The point of convergence of light:
(a) moves away from the slab
(b) moves towards the slab
(c) remains at the same point
(d) undergoes a lateral shift
Answer:
(a) moves away from the slab

Question 17.
In refraction of light through a glass slab, the directions of the incident ray and the refracted ray are………… (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
(a) perpendicular to each other
(b) non-parallel to each other
(c) parallel to each other
(d) intersecting each other
Answer:
(c) parallel to each other

Question 18.
If we gradually increase the angle of incidence of a ray of light passing through a prism, then………….. (Practice Activity Sheet – 4)
(a) the angle of deviation goes on decreasing
(b) the angle of deviation decreases but after certain value of incident angle, deviation angle increases
(c) the angle of deviation goes on increasing
(d) the angle of deviation increases but after certain value of incident angle, deviation angle decreases
Answer:
(b) the angle of deviation decreases but after certain value of incident angle, deviation angle increases

State whether the following statements are True or False. (If a statement is false, correct it and rewrite it.):

Question 1.
The incident ray and the refracted ray of light are on the opposite sides of the normal at the point of incidence.
Answer:
True.

Question 2.
The refractive index of a medium (such as glass) does not depend on the wavelength of light.
Answer:
False. (The refractive index of a medium depends on the wavelength of light.)

Question 3.
When a light ray travels obliquely from an optically rarer medium to an optically denser medium, it bends away from the normal.
Answer:
False. (When a light ray travels obliquely from an optically rarer medium to an optically denser medium, it bends towards the normal.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 4.
When a light ray travels obliquely from glass to air, it bends towards the normal.
Answer:
False. (When a light ray travels obliquely from glass to air, it bends away from the normal.)

Question 5.
If the angle of incidence is 0°, the angle of refraction is 90°.
Answer:
False. (If the angle of incidence is 0°, the angle of refraction is also 0°.)

Question 6.
In dispersion of white light by a glass prism, yellow colour is deviated the least.
Answer:
False. (In dispersion of white light by a glass prism, red colour is deviated the least.)

Question 7.
In vacuum, the speed of light does not depend upon the frequency of light.
Answer:
True.

Question 8.
In glass, the speed of violet ray is less than that of red ray.
Answer:
True.

Question 9.
In a material medium, the speed of light depends on the frequency of light.
Answer:
True.

Question 10.
The velocity of light is different in different media.
Answer:
True.

Question 11.
Wavelength of red light is close to 700 nm.
Answer:
True.

Question 12.
Wavelength of orange light is greater than that of blue light.
Answer:
True.

Find the odd one out and give the reason:

Question 1.
Reflection, Neutralization, Refraction, Dispersion.
Answer:
Neutralization. It is associated with a chemical reaction between an acid and an alkali; others are phenomena associated with light.

Answer the following questions in one sentence each:

Question 1.
Mention any two phenomena in nature where refraction of light takes place.
Answer:
Mirage and twinkling of a star.

Question 2.
What is the angle of refraction when the angle of incidence is 0°?
Answer:
When the angle of incidence is 0°, the angle of refraction is also 0°.

Question 3.
In refraction of light, \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) = constant in sin a particular case. What is this constant called?
Answer:
The constant \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) (in a particular case) is called the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium.

Question 4.
If the refractive index of medium 2 with respect to medium 1 is 5/3, what is the refractive index of medium 1 with respect to medium 2?
Answer:
The refractive index of medium 1 with respect to medium 2 is 0.6.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 5.
In dispersion of sunlight by a glass prism, which colour is deviated the least?
Answer:
In dispersion of sunlight by a glass prism, red colour is deviated the least.

Question 6.
In dispersion of sunlight by a glass prism, which colour is deviated the most?
Answer:
In dispersion of sunlight by a glass prism, violet colour is deviated the most.

Question 7.
What is the wavelength of violet light?
Answer:
The wavelength of violet light is (about) 400 nm.

Question 8.
State the relation between 2n1 and critical angle.
Answer:
2n1 = sin i, where i is the critical angle.

Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
What is meant by refraction of light?
Answer:
The change in the direction of propagation of light when it passes obliquely from one transparent medium to another is called refraction of light.

Question 2.
Why is there a change in the direction of propagation of light when it passes obliquely from one transparent medium to another?
Answer:
The velocity of light is different in different media. Hence, there is a change in the direction of propagation of light when it passes obliquely from one transparent medium to another.

Question 3.
In the case of refraction of light through a glass slab, the emergent ray is parallel to the incident ray, but it is displaced sideways. Why does this happen?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 7
The first refraction takes place as light passes obliquely from air to glass. In this case, the ray of light bends towards the normal at point N. The second refraction takes place as light passes obliquely from glass to air. In this case, the ray of light bends away from the normal at point M. The faces PQ and SR of the glass slab are parallel. Hence, the extent of bending of light at SR is equal in magnitude but opposite in sense relative to the bending of light at PQ. Hence, the emergent ray of light (MD) is parallel to the incident ray of light (AN), but it is displaced sideways as shown in Figure.

Question 4.
Define angle of incidence and angle of refraction.
Answer:
(1) The angle made by the incident ray of light with the normal to the surface at the point of incidence is called the angle of incidence.

(2) The angle made by the refracted ray of light with the normal to the surface at the point of incidence is called the angle of refraction.

[Note: The angle e in Fig. 6.3 is also called the angle of emergence as it is the angle made by the emergent ray with the normal to the surface at the point of emergence. ]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 5.
Repeat the activity “Refraction of light passing through a glass sl^b” by replacing the glass slab by a transparent plastic slab.
(i) What similarity do you observe?
(ii) What difference do you notice?
Answer:
(i) Similarity: The emergent ray is parallel to the incident ray, but it is displaced sideways.
(ii) Difference: For a given angle of incidence, the extent of refraction (bending) is different (in general, less) for a transparent plastic slab relative to the glass slab.

Question 6.
State the laws of refraction of light.
Answer:
Laws of refraction of light:
(1) The incident ray and the refracted ray are on the opposite sides of the normal to the surface at the point of incidence and all the three, i.e., the incident ray, the refracted ray and the normal are in the same plane.

(2) For a given pair of media, the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction is constant (Snell’s law). This constant is called the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium.
[Note: Here, a ray means a ray of light.]

Question 7.
How is refraction of light related to refractive index?
Answer:
When a ray of light travels obliquely from an optically rarer medium (lower refractive index) to an optically denser medium (higher refractive index), the ray bends towards the normal. When a ray of light travels obliquely from an optically denser medium to an optically rarer medium, the ray bends away from the normal. For a given angle of incidence (i ≠ 0), the extent of refraction (bending) of light is different in different media.

If the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium is greater than 1, the greater the refractive index, the greater is the bending of the ray of light towards the normal. If the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium is less than 1, the greater the refractive index, the lesser is the bending of the ray of light away from the normal.

Question 8.
Define the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium.
(OR)
What is meant by refractive index?
Answer:
The refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium is defined as the ratio of the sine of the angle of incidence to the sine of the angle of refraction when the ray of light is obliquely incident at the boundary separating the
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 8
two media and travels from the first medium to the second medium. (See Fig. 6.4.)
(OR)
The refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium is defined as the ratio of (the magnitude of) the velocity of light in the first medium to (the magnitude of) the velocity of light in the second medium.

[Note: Velocity is a vector, i.e., it has magnitude and direction. In definition of refractive index, we consider only the magnitude of velocity of light (speed of light). Velocity of light in a medium depends on the physical condition of the medium as well as the frequency of light. Velocity of light is different in different media. For a given medium, the refractive index depends on the colour of light (frequency of light.)]

Question 9.
State the formulae for the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium.
Answer:
The refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium,
2n1 = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}=\frac{v_{1}}{v_{2}}\)
where i is the angle of incidence, r is the angle of refraction (as the ray of light passes obliquely from the first medium to the second medium), v1 is the magnitude of the velocity (speed) of light in the first medium and v2 is the magnitude of the velocity of light in the second medium.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 10.
Define absolute refractive index.
Answer:
The absolute refractive index of a medium is defined as the ratio of the magnitude of the velocity of light in vacuum to the magnitude of the velocity of light in the medium.

[Note: The speed of light is maximum in vacuum, about 3 × 108 m/s. When light travels from one medium to another, there occurs a change in its speed and wavelength (A). But its frequency (v) remain the same.]

Question 11.
Obtain the relation between the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium and the refractive index of the first medium with respect to the second medium.
Answer:
Let v1 = speed of light in the first medium, v2 = speed of light in the second medium, 2n1 = refractive index of the second medium With respect to the first medium and 1n2 = refractive index of the first medium with respect to the second medium.
By definition, 2n1 = \(\frac{v_{1}}{v_{2}}\) and 1n2 = \(\frac{v_{2}}{v_{1}}\)
Hence,
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 9
(OR)
1n2 × 2n1 = 1.

Question 12.
If the refractive index of a certain material with respect to air is 1.5, what is the refractive index of air with respect to that material?
Answer:
As the refractive index of the given material with respect to air is 1.5, the refractive index of air with respect to the material is
\(\frac{1}{1.5}=\frac{1}{3 / 2}=\frac{2}{3}\) = 0.6667 (approximately)

Question 13.
Explain the terms optically rarer medium and optically denser medium with examples.
Answer:
When we consider two media (such as air and glass), the medium with lower refractive index is called the optically rarer medium (in the present case, air) and the medium with higher refractive index is called the optically denser medium (glass, in the present case).

The higher density does not necessarily mean higher refractive index. For example, the density of water is greater than that of kerosene, but the absolute refractive index of water is less than that of kerosine. Thus, when we consider water and kerosine, water is an optically rarer medium while kerosine is an optically denser medium.

If we consider kerosene and benzene, kerosine is an optically rarer medium while benzene is an optically denser medium.

Question 14.
A ray of light is incident obliquely at a boundary separating two media. What is its behaviour if (1) the refractive index of the second medium is greater than that of the first medium (2) the refractive index of the first medium is greater than that of the second medium? Draw the corresponding neat and labelled diagrams.
Answer:
Consider a ray of light incident obliquely at a boundary separating two media.
(1) If the refractive index of the second medium is greater than that of the first medium, the ray bends towards the normal at the point of incidence as it travels from the first medium (optically rarer medium) to the second medium (optically denser medium). The angle of refraction (r) is less than the angle of incidence (i). (Fig. 6.6)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 10
Fig. 6.6: A ray of light travelling from a rarer medium to a denser medium (Schematic diagram)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 11
Fig. 6.7: A ray of light travelling from a denser medium to a rarer medium (Schematic diagram)

(2) If the refractive index of the first medium is greater than that of the second medium, the ray bends away from the normal at the point of incidence as it travels from the first medium (optically denser medium), to the second medium (optically rarer medium). The angle of refraction (r) is greater than the angle of incidence (i). (Fig. 6.7)

[Note In this chapter, a rarer medium means an optically rarer medium and a denser medium means optically denser medium unless stated otherwise.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 15.
Observe the following figure and write accurate conclusion regarding refraction of light. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 12
Answer:
When a light ray passes obliquely from a rarer medium to a denser medium, it bends towards the normal.

Question 16.
What happens when a ray of light is incident normal to the interface between two media? Draw the corresponding neat and labelled diagram.
Answer:
When a ray of light is incident normal to the interface between two media, the ray propagates undeviated as it travels from the first medium to the second medium irrespective of the refractive indices of the two media. In this case, the angle of incidence (i) is zero and so also the angle of refraction (r).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 13
Fig. 6.9: A ray of light incident normal to the interface between two media propagates without any change in its direction of propagation

Question 17.
Draw a neat and labelled diagram to show the path of a ray of light in air and glass when the ray is incident obliquely on a glass slab. Show the (i) incident ray (ii) refracted ray (iii) emergent ray (iv) angle of incidence (v) angle of refraction (vi) angle of emergence in the diagram.
(OR)
Draw a neat and labelled diagram to show refraction of light through a glass slab.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 14
Fig. 6.10: The path of the ray of light in air and glass when the ray is incident obliquely on a glass slab
In Fig. 6.10, i = angle of incidence, r = angle of refraction and e = angle of emergence.

Question 18.
Observe the given figure and name the following rays:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 15
(i) ray AB
(ii) Ray BC
(iii) ray CD
Answer:
(i) The ray AB is the incident ray.
(ii) The ray BC is the refracted ray.
(iii) The ray CD is the emergent ray.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 19.
A plane mirror is kept at the bottom of a trough with water in it as shown in the following figure (Fig. 6.12). The ray of light emerging from a source at the point S outside the trough reaches the point A on the surface of water. Draw a neat ray diagram to show the subsequent path of light and complete the ray diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 16
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 17

Question 20.
Give two examples of the effect of atmospheric refraction on a small scale in local environment.
Answer:

  1. The occurrence of a mirage
  2. Flickering of an object seen through a turbulent stream of hot air rising above the Holi fire are examples of the effect of atmospheric refraction on a small scale in local environment.

Question 21.
What is a mirage? With a neat labelled diagram, explain the conditions under which it is seen.
Answer:
Due to the changes in refraction of light, the light rays coming from a distant object appear to be coming from the image of the object inside the ground. This is called a mirage.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 18
When the earth’s surface is heated by the sun, the temperature of air increases. This produces a layer of hot air of lower density (mass per unit volume) and lower refractive index at the surface. Hot air works as an optically rarer medium relative to cool air. When the temperature changes rapidly in the vertical direction, as refraction of light takes place, the angle of refraction changes continuously.

The rays of light from the top of an object such as a car or tree cross the rays from the bottom of the object on their way to the observer’s eye. Hence, an inverted image is formed below the object’s true position and downward towards the surface in the direction of air at higher temperature. In this case, some rays of light bend back up into the denser air above figure. Mirage produces an impression of water near the hot ground.

Question 22.
Explain in brief the flickering of an object seen through a turbulent stream of hot air rising above the Holi fire.
Answer:
During the Holi fire, the temperature of the air just above the fire becomes much greater than that of the air further up. The hot air has lower density (mass per unit volume) and lower refractive index. It becomes an optically rarer medium. The cool air has higher density and higher refractive index. It is an optically denser medium relative to hot air. Hence, in refraction of light, the angle of refraction changes continuously due to a continuous variation in refractive index.

As the physical conditions of air change rapidly, the apparent position of an object fluctuates rapidly. This gives rise to the flickering of an object seen through a turbulent stream of hot air rising above the Holi fire.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 23.
With a neat labelled diagram, explain twinkling of a star. Also explain why a planet does not twinkle.
Answer:
(1) As a star is far away from the earth, it appears as a point source of light. The density of air decreases with height above the earth’s surface. Hence, the refractive index of air also decreases with height. When starlight enters the earth’s atmosphere, it undergoes refraction continuously in the medium with gradually changing refractive index. The bending of starlight occurs towards the normal as it passes from the optically rarer part of the medium to the optically denser part.

(2) Hence, when a star is observed near the horizon, its apparent position is slightly higher than the actual position (See below figure).

(3) Further, the apparent position varies with time as the medium is not stationary due to mobility of air and change in temperature. When more light is refracted towards the observer the star appears bright. When less light is refracted towards the observer, the star appears dim.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 19
(4) Thus there is fluctuation in the brightness of a star when observed from the earth. This is called twinkling of a star.

(5) Compared to stars, planets are relatively closer to the earth. Hence, a planet appears as a collection of a large number of point sources. Due to the changes in the refractive index of air, there is a change in the position and brightness of these point sources.

There is an increase in intensity of light coming from some point sources while there is a decrease in intensity of light coming from equal number of other point sources, on an average. The average brightness of a planet remain the same. Also, there is no change in the average position of a star. Hence, a planet does not twinkle.

Question 24.
What is the correct reason for blinking/flickering of stars? Explain it.
(a) The blasts in the stars.
(b) Absorption of star light by the atmosphere.
(c) Motion of the stars.
(d) Changing refractive index of gases in the atmosphere. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
(d) Changing refractive index of the gases in the atmosphere results in blinking/flickering of stars.

Explanation:
(1) As a star is far away from the earth, it appears as a point source of light. The density of air decreases with height above the earth’s surface. Hence, the refractive index of air also decreases with height. When starlight enters the earth’s atmosphere, it undergoes refraction continuously in the medium with gradually changing refractive index. The bending of starlight occurs towards the normal as it passes from the optically rarer part of the medium to the optically denser part.

(2) Hence, when a star is observed near the horizon, its apparent position is slightly higher than the actual position (See below figure).

(3) Further, the apparent position varies with time as the medium is not stationary due to mobility of air and change in temperature. When more light is refracted towards the observer the star appears bright. When less light is refracted towards the observer, the star appears dim.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 20
(4) Thus there is fluctuation in the brightness of a star when observed from the earth. This is called twinkling of a star.

(5) Compared to stars, planets are relatively closer to the earth. Hence, a planet appears as a collection of a large number of point sources. Due to the changes in the refractive index of air, there is a change in the position and brightness of these point sources.

There is an increase in intensity of light coming from some point sources while there is a decrease in intensity of light coming from equal number of other point sources, on an average. The average brightness of a planet remain the same. Also, there is no change in the average position of a star. Hence, a planet does not twinkle.

Question 25.
With a neat labelled diagram, explain advanced sunrise and delayed sunset.
Answer:
(1) The sunrise (the appearance of the sun above the horizon) is advanced due to atmospheric refraction of sunlight. An observer on the earth sees the sun two minutes before the sun reaches the horizon. A ray of sunlight entering the earth’s atmosphere follows a curved path due to atmospheric refraction before reaching the earth. This happens due to a gradual variation in the refractive index of the atmosphere.

For the observer on the earth, the apparent position of the sun is slightly higher than the actual position. Hence, the sun is seen before the sun reaches the horizon.

(2) Increased atmospheric refraction of sunlight occurs also at the sunset (the sun disappearing below the horizon). In this case, the observer on the earth continues to see the setting sun for two minutes after the sun has dipped below the horizon, thus delaying the sunset.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 21
The advanced sunrise and delayed sunset increases the duration of day by four minutes.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 26.
Water in a swimming pool or water tank appears shallower than its depth. Why?
Answer:
When light rays travel obliquely from an optically denser medium (water, in this case) to an optically rarer medium (air, in this case), they bend away from the normal at the point of incidence. As a result, the bottom of a swimming pool or water tank appears raised to an observer standing near the edge of the pool or the tank. Therefore, the swimming pool or water tank appears shallower than its depth.

Question 27.
Place a coin at the bottom of a glass jar containing water. Now tilt the jar suitably. When viewed at a suitable angle, the coin appears to be floating. Why?
Answer:
When light rays travel obliquely from an optically denser medium (water, in this case) to an optically rarer medium (air, in this case), they bend away from the normal at the point of incidence. As a result, the coin appears raised. Therefore, when the jar is tilted suitably and observed at a suitable angle, the coin appears to be floating.

Question 28.
State the wavelength range of electromagnetic radiation to which our eyes are sensitive.
Answer:
Our eyes are sensitive to light (electromagnetic radiation). Its wavelength range is 400 nm to 700 nm.
[Note: Wavelength (λ) goes on decreasing and frequency (ν) goes on increasing from red (λ ≃ 700 nm) → orange → yellow → green → blue → indigo → violet (A ≃ 400 nm). c = vλ, where c is the speed of light in vacuum.]

Question 29.
What do you mean by dispersion of light? What is a spectrum of light? Name the different colours of light in the proper sequence in the spectrum of white light.
(OR)
What do you mean by dispersion? Name the different colours of light in the proper sequence in the spectrum of white light.
Answer:
The process of separation of light into its component colours while passing through a medium is called dispersion of light. The band of coloured components of a light beam is called spectrum.
The different colours of light in the spectrum of white light are violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange and red.

Question 30.
What is a prism?
Answer:
A prism is a transparent medium bound by two plane surfaces inclined at an angle. Normally it is made of glass and has triangular cross section.

Question 31.
With a neat labelled diagram, describe the experiment to demonstrate dispersion of sunlight (white light) by a prism.
Answer:
Experiment:
(1) Procedure: Keep a glass prism on a table in a dark room. Hold a plane mirror outside the room so that it reflects a beam of sunlight into the room. Allow this beam to pass through a narrow slit made in cardboard and then fall on the prism. Place a white screen on the other side of the prism as shown in the following figure. [Fig. 6.17]
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 22
(2) Observations:

  1. A pattern of various colours is observed on the screen. This pattern is called the spectrum.
  2. It is found that in dispersion, the ray corresponding to violet colour deviates the most.
  3. The ray corresponding to red colour deviates the least.
  4. The deviation of rays corresponding to other colours is intermediate.

(3) Conclusion: When sunlight (white light) is incident on a prism, dispersion of light takes place, forming a spectrum.

[Notes: (1) This experiment is due to Sir Isaac Newton (1642 – 1727), English physicist and mathematician. (2) If in a Board examination, incomplete diagram (as shown in Fig. 6.18) is given, students should complete it and label its parts as shown in Fig. 6.17.]
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 23

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 32.
How does the dispersion of white light take place when it passes through a glass prism?
Answer:
When rays of light are incident on a prism, they are refracted twice, while travelling from air to glass and then from glass to air. Even when the incident rays are directed away from the base of the prism, the emergent rays bend towards the base of the prism, as the prism is triangular. Thus, the rays are deviated as they pass through the prism.

The refractive index of glass is different for different colours. Therefore, the rays corresponding to different colours are deviated to different extents. White light is a mixture of seven colours : violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange and red. Hence, when white light is incident on a prism, a spectrum of seven colours is obtained.

The refractive index of glass is maximum for violet light and minimum for red light. Hence, violet light is deviated the most and red light is deviated the least. The deviation of rays corresponding to other colours is intermediate. In this manner, the dispersion of light takes place when it passes through a glass prism. [For reference, see Fig. 6.17.]

Question 33.
What is a spectrum? Why do we get a spectrum of seven colours when while light is dispersed by a prism?
(OR)
Explain how a spectrum is formed.
Answer:
A band of coloured components of a light beam is called a spectrum. When white light is incident on a prism, the rays corresponding to different colours bend through different angles on refraction.

Of the various colours in the visible region, red light bends the least and violet light bends the most. Each colour emerges through the prism along a different path and becomes, distinct. Hence, we get a spectrum of seven colours.

Question 34.
What is partial reflection of light?
Answer:
When light travels from a denser medium to a rarer medium, it is partially reflected, i.e., part of light comes back into the denser medium as per the laws of reflection. This is called partial reflection of light.

[Note: Partial reflection of light occurs even when light travels from a rarer medium to a denser medium. The rest of light is refracted.]

Question 35.
Explain the terms total internal reflection and critical angle.
Answer:
Figure 6.20 shows passage of light from water (denser medium) to air (rarer medium).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 24
The ray of light incident at the boundary separating the two media bends away from the normal on refraction. Here, the angle of refraction r, is greater than the angle of incidence i.
Now anw = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) < 1. Here, anw is the refractive index of sin r air with respect to water.

As anw is constant, r increases as i increases. For r = 90°, the ray travels along the boundary. If i is increased further, as r cannot be greater than 90°, light does not enter air. There is no refraction of light and all the light enters water on reflection. This is called total internal reflection.
For r = 90°, anw = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin 90^{\circ}}\) = sin i. This angle i is sin 90° called the critical angle.

Question 36.
Swarali has got the following observations while doing an experiment. Answer her questions with the help of observations. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Swarali observed that the light bent away from the normal, while travelling from a denser medium to a rarer medium. When Swarali increased the values of the angle of incidence (i). the values of the angle of refraction (r) went on increasing. But at a certain angle of incidence, the light rays returned into the denser medium.
So, Swarali has some questions. Answer them.
(a) Name this certain value of i. What is the value of r at that time?
(b) Name this process of returning light in the denser medium. Explain the process.
Answer:
(a) Critical angle r = 90°
(b) Total internal reflection.

As light goes from a denser to rarer medium, if the value of the angle of incidence increases, then the value of the angle of refraction also increases. But after a specific angle of incidence called the critical angle, the light gets reflected back into the denser medium.

The ray of light incident at the boundary separating the two media bends away from the normal on refraction. Here, the angle of refraction r, is greater than the angle of incidence i.
Now anw = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin r}\) < 1. Here, anw is the refractive index of sin r air with respect to water. As anw is constant, r increases as i increases. For r = 90°, the ray travels along the boundary. If i is increased further, as r cannot be greater than 90°, light does not enter air. There is no refraction of light and all the light enters water on reflection. This is called total internal reflection.

For r = 90°, anw = \(\frac{\sin i}{\sin 90^{\circ}}\) = sin i. This angle i is sin 90° called the critical angle.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 37.
The observations made by Swarali while doing the experiment are given below. Based on these write answers to the questions:
Swarali found that the light ray travelling from the denser medium to a rarer medium goes away from the normal. If the angle of incidence (i) is raised by Swarali, the angle of refraction (r) went on increasing. However, after certain value of the angle of incidence, the light ray is seen to return back into the denser medium. (March 2019)
(i) What is the specific value of ∠i called?
(ii) What is the process of reflection of incident ray into a denser medium called?
(iii) Draw the diagrams of three observations made by Swarali.
Answer:
(i) Critical angle
(ii) Total internal reflection
(iii)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 25

Question 38.
Define total internal reflection of light.
Answer:
When light travels from a denser medium to a rarer medium, if the angle of incidence is greater than the critical angle, there is no refraction of light and all the light is reflected in the denser medium. This is called total internal reflection of light.

Question 39.
Define critical angle.
Answer:
When light travels from a denser medium to a rarer medium, the angle of incidence for which the angle of refraction becomes 90°, is called the critical angle.

Question 40.
If the refractive index of a rarer medium with respect to a denser medium is 0.5, what is the critical angle?
Answer:
2n1 = 0.5 = sin i
∴ Critical angle i = 30°.

Question 41.
Name the devices in which total internal reflection of light is used.
Answer:

  1. Total internal reflecting prisms are used in a camera, binoculars, periscope.
  2. Total internal reflection of light is used in optical fibres.

[Note: Total internal reflection of light plays an important role in sparkling brilliance of a diamond.]

Question 42.
Explain why an empty test tube held obliquely in water appears shiny to an observer looking down.
Answer:
When an empty test tube is held obliquely in Water in a beaker, some light rays passing from water to air are incident at an angle greater than the critical angle. They are, thus, totally internally reflected as shown, and the surface of the test tube has a silvery shine.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 26

Question 43.
Observe the given figure and answer the following questions. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 27
(a) Identify and write the natural process shown in the figure.
(b) List the phenomena which are observed in this process.
(c) Redraw the diagram and show the above phenomena in it.
Answer:
(a) The natural process shown in the figure is formation of rainbow.
(b) The phenomena observed in this process are refraction, internal reflection and dispersion of light.
(c)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 28

Write a short note on the following:

Question 1.
Refraction observed in the atmosphere.
Answer:
When a ray of light passes obliquely from an optically rarer medium to an optically denser medium, it bends towards the normal at the point of incidence. If opposite is the case, the ray bends away from the normal.

Atmosphere is never static. Air is mobile and its density and temperature are not uniform. As a result, in general, the path of a ray of light through atmosphere of varying refractive index is a curve. The refractive index of cool air is greater than that of hot air.

Atmospheric refraction of light results in many interesting optical phenomena such as twinkling of a star, advanced sunrise and delayed sunset, mirage and flickering of an object seen through a turbulent stream of hot air rising from a fire.

Question 2.
Dispersion of light.
Answer:
The process of separation of light into its component colours while passing through a medium is called dispersion of light. When white light passes through a glass prism, it spreads out into a band of different colours (components) called the spectrum of light. The colours in the spectrum of white light are violet, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange and red.

Formation of a rainbow is an example of dispersion of light in nature. In this case, raindrops are responsible for dispersion of sunlight.

Dispersion takes place because the refractive index of a material such as glass or water, is different for different colours. It is maximum for violet colour and minimum for red colour. Hence, in the spectrum of white light (sunlight) obtained with a prism, violet light is deviated the most while red light is deviated the least. The deviation of light corresponding to other colours lies in between.

Give scientific reasons:

Question 1.
A coin kept in a bowl is not visible when seen from one side. But, when water is poured in the bowl, the coin becomes visible.
Answer:
(1) When the bowl is empty, the rays of light coming from the coin are obstructed by the side of the bowl, and hence the coin is not visible when seen from one side of the bowl.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 29
(2) When water is poured in the bowl, the rays of light coming from the coin travel from water (denser medium) to air (rarer medium). Hence, they bend away from the normal on refraction. Therefore, the coin appears to be raised and becomes visible when observed from one side of the bowl.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 2.
A pencil dipped in water obliquely appears bent at the surface of water.
(OR)
When a pencil is partly immersed in water and held in a slanting position, it appears to be bent at the boundary separating water and air.
Answer:
(1) When a pencil is partly immersed in water and held in a slanting position, the rays of light coming from the immersed part of the pencil emerge from water (a denser medium) and enter air (a rarer medium). During this propagation, they bend away from the normal on refraction.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 30
The pencil appearing bent at the boundary of water and air (schematic diagram)

(2) As a result, the immersed part of the pencil does not appear straight with respect to the part outside the water, but appears to be raised. Hence, a pencil dipped obliquely in water appears bent at the surface of the water.

Question 3.
The shadow of the edge of an empty vessel is formed due to the slanting rays of the sun. When water is poured in the vessel, the shadow is shifted.
Answer:
(1) When the slanting rays of the sun are obstructed by the edge of the empty vessel, the shadow of the edge is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 31
(2) When water is poured in the vessel, the slanting rays of the sun travel from air (rarer medium) to water (denser medium). During this propagation, they bend towards the normal on refraction. Hence, some part in the region of the shadow is now illuminated and the shadow appears to have shifted.

Question 4.
The bottom of a pond appears raised.
Answer:
(1) The rays of light coming from the bottom of a pond bend away from the normal as they travel from water (denser medium) to air (rarer medium).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 32
(2) Hence, they appear to come from a point above the actual point from which they come.
Therefore, the bottom of the pond appears raised.

Question 5.
While shooting a fish in a lake, the gun is aimed below the apparent position of the fish.
Answer:
(1) The rays of light coming from the fish bend away from the normal as they travel from water (denser medium) to air (rarer medium).
(2) Hence, the position of the fish in water appears to be above Its real position. Therefore, while shooting a fish in a lake, the gun is aimed below the apparent position of the fish.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 33

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Question 6.
The sun is seen on the horizon a little before sunrise.
(OR)
The sun is seen on the horizon for sometime even after sunset.
Answer:
(1) The earth is surrounded by an atmosphere which is denser near the surface of the earth. When the rays of light from the sun enter the earth’s atmosphere from outer space, they travel from a rarer medium to a denser medium. Hence, they bend towards the normal on refraction.

(2) Hence, even when the sun is below the horizon while rising or setting, its rays reach us due to refraction and it appears to be on the horizon. Therefore, the sun is seen on the horizon a little before sunrise as well as for some time even after sunset.

Distinguish between:

Question 1.
Reflection of light and Refraction of light:
Answer:

Reflection of light Refraction of light
1. The rays of light, before and after reflection, travel in the same medium. 1. In refraction of light, the rays travel from one medium to another medium.
2. In reflection, the angle of incidence and the angle of reflection are equal. 2. In refraction, when the rays travel obliquely from one medium to another medium, the angle of incidence and the angle of refraction are not equal.
3. In reflection, there is no change in the speed and wavelength of light. 3. In refraction, there occurs a change in the speed and wavelength of light.
4. In reflection, there is no dispersion of light. 4. Generally, in refraction, there occurs dispersion of light.

[Note: The frequency of light remains the same in reflection and refraction.]

Complete the following or Solve and fill in the blanks :

Question 1.

Speed of light in the first medium (v1) Speed of light in the second medium (v2) Refractive index 2n1 Refractive index 2n1
3 × 108 m/s 1.2 × 108 m/s ————————– ————————–
————————– 2.25 × 108 m/s 4/3 ————————–
2 × 108 m/s ————————– ————————– 1.5

Answer:

Speed of light in the first medium (v1) Speed of light in the second medium (v2) Refractive index 2n1 Refractive index 2n1
3 × 108 m/s 1.2 × 108 m/s 2.5 0.4
3 × 108 m/s 2.25 × 108 m/s 4/3 0.75
2 × 108 m/s 3 × 108 m/s 2/3 1.5

Formulae:
2n1 = v1/v2, 1n2 = v2/v1

Solve the following examples/numerical problems:
c = 3 × 108 m/s

Problem 1.
The speed of light in a transparent medium is 2.4 × 108 m/s. Calculate the absolute refractive index of the medium.
Solution:
Data: c = 3 × 108 m/s,
v = 2.4 × 108 m/s, n = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 34
The absolute refractive index of the medium = 1.25.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Problem 2.
The velocity of light in a medium is 2 × 108 m/s. What is the refractive index of the medium with respect to air, if the velocity of light in air is 3 × 108 m/s?
Solution:
Data: v1 = 3 × 108 m/s,
v2 = 2 × 108 m/s, 2n1 = ?
2n1 = \(\frac{v_{1}}{v_{2}}\)
\(=\frac{3 \times 10^{8}}{2 \times 10^{8}}\)
= 1.5
The refractive index of the medium with respect to air is 1.5.

Problem 3.
Light travels with a velocity 1.5 × 108 m/s in a medium. On entering second medium its velocity becomes 0.75 × 108 m/s. What is the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium? (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Solution:
Given: Velocity of light in the first medium = v1 = 1.5 × 108 m/s,
velocity of light in the second medium = v2 = 0.75 × 108 m/s,
refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium = 2n1 = ?
2n1 = \(\frac{v_{1}}{v_{2}}\)
2n1 = \(\frac{1.5 \times 10^{8}}{0.75 \times 10^{8}}\) = 2
Hence, the refractive index of the second medium with respect to the first medium is 2.
[Note : The absolute refractive index of the second medium = \(\frac{3 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}}{0.75 \times 10^{8} \mathrm{m} / \mathrm{s}}\) = 4 (greater than that of diamond, not likely).]

Problem 4.
The refractive index of water is 4/3 and the speed of light in air is 3 × 108 m/s. Find the speed of light in water.
Solution:
Data: 2n1 = 4/3, v1 = 3 × 108 m/s, v2 = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 35
The speed of light in water = 2.25 × 108 m/s.

Problem 5.
The speed of light in water and glass is 2.2 × 108 m/s and 2 × 108 m/s respectively. What is the refractive index of (i) water with respect to glass (ii) glass with respect to water?
Solution:
Data: uw = 2.2 × 108 m/s,
vg= 2 × 108 m/s, wng = ?, gnw = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 36
The refractive index of water with respect to glass = 0.909 (approximately).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light 37
The refractive index of glass with respect to glass = 1.1 (approximately).

Numerical Problems For Practice:
(Given: C = 3 × 108m/s)

Problem 1.
The speed of light in a transparent medium is 2 × 108 m/s. Find the absolute refractive index of the medium.
Solution:
1.5

Problem 2
The absolute refractive index of a transparent medium is 5/3. Find the speed of light in the medium.
Solution:
1.8 × 108 m/s

Problem 3.
The absolute refractive index of a transparent medium is 2.4 and the speed of light in that medium is 1.25 × 108 m/s. Find the speed of light in air.
Solution:
3 × 108 m/s

Problem 4.
The speed of light in water is 2.25 × 108 m/s and that in glass is 2 × 108 m/s. Find the refractive index of (i) the glass with respect to water (ii) water with respect to the glass.
Solution:
(i) 1.125
(ii) 0.889 (approximately)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 6 Refraction of Light

Problem 5.
If the refractive index of a certain glass with respect to water is 1.25, find the refractive index of water with respect to the glass.
Solution:
0.8

Problem 6.
If the absolute refractive index of glass is 1.5 and that of water is \(\frac{4}{3}\), find the refractive index of water with respect to glass.
Solution:
\(\frac{8}{9}\)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 1.
Fill in the blanks and rewrite the sentences:
a. The amount of water vapour in air is determined in terms of its………..
Answer:
The amount of water vapour in air is determined in terms of its absolute humidity.

b. If objects of equal masses are given equal heat, their final temperature will be different. This is due to difference in their………….
Answer:
If objects of equal masses are given equal heat, their final temperature will be different. This is due to difference in their specific heat capacities.

c. When a liquid is getting converted into solid, the latent heat is……….  (Practical Activity Sheet – 1 and 2)
Answer:
When a liquid is getting converted into solid, the latent heat is released.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 2.
Observe the following graph. Considering the change in volume of water as its temperature is raised from 0 °C, discuss the difference in the behaviour of water and other substances. What is this behaviour of water called?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 1
Answer:
If the temperature of water is raised from 0 °C to 10 °C, its volume goes on decreasing in the range 0 °C to 4 °C. It is minimum at 4 °C. The volume of water goes on increasing in the range 4 °C to 10 °C.

In general, when a substance is heated, its volume goes on increasing with temperature. Thus, in the range 0 °C to 4 °C, behaviour of water is different from other substances. It is called anomalous behaviour of water.

Question 3.
What is meant by specific heat capacity?
How will you prove experimentally that different substances have different specific heat capacities?
Answer:
The amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of an object by 1 °C is called the specific heat capacity of that object.

Question 4.
While deciding the unit for heat, which temperatures interval is chosen? why?
Answer:
While deciding the unit for heat, the temperature interval chosen is 14.5 °C to 15.5 °C. For the reason, see the information given in the following box.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 5.
Explain the following temperature vs time graph:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 2
(Practice Activity Sheet – 1 and 4; March 2019)
Answer:
The graph shows what happens when a mixture of ice and water is heated continuously. The temperature of the mixture remains constant (0 °C) till all the ice melts as shown by the line AB. This temperature is the melting point of ice. On further heating, the temperature rises steadily from 0 °C to 100 °C as shown by the line BC, At 100 °C water starts converting into steam. This temperature is the boiling point of water. Further heating does not change the temperature and the conversion waters steam continues as shown by the line CD.

Question 6.
Explain the following:
a. the role of anomalous behaviour of water in preserving aquatic life in regions of cold climate?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 3
In cold regions, during winter, the temperature of the atmosphere falls well below 0 °C. As the temperature decreases, the water at the surfaces of lakes and ponds starts contracting. Hence, its density increases and it sinks to the bottom. This process continues till the temperature of all the water in a lake falls to 4 °C. As the water at the surface cools further, i.e., its temperature falls below 4 °C, it starts expanding instead of contracting. Therefore, its density decreases and it remains at the surface.

The temperature of the water at the surface continues to fall to 0 °C. Finally, the water at the surface is converted into ice, but the water below the layer of ice is at 4 °C. Ice is a bad conductor of heat. Hence, the layer of the ice at the surface does not allow transfer of heat from the water to the atmosphere. As the water below the layer of ice remains at 4 °C, fish and other aquatic animals and plants can survive in it.

b. How can you relate the formation of water droplets on the outer surface of a bottle taken out of a refrigerator with formation of dew?
Answer:
At a given temperature, there is a limit on how much water vapour the given volume of air can hold. The lower the temperature, the lower is the capacity of air to hold water vapour.

The temperature of a bottle kept in a refrigerator is lower than room temperature. Hence, when the bottle is taken out of the refrigerator, the temperature of the air surrounding the bottle is lowered. Therefore, the capacity of the air to hold water vapour becomes less. Hence, the excess water vapour condenses to form water droplets (like dew) on the outer surface of the bottle.

c. In cold regions in winter, the rocks crack due to anomalous expansion of water.
Answer:
Sometimes water enters into crevices of the rocks. When the temperature of the atmosphere falls below 4 °C, water expands. Even when water freezes to form ice, there is increase in its volume. As there is no room for expansion, it exerts a tremendous pressure on the rocks which crack and break up into small pieces.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 7.
a. What is meant by latent heat? How will the state of matter transform if latent heat is given off?
Answer:
When a solid is heated, initially, its temperature increases. Here, the heat absorbed by the body (substance) is used in increasing the kinetic energy of the particles (atomic, molecules, etc.) of the body as well as for doing work against the forces of attraction between them. As the heating is continued, at a certain temperature (melting point), solid is converted into liquid. In this case, the temperature remains constant and the heat absorbed is used for weakening the bonds and conversion into liquid phase (liquid state). This heat is called the latent heat of fusion.

When a liquid is converted into the gaseous phase (gaseous state), at the boiling point, the heat absorbed is used for breaking the bonds between the atoms or molecules. This heat is called the latent heat of vaporization. Some solids, under certain conditions, are directly transformed into the gaseous phase. Here the heat is absorbed but the temperature remains constant. The absorbed heat is used for breaking the bonds between atoms or molecules. This heat is called the latent heat of sublimation.

In general, latent heat is the heat absorbed or given out by a substance during a change of state at constant temperature.
In transformations from liquid to solid, gas to liquid and gas to solid, latent heat is given out by the body (substance).
(Note: change of state = change of phase)

b. Which principle is used to measure the specific heat capacity of a substance?
Answer:
The principle of heat exchange is used to measure the specific heat capacity of a substance. This principle is as follows: If a system of two objects is isolated from the environment by keeping it inside a heat resistant box, then no energy can leave the box or enter the box. In this situation, heat energy lost by the hot object = heat energy gained by the cold object.

c. Explain the role of latent heat in the change of state of a substance.
Answer:
When a solid is heated, initially, its temperature increases. Here, the heat absorbed by the body (substance) is used in increasing the kinetic energy of the particles (atomic, molecules, etc.) of the body as well as for doing work against the forces of attraction between them. As the heating is continued, at a certain temperature (melting point), solid is converted into liquid. In this case, the temperature remains constant and the heat absorbed is used for weakening the bonds and conversion into liquid phase (liquid state). This heat is called the latent heat of fusion.

When a liquid is converted into the gaseous phase (gaseous state), at the boiling point, the heat absorbed is used for breaking the bonds between the atoms or molecules. This heat is called the latent heat of vaporization. Some solids, under certain conditions, are directly transformed into the gaseous phase. Here the heat is absorbed but the temperature remains constant. The absorbed heat is used for breaking the bonds between atoms or molecules. This heat is called the latent heat of sublimation.

In general, latent heat is the heat absorbed or given out by a substance during a change of state at constant temperature.
In transformations from liquid to solid, gas to liquid and gas to solid, latent heat is given out by the body (substance).
(Note: change of state = change of phase)

d. what basis and how will you determine whether air is saturated with vapour or not?
Answer:
Whether the air is saturated with water vapour or not is determined on the basis of the extent of water vapour present in the air. If the relative humidity is 100%, the air is saturated with water vapour. In that case, we can see the formation of water droplets on the leaves of plants/grass.
If the relative humidity is less than 100%, the air is not saturated with water vapour.

Question 8.
Read the following paragraph and answer the questions:
If heat is exchanged between a hot and cold object, the temperature of the cold object goes on increasing due to gain of energy and the temperature of the hot object goes on decreasing due to loss of energy.

The change in temperature continues till the temperatures of both the objects attain the same value. In this process, the cold object gains heat energy and the hot object loses’ heat energy. If the system of both the objects is isolated from the environment by keeping it inside a heat resistant box (meaning that the energy exchange takes place between the two objects only), then no energy can flow from inside the box or come into the box.
(1) Heat is transferred from where to where?
(2) Which principle do we learn about from this process?
(3) How will you state the principle briefly?
(4) Which property of the substance is measured using this principle?
Answer:
(1) Heat is transferred from a hot object to a cold object.
(2) This process shows the principle of heat exchange.
(3) In this process, the cold object gains heat energy and the hot object loses energy. If a system of two objects is isolated from the surroundings, heat energy lost by the hot object = heat energy gained by the cold object.
(4) This principle is used to measure the specific heat capacity of a substance.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 9.
Solve the following problems:
a. Equal heat is given to two objects A and B of mass 1 g. The temperature of A increases by 3 °C and B by 5°C. Which object has more specific heat? And by what factor?
Solution:
Data: m = 1 g, Δ T1 = 3 °C, Δ T2 = 5 °C,
Q same
Here, Q = mc1 ΔT1 = mc2 ΔT2
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 4
Thus, c1 > c2
The specific heat of A is more than that of B and
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 5

b. Liquid ammonia is used in ice factory for making ice from water. If water at 20 °C is to be converted into 2 kg, ice at 0 °C, how many grams of ammonia is to be evaporated?
(Given: The latent heat of vaporization of 1 ammonia = 341 cal/g)
Solution:
Data : m1 = 2kg, ΔT1=20 °C – 0 °C
= 20 °C, c1 = 1 kcal/kg·°C, L1 (ice) = 80 kcal/kg,
L2 (vaporization of ammonia) = 341 cal/g = 341 kcal/kg, m2 =?
Q1 (heat lost by water) = m1c1 ΔT1 + m1L1
= 2kg × 1 kcal/kg·°C × 20 °C + 2 kg × 80 kcal/kg
=40 kcal + 160 kcal = 200 kcal
Q2 (heat absorbed by ammonia) = m2L2
= m2 × 34l kcal/kg
According to the principle of heat exchange, Q1 = Q2
∴ 200 kcal = m2 × 341 kcal/kg
∴ m2 = \(\frac{200}{341}\) kg = 0.5864 kg = 586.4 g
586.4 g of ammonia are to be evaporated.

c. A thermally insulated pot has 150 g ice at temperature 0 °C. How much steam of 100 °C has to he mixed to it, so that water of temperature 50 °C will be obtained?
(Given: Latent heat of melting of ice = 80 cal/g, latent heat of vaporization of water = 540 cal/g, specific heat of water = 1 cal/g °C)
Solution:
Data: m1 = 150 g, ΔT1 = 50 °C – 0 °C
= 50 °C, cw = 1 cal/g.°C, L1 = 80 cal/g, L2 = 540 cal/g,
Δ T2 = 100°C – 50 °C = 50 °C, m2 = ?
Q1 (heat absorbed by ice) = m1L1
= 150 g × 80 cal/g = 12000 cal
Q2 (heat absorbed by water formed on melting of ice) =m1 cw ΔT1
= 150 g × 1 cal/g·°C × 50 °C = 7500 cal
Q3 (heat given out by steam) = m2L2
= m2 × 540 cal/g
Q4 (heat given out by water formed on condensation of steam)
= m2 cw ΔT2 = m2 × 1 cal/g·°C × 50 °C
According to the principle of heat exchange,
Q1 + Q2 = Q3 + Q4
∴ 12000 cal + 7500 cal = m2 × 540 cal/g + m2 × 50 cal/g
∴ 19500 cal = m2 (540 + 50) cal/g
∴ m2 = \(\frac{19500}{590}\) g
33.5 g of steam is to be mixed.

d. A calorimeter has mass 100 g and specific heat 0.1 kcal/kg ·°C. It contains 250 g of liquid at 30 °C having specific heat of 0.4 kcal/kg·°C. If we drop a piece of ice of mass 10 g at 0 °C into the liquid, what will be the temperature of the mixture?
Solution:
Data: m1 = 100 g, c1 = 0.1 kcal/kg·°C,
= 0.1 cal/g·°C, T1 = 30 °C, m2 = 250 g,
c2 = 0.4 kcal/kg·°C = 0.4 cal/g·°C, T2 = 30 °C,
m3 = 10 g, T3 = 0 °C, L = 80 cal/g,
c (water) = 1 cal/g·°C, T = ?
Q1 (heat lost by calorimeter) = m1c1 (T- T1),
Q2 (heat lost by liquid) = m2c2 (T – T2),
Q3 (heat absorbed by ice) = m3 L,
Q4 (heat absorbed by water formed on melting of ice) = m3c (T – 0 °C)
According to the principle of heat exchange,
Q1 + Q2 = Q3 + Q4
∴ m1c1 (T1 – T) + m2c2 (T2 – T) = m3L + m3c (T – 0 °C)
∴ m1c1T1 – m1c1T + m2c2T2 – m2c2T = m3L + m3c (T – 0°C)
∴ m1c1T1 + m2c2T2 = m3L + (m1c1 + m2c2 + m3c)T
∴ 100g × 0.1 cal/g°C × 30 °C + 250g × 0.4 cal/g.°C × 30 °C J
= 10 g x× 80 cal/g + (100 g × 0.1 cal/g.°C + 250 g × 0.4 cal/g.°C + 10 g × 1 cal/g.°C) T
∴ (10 + 100 + 10) T = (300 + 3000 – 800)°C
∴ 120 T = 2500 °C
∴ T = \(\frac{2500}{120}\) °C = \(\frac{125}{6}\) °C = 20.83 °C
This is the temperature of the mixture.

Project:
Take help of your teachers to make a working model of Hope’s apparatus and perform the experiment. Verify the results you obtain. [Do it your self]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 62)

Question 1.
What is the difference between heat and temperature?
Answer:
Heat is a form of energy. Particles of matter (atoms, molecules, etc.) possess potential energy and kinetic energy. Total energy (potential energy + kinetic energy) of all particles of matter in a given sample is called it’s thermal energy. When two bodies at different temperatures are in thermal contact with each other, there is transfer of thermal energy from a body at higher temperature to a body at lower temperature. This energy in transfer is called heat. It is expressed in joule, calorie and erg.

Temperature is a quantitative measure of degree of hotness or coldness of a body. It is expressed in °C, °F or K (kelvin). Temperature determines the direction of energy transfer.

Question 2.
What are the different ways of heat transfer?
Answer:
Ways of heat transfer: conduction, convection and radiation.
[Note: heat ≡ heat energy. In the textbook, both the terms are used.]

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 63)

Question 1.
Is the concept of latent heat applicable during transformation of gaseous phase to liquid phase and from liquid phase to solid phase?
Answer:
Yes.

Question 2.
Where does the latent heat go during these transformations?
Answer:
During these transformations, the latent heat is given out by the substance to the surroundings.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 64)

Question 1.
In the above experiment, the wire moves through the ice slab. However, the ice slab does not break. Why?
Answer:
When the thin wire with two equal weights attached to its ends is hung over the block of ice, it exerts pressure on the ice below it. Due to this, the melting point of the ice below the wire is lowered and some ice melts. The wire passes through the water so formed.

The water above the wire is no longer under pressure and, therefore, refreezes. Once again the ice below the wire melts, and the wire passes through it, and the process continues. In this way, due to alternate melting of ice and refreezing of water, the wire cuts right through the block of ice leaving the block intact.

Question 2.
Is there any relationship of latent heat with regelation?
Answer:
Yes. when the ice melts, heat is absorbed, but the temperature does not change. Also, when water refreezes, heat is given out, but the temperature does not change. This heat absorbed or given out is the latent heat.

Question 3.
You know that as we go higher than the sea level, the boiling point of water decreases. What would be the effect on the melting point of a solid?
Answer:
As we go higher than the sea level, the melting point of solids (i) that expand on melting is lowered due to a decrease in pressure (ii) that contract on melting is raised due to a decrease in pressure.

[The wire used in the experiment is made of a metal (usually copper). Metals are good conductors of heat. Hence, exchange of heat between the portion of the ice above the wire and that below the wire takes place readily.]

Can you tell? (Text Book Page No. 64)

Question 1.
We feel that some objects are cold, and some are hot. Is this feeling related in some way to our body temperature?
Answer:
Yes. If the temperature of the object is lower than our body temperature, e.g., ice, we feel the object is cold. If the temperature of the object is higher than our body temperature, e.g., hot water, we feel the object is hot.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 66)

Question 1.
How will you explain the following statements with the help of the anomalous behaviour of water?
(1) In regions with cold climate, the aquatic plants and animals can survive even when the atmospheric temperature goes below 0 °C.
(2) In cold regions in winter the pipes for water supply break and even rocks crack.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 6
In cold regions, during winter, the temperature of the atmosphere falls well below 0 °C. As the temperature decreases, the water at the surfaces of lakes and ponds starts contraeting. Hence, its density increases and it sinks to the bottom. This process continues till the temperature of all the water in a lake falls to 4 °C. As the water at the surface cools further, i.e., its temperature falls below 4 °C, it starts expanding instead of contracting. Therefore, its density decreases and it remains at the surface.

The temperature or the water at the surface continues to fall to 0 °c. Finally, the water at the surface is converted Into ice, but the water below the layer of ice is at 4 °C. Ice is a bad conductor of heat. Hence, the layer of the ice at the surface does not allow transfer of heat from the water to the atmosphere. As the water below the layer of ice remains at 4 °C, fish and other aquatic animals and plants can survive in it.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

(2) Sometimes water enters into crevices of the rocks. when the temperature of the atmosphere falls below 4 °C, water expands. Even when water freezes to form ice, there is increase in its volume. As there is no room for expansion, it exerts tremendous pressure on the rocks which crack and break up Into small pieces.

In cold countries, in winter, the temperature of the atmosphere falls below 0 °C. when the temperature of water falls below 4 °C, it expands. Hence, the water in pipes expands. Even if ice is rormed, there is an increase in the volume.

As there is no room for expansion, water (or ice) exerts a large pressure on the pipes. Hence, the pipelines carrying water burst.

Fill in the blanks and rewrite the sentences:

Question 1.
The amount of water vapour in air is determined in terms of its…………..
Answer:
The amount of water vapour in air is determined in terms of its absolute humidity.

Question 2.
If objects of equal masses are given equal heat, their final temperature will be different. This is due to difference in their……………
Answer:
If objects of equal masses are given equal heat, their final temperature will be different. This is due to difference in their specific heat capacities.

Question 3.
When a liquid is getting converted into solid, the latent heat is…………. (Practical Activity Sheet – 1 and 2)
Answer:
When a liquid is getting converted into solid, the latent heat is released.

Rewrite the following statements by selecting the correct options:

Question 1.
……….is used to study the anomalous behaviour of water.
(a) Calorimeter
(b) Joule’s apparatus
(c) Hope’s apparatus
(d) Thermos flask
Answer:
(c) Hope’s apparatus

Question 2.
When water boils and is converted into steam, then………..
(a) heat is taken in and temperature remains constant
(b) heat is taken in and temperatures rises
(c) heat is given out and temperature lowers
(d) heat is given out and temperature remains constant
Answer:
(a) heat is taken in and temperature remains constant

Question 3.
When steam condenses to form water,………..
(a) heat is absorbed and temperature increases
(b) heat is absorbed and temperature remains the same
(c) heat is given out and temperature decreases
(d) heat is given out and temperature remains the same
Answer:
(d) heat is given out and temperature remains the same

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 4.
The temperature of ice can be decreased below 0 °C by mixing………..in it. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
(a) saw dust
(b) sand
(c) salt
(d) coal
Answer:
(c) salt

Question 5.
Ice/water is a substance that………..
(a) expands on melting and contracts on freezing
(b) contracts on melting and does not undergo change in volume on freezing
(c) contracts on melting and expands on freezing
(d) does not undergo any change in volume on melting or freezing
Answer:
(c) contracts on melting and expands on freezing

Question 6.
Heat absorbed when 1 g of ice melts at 0 °C to form 1 g of water at the same temperature is………..cal.
(a) 80
(b) 800
(c) 540
(d) 54
Answer:
(a) 80

Question 7.
The latent heat of vaporization of water is………..
(a) 540 cal/g
(b) 800 cal/g
(c) 80 cal/g
(d) 54 cal/g
Answer:
(a) 540 cal/g

Question 8.
The latent heat of fusion of ice is………..
(a) 540 cal/g
(b) 80 cal/g
(c) 800 cal/g
(d) 4cal/g
Answer:
(b) 80 cal/g

Question 9.
If the temperature of water is decreased from 4 °C to 10 °C, then its………..
(a) volume decreases and density increases
(b) volume increases and density decreases
(c) volume decreases and density decreases
(d) volume increases and density increases
Answer:
(b) volume increases and density decreases

Question 10.
At 4 °C, the density of water is………..
(a) 10 g/cm3
(b) 4g/cm3
(c) 4 × 103 kg/m3
(d) 1 × 103 kg/m3
Answer:
(d) 1 × 103 kg/m3

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 11.
The density of water is maximum at………..
(a) 0 °C
(b) – 4 °C
(c) 100 °C
(d) 4 °C
Answer:
(d) 4 °C

Question 12.
………..heat is needed to raise the temperature of 1 kg of water from 14.5 °C to 15.5 °C.
(a) 4180 J
(b) 103 J
(c) 1 cal
(d) 4180 cal
Answer:
(a) 4180 J

Question 13.
………..heat is needed to convert 1 g of water at 0 °C and at a pressure of one atmosphere into 1 g of steam under the same conditions.
(a) 80 cal
(b) 540 cal
(c) 89 J
(d) 540 J
Answer:
(b) 540 cal

Question 14.
Water expands on reducing its temperature below………..°C. (March 2019)
(a) 0
(b) 4
(c) 8
(d) 12
Answer:
(b) 4

State whether the following statements are true or false. (If a statement is false, correct it and rewrite it.):

Question 1.
Specific latent heat of fusion is expressed in g/cal.
Answer:
False. (Specific latent heat of fusion is expressed in cal/g.)

Question 2.
If the temperature of water is raised from 0 °C to 10 °C, its volume goes on increasing.
Answer:
False. (If the temperature of water is raised from 0 °C to 10 °C, its volume goes on decreasing in the range 0 °C to 4 °C and then goes on increasing in the range 4 °C to 10 °C.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 3.
At dew point relative humidity is 100%.
Answer:
True.

Question 4.
1 kcal = 4.18 joules.
Answer:
False. (1 kcal = 4180 joules.)

Question 5.
Specific heat capacity is expressed in cal/g·°C
Answer:
True.

Question 6.
Latent heat of fusion, Q = mL.
Answer:
True.

Question 7.
If the relative humidity is more than 60%, we feel that the air is humid.
Answer:
True.

Question 8.
If the relative humidity is less than 60%, we feel that the air is dry.
Answer:
True.

Question 9.
Relative humidity has no unit.
Answer:
True.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 10.
Absolute humidity is expressed in kg/m3.
Answer:
True.

Identify the odd one and give the reason:

Question 1.
Temperature, conduction, convection, radiation.
Answer:
Temperature. It is a physical quantity. Others are modes of transfer of heat.

Question 2.
The joule, The erg, The calorie, The newton.
Answer:
The newton. It is a unit of force. Others are units of energy (as well as work.)

Question 3.
cal/g, cal/g·°C, k cal/kg·°C, erg/g·°C.
Answer:
cal/g. It is a unit of specific latent heat. Others are units of specific heat capacity.

Match the columns:

Column A Column B
1. Latent heat a. Q = mc ΔT
2. Specific heat capacity b. Q = mL
3. Heat absorbed or given out by a body when its temperature changes. c. kcal
d. cal/g·°C

Answer:
(1) Latent heat – Q = mL
(2) Specific heat capacity – cal/g·°C
(3) Heat absorbed or given out by a body when its temperature changes – Q = mc ΔT.

Answer the following questions in one sentence each:

Question 1.
State units of temperature.
Answer:
Units of temperature: °C, °F and K (kelvin).

Question 2.
State units of energy.
Answer:
Units of energy: the erg, the joule, the calorie.

Question 3.
State the relation between the joule and the calorie.
Answer:
1 calorie = 4.18 joules.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 4.
State the relation between the erg and the joule.
Answer:
1 joule = 107 ergs.

Question 5.
State the relation between the erg and the kilocalorie.
Answer:
1 kilocalorie = 4.18 × 1010 ergs.

Question 6.
State the relation between the joule and the kilocalorie.
Answer:
1 kilocalorie = 4.18 × 103 joules.

Question 7.
When heat energy is absorbed by an object, ΔT represents the rise in temperature. What would ΔT represent if the object loses heat energy? (Practice Activity Sheet – 4)
Answer:
If the object loses heat energy, ΔT would represent the decrease in temperature.

Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
Define latent heat of fusion.
(OR)
What is latent heat of fusion? State its units.
Answer:
When a solid is converted into liquid at constant temperature (melting point of the substance) the amount of heat absorbed by it is called the latent heat of fusion.
Heat is a form of energy. Hence, latent heat is expressed in units joule, erg, calorie or kilocalorie.

Question 2.
Define specific latent heat of fusion.
(OR)
What is specific latent heat of fusion? State its units.
Answer:
The amount of heat energy absorbed at constant temperature by unit mass of a solid to convert into liquid phase is called the specific latent heat of fusion.
It is expressed in units J/kg, erg/g, cal/g, kJ/ kg and kcal/kg.

[Note: Specific latent heat (L) = \(\frac{\text { latent heat }(Q)}{\text { mass of the substance }(m)}\)
:. SI unit of specific latent heat = SI unit of energy / SI unit of mass = J/kg]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 3.
Explain the term latent heat of vaporization.
Answer:
When a liquid is heated continuously, initially, its temperature increases. Later, at a certain stage, its temperature does not increase even when heat is supplied to it. At this temperature, heat absorbed by the liquid is used for breaking the bonds between its atoms or molecules, i.e., for doing work against the forces of attraction between the atoms or molecules and conversion into gaseous phase.

This heat is called the latent heat of vaporization and the constant temperature at which this change of state occurs is called the boiling point of the liquid.

Question 4.
Define boiling point of a liquid.
(OR)
What is boiling point of a liquid?
Answer:
The constant temperature at which a liquid transforms into gaseous state is called the boiling point of the liquid.
[Note: On application of pressure, the boiling point of a liquid is raised. On reducting the pressure, the boiling point is lowered.]

Question 5.
Define specific latent heat of vaporization.
OR
What is specific latent heat of vaporization?
Answer:
The amount of heat energy absorbed at constant temperature by unit mass of a liquid to convert into gaseous phase is called the specific latent heat of vaporization.

Question 6.
The specific latent heat of fusion of ice is 80 cal/g. Explain this statement.
Answer:
When 1 g of ice at a pressure of one atmosphere and at a temperature 0 °C is converted into 1 g of water, heat absorbed by the ice is 80 cal.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 7.
The specific latent heat of fusion of silver is 88.2 kJ/kg. Explain this statement.
Answer:
When 1 kg of silver at a pressure of one atmosphere and at a temperature of 962 °C (melting point of silver) is converted into 1 kg of silver in liquid phase, heat absorbed by the silver is 88.2 kJ.

Question 8.
The specific latent heat of vaporization of water is 540 cal/g. Explain this statement.
Answer:
When 1 g of water at a pressure of one atmosphere and at a temperature of 100 °C is converted into 1 g of steam, heat absorbed by the water is 540 cal.

Question 9.
Define regelation.
(OR)
What is regelation?
Answer:
The phenomenon in which the ice converts to liquid due to applied pressure and then re-converts to ice once the pressure is removed is called regelation.

Question 10.
The terms hot and cold are used in relative context. Explain.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 7
(1) Take three large bowls, P, Q and R. Fill bowl P with cold water, bowl Q with lukewarm water, and bowl R with hot water.
(2) Immerse your right hand in bowl P, and left hand in bowl R for about five seconds.
(3) Now, immerse both the hands in bowl Q at the same time.
(4) You will find that the water in bowl Q appears warm to your right hand, and cold to your left hand. Thus, the hand immersed in cold water for some time finds the lukewarm water hot while the one immersed in hot water finds the same lukewarm water cold. This experiment shows that the terms hot and cold are relative.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 11.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of Hope’s apparatus. Explain how this apparatus can be used to demonstrate anomalous behaviour of water. Draw a graph of temperature of water against time.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 8
The figure shows Hope’s apparatus. Initially, the cylindrical container in Hope’s apparatus is filled with water at about 12 °C and the flat bowl is filled with a freezing mixture of ice and salt.

The temperature of water in the upper part of the container (T2) is recorded by thermometer T2 and that of water in the lower part of the container (T1) is recorded by thermometer T1. Figure shows variation of temperature of water with time.

Initially, both the thermometers show the same temperature (say, 12 °C). In a short time, the temperature shown by the lower thermometer starts decreasing, while the temperature shown by the upper thermometer does not change very much.

This process continues till the temperature shown by the lower thermometer falls to 4 °C and remains constant thereafter. This shows that in the temperature range 12 °C to 4 °C, the density of the water in the central part of the container goes on increasing and hence the water sinks to the bottom. It means that water contracts, i.e., its volume decreases as its temperature falls from 12 °C to 4 °C.

As the temperature of the water in the central part of the container becomes less than 4 °C, the temperature shown by the upper thermometer begins to fall rapidly to 0 °C. But the temperature shown by the lower thermometer remains constant (4 °C). Later, the heading shown by the lower thermometer decreases to 0 °C.

In the temperature range 4 °C to 0 °C, the water moves upward. This shows that the density of water goes on decreasing in this range. It means that water expands, i.e. its volume increases as its temperature falls from 4 °C to 0 °C.

Thus, the volume of a given mass of water is minimum at 4 °C, i.e., the density of water is maximum at 4 °C.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 9
In the above figure, the point of intersection of the two curves shows the temperature at which the density of water is maximum. This temperature is 4 °C.

Question 12.
A mountaineer climbing on the Everest, experienced the following facts. Explain each fact with the scientific reason : (1) He found j fishes alive below the ice (2) Time required for cooking was more as he went higher (3) He saw many times cliffs falling suddenly (4) He saw tubes carrying water broken.
Answer:
Explanation:
(1) Water expands as its temperature decreases from 4 °C to 0 °C. Water is converted into ice at 0 °C. The density of water is more than that of ice. Fishes can remain alive in the water (at 4 °C) below the ice.
(2) At high altitudes, atmospheric pressure is low and hence water boils at a temperature lower than its normal boiling point. Therefore, the time required for cooking food is more at higher altitudes.
(3) Water expands while freezing. Hence, the water present in the crevices of the rocks exerts a tremendous pressure on the rocks, while freezing. Therefore, the cliffs fall.
(4) Water expands while freezing. Hence, the water in the tube exerts a large pressure on the tube, while freezing. Therefore, the tube carrying water breaks.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 13.
What is humidity?
Answer:
The moisture, i.e., the presence of water vapour, in the atmosphere is called humidity.

Question 14.
When is air said to be saturated with water vapour?
Answer:
When air contains maximum possible water vapour, it is said to be saturated with water vapour at that temperature.

Question 15.
What does the amount of water vapour needed to saturate air depend on?
Answer:
The extent of water vapour needed to saturate air depends on the temperature. The greater the temperature, the greater is the amount of water vapour needed to saturate air.

Question 16.
When is air said to be unsaturated with water vapour?
Answer:
When air contains water vapour less than its capacity to hold water vapour at that temperature, it is said to be unsaturated with water’vapour.

Question 17.
What is dew point temperature?
(OR)
Define dew point temperature.
Answer:
If the temperature of unsaturated air is decreased, a temperature is reached at which the air becomes saturated with water vapour. This temperature is called the dew point temperature.

Question 18.
Name the physical quantity used to express the amount of water vapour present in air.
Answer:
Absolute humidity.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 19.
Define absolute humidity.
(OR)
What is absolute humidity? State its unit.
Answer:
The mass of water vapour present in a unit volume of air is called absolute humidity. Generally it is expressed in kg/m3.

Question 20.
Define relative humidity.
(OR)
What is relative humidity? Write the formula for % relative humidity.
Answer:
The ratio of the actual mass of water vapour content in the air for a given volume and temperature to that required to make the same volume of air saturated with water vapour at the same temperature is called the relative humidity.

% Relative humidity = [the actual mass of water vapour content in the air for a given volume and temperature ÷ the mass of water vapour required to make the same volume of air saturated with water vapour at the same temperature] × 100%.

Question 21.
What is the value of relative humidity at the dew point temperature?
Answer:
At the dew point temperature, relative humidity is 100%.

Question 22.
The mass of water vapour in air enclosed in a certain space is 60 g and the mass of water vapour needed to saturate the same air with water vapour under the same conditions is 100 g. What is the corresponding % relative humidity?
Answer:
Here, % relative humidity = (\(\frac{60 \mathrm{g}}{100 \mathrm{g}}\)) × 100% = 60%

Question 23.
During winter, sometimes we see a white trail at the back of a flying aeroplane in a clear sky. Explain why.
Answer:
In winter, air temperature is low. Hence, when an aeroplane flies, the vapour released by its engine condenses and forms white clouds. If the relative humidity of the air surrounding the plane is high, we see this white trail at the back of the plane for a long time before it disappears. If.the relative humidity is low, the white trail is short and disappears quickly. If the relative humidity is very low, there is no formation of the white trail.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 24.
State two effects of humidity present in atmosphere.
Answer:
Effects of humidity present in atmosphere: When the temperature of air falls below the dew point, dew and fog are formed.

Question 25.
Explain how dew and fog are formed.
(OR)
Write a short note on formation of dew and fog.
Answer:
At a particular temperature, a given volume of air can contain a certain maximum amount of water vapour. Normally, the temperature of air during the day is such that air is not saturated with water vapour present in it.

As the temperature falls, the capacity of air to hold water vapour becomes less. During a cold night, the temperature of air may fall to the dew point, or even below the dew point. If the temperature falls below the dew point, the excess of water vapour in air condenses on the surfaces of cold bodies and dew is formed. If the water vapour condenses on the fine dust particles present in the atmosphere, mist or fog is formed.

Question 26.
State the units of heat.
Answer:
Units of heat: joule, erg, calorie, kilocalorie.

Question 27.
Define the kilocalorie.
Answer:
The amount of heat necessary to raise the temperature of 1 kg of water by 1 °C from 14.5 °C to 15.5 °C is called one kilocalorie.

Question 28.
Define the calorie.
Answer:
The amount of heat necessary to raise the temperature of 1 g of water by 1 °C from 14.5 °C to 15.5 °C is called one calorie.

Question 29.
State the relation between the kilocalorie and the calorie.
Answer:
1 kilocalorie = 103 calories.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 30.
Study the following procedure and answer the questions below:  (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
1. Take 3 spheres of iron, copper and lead of equal mass.
2. Put all the 3 spheres in boiling water in a beaker for some time.
3. Take 3 spheres out of the water. Put them immediately on a thick slab of wax.
4. Note the depth that each sphere goes into the wax.
(i) Which property of a substance can be studied with this procedure?
(ii) Describe that property in minimum words.
(iii) Explain the rule of heat exchange with this property.
Answer:
(i) Specific heat.
(ii) Specific heat: The amount of heat energy required to raise the temperature of a unit mass of an object by 1 °C.
(iii) According to the rule/principle of heat exchange, heat energy lost by the hot object = heat energy gained by the cold object.

In this activity, heat absorbed by the iron sphere is transmitted more in the wax, hence the sphere goes deepest into the wax, while the lead sphere absorbs less heat, resulting in less transmission of heat in the wax, hence, the sphere goes the least depth into the wax.

Question 31.
Write the symbol for specific heat capacity. State the units of specific heat capacity.
Answer:
Symbol for specific heat capacity: c.
Units of specific heat capacity: J/kg·°C,
erg/g·°C, cal/g·°C, kcal/kg·°C.
[ Notes: (1) Specific heat capacity
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 10
In SI, heat is expressed in joule (J), mass in kg and temperature in kelvin(K).
∴ SI unit of specific heat capacity = \(\frac{\mathrm{J}}{\mathrm{kg} \cdot \mathrm{K}}\). (2) The specific heat capacity of a substance depends upon its constituent particles (atoms, molecules, etc.), interaction between them, structure of the substance (atomic/molecular arrangement), temperature of the substance, etc.]

Question 32.
Explain the principle of heat exchange. Ans. Suppose two objects A and B at different temperature T1 and T2 respectively are enclosed in a box of heat resistant material as shown in figure.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 11
Let m1 = mass of A, m2 = mass of B, c1 = specific heat capacity of A, c2 = specific heat capacity of B and T = common temperature attained by A and B after the heat exchange between A and B. Here, no heat leaves the box or enters the box from outside. Hence, if T1 > T2, heat energy lost by A (Q1) = heat energy gained by B (Q2).
∴ m1c1 (T1 – T) = m2c2 (T – T2)
[Note: If m1, c1, T1, T, m2 and T2 are known, c2 can be determined.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 33.
The specific heat capacity of silver is 0.056 kcal/kg·°C. Explain this statement.
Answer:
The amount of heat needed to raise the temperature of 1 kg of silver by 1 °C is 0.056 kcal.

Question 34.
Explain how the specific heat capacity of a solid can be determined (measured) by the method of mixture.
Answer:
A hot solid is put in water in a calorimeter. The mixture is stirred continuously and the maximum temperature of the mixture is measured with a thermometer. Heat exchange between the hot solid, water and calorimeter results in sill bodies attaining the same temperature after some time. Hence, according to the principle of heat exchange, heat lost by the solid = heat gained by the water in the calorimeter + heat gained by the calorimeter.

Now, heat lost by the solid (Q) = mass of the solid × its specific heat capacity × decrease in its temperature, heat gained by the water (Q1) = mass of the water × its specific heat capacity × increase in its temperature and heat gained by the calorimeter (Q2) = mass of the calorimeter × its specific heat capacity × increase in its temperature.

Heat lost by the hot object = heat gained by the calorimeter + heat gained by the water. Q = Q2 + Q1
Using this equation, the specific heat capacity of the solid can be determined (measured) when the other quantities are known.

Give scientific reasons:

Question 1.
Even though heat is supplied to boiling water, there is no increase in its temperature.
Answer:
Once water starts boiling, all the heat supplied to it is used in conversion of water into steam at the boiling point of water. Hence, there is no rise in its temperature.

Question 2.
Burns from steam are worse those from boiling water at the same temperature.
Answer:
1. A given quantity of steam contains more heat than the same quantity of boiling water at the same temperature.
2. When steam comes in contact with one’s body, it releases extra heat of 540 calories per gram and causes a more serious burn than that caused by boiling water.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 3.
In winter, the pipelines carrying water burst in cold countries.
Answer:
1. In cold countries, in winter, the temperature of the atmosphere falls below 0 °C. When the temperature of water falls below 4 °C, it expands. Hence, the water in pipes expands. Even if ice is formed, there is an increase in the volume.

2. As there is no room for expansion, water (or ice) exerts a large pressure on the pipes. Hence, the pipelines carrying water burst.

Question 4.
If crushed ice is pressed and then the pressure is released, a lump of ice is formed.
Answer:
1. When crushed ice is pressed, its melting point is lowered and some ice melts to form water.
2. When pressure is released, the melting point becomes normal and the water freezes to form ice forming a lump.

Question 5.
In cold countries, in winter, even when the water of lakes freezes, aquatic animals and plants can survive.
Answer:
1. In cold countries, in winter, a layer of ice is formed on the surface of lakes when the atmospheric temperature falls below 0 °C. However, below this layer, there is water at 4 °C.
2. Ice, being a bad conductor of heat, does not allow transfer of heat from this water to the atmosphere. Hence, aquatic animals and plants can survive in this water.

Question 6.
Water droplets are seen on’ the outer surface of a cold drink bottle.
Answer:
1. The temperature of the outer surface of a cold drink bottle is less than that of the atmosphere.
2. Therefore, the excess of water vapour from the air condenses to form droplets on the outer surface of the cold drink bottle.

Question 7.
During cold nights, sometimes dew is formed.
Answer:
1. During a cold night, the temperature of air may fall to the dew point, or even below the dew point. 2. If the temperature falls below the dew point, the excess of water vapour in air condenses on the surfaces of cold bodies and dew is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Question 8.
When you enter a warm room after being outside on a frosty early morning, your spectacles ‘steam up’.
Answer:
1. On a frosty early morning, the temperature of air outside a warm room is lower than the dew point.
2. Hence, when you enter the room from outside, some water vapour in the room condenses on the glass of your spectacles, i.e., the spectacles ‘steam up’.

Question 9.
A plastic bottle, completely filled with water, when kept in a freezer, is likely to break.
Answer:
The temperature of air in the freezer (deep freeze) compartment of a refrigerator is less than 0 °C. 2. When a plastic bottle, completely filled with water, is kept in this compartment, the temperature of water falls below 4 °C and the water expands. Even when water freezes and ice is formed, there is an increase in the volume. It exerts a large pressure on the sides of the bottle and hence the bottle is likely to break.

Question 10.
The outer surface of a beaker containing ice cubes becomes wet in a short while.
Answer:
1. When ice cubes are placed in a beaker, ice starts melting. The heat required for melting is absorbed from the surrounding air and also from the beaker to some extent.
Hence, the temperature of the air and beaker falls.

2. The capacity of air to hold water vapour depends upon the temperature of the air, and this capacity decreases as the temperature decreases. At a certain low temperature, the surrounding air becomes saturated with water vapour present in it. As the temperature falls further, the air is unable to hold all the water vapour.

Hence, the extra water vapour starts condensing on the cold outer surface of the beaker in the form of minute drops. Therefore, the outer surface of the beaker containing ice cubes becomes wet in a short while.

Distinguish between the following:

Question 1.
Absolute humidity and Relative humidity.
Answer:
Absolute humidity:

  1. Absolute humidity is the mass of water vapour present in a unit volume of air.
  2. It is commonly expressed in kg/m3.

Relative humidity:

  1. Relative humidity is the ratio of the mass of water vapour in a given volume of air at a given temperature to the mass of water vapour required to saturate the same volume of air at the same temperature.
  2. It does not have unit.

Solve the following examples/Numerical problems:
[Use the data given in the Tables on pages 130 and 131.]

Problem 1.
Calculate the amount of heat required to convert 5 g of ice of 0 °C into water at 0 °C. (Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal/g)
Solution: Here, m = 5 g, L = 80 cal/g; Q = ?
Amount of heat required, Q = mL
= 5 g × 80 cal/g
= 400 calories.

Problem 2.
Find the amount of heat required to convert 10 g of water at 100 °C into steam. (Specific latent heat of vaporization of water = 540 cal/g)
Solution: Here, m = 10 g, L = 540 cal/g; Q = ?
Amount of heat required, Q = mL
= 10 g × 540 cal/g
= 5400 calories.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Problem 3.
Calculate the amount of heat required to convert 15 g of water at 100 °C into steam. (Specific latent heat of vaporization of water = 540 cal/g)
Solution:
m = 15 g, L = 540 cal/g; Q = ?
Amount of heat required, Q = mL
= 15 g × 540 cal/g
= 8100 calories.

Problem 4.
How many calories of heat will be absorbed when 3 kg of ice at 0 °C melts?
Solution:
m = 3 kg = 3000 g; L = 80 cal/g; Q = ?
Quantity of heat absorbed, Q = mL
= 3000 g × 80 cal/g
∴ Q = 240000 calories.

Problem 5.
Calculate the amount of heat required to convert 10 g of water at 30 °C into steam at 100 °C. (Specific latent heat of vaporization of water = 540 cal/g)
Solution:
Here, m = 10 g; c = 1 cal/g·°C
T2 – T1 = 100 °C – 30 °C = 70 °C; L = 540 cal/g; Q = ?
Amount of heat required, Q = mc (T2 – T1) + mL
= 10 g × 1 cal/g·°C × 70 °C + 10 g × 540 cal/g
= 700 cal + 5400 cal
∴ Q = 6100 calories.

Problem 6.
If water of mass 80 g and temperature 45 °C is mixed with water of mass 20 g and temperature 30 °C, what will be the maximum temperature of the mixture?
Solution:
Data : m1 = 80 g, T1 = 45 °C, m2 = 20 g,
T2 = 30 °C, T = ?
According to the principle of heat exchange, heat lost by hot water = heat gained by cold water
∴ m1c (T1 – T) = m2c (T – T2)
∴ m1T1 – m1T = m2T – m2T2
∴ m1T1 + m2T2 = (m1 + m2)T
∴ Maximum temperature of the mixture,
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 12
= (36 + 6) °C
= 42°C.

Problem 7.
When water of mass 70 g and temperature 50 °C is added to water of mass 30 g, the maximum temperature of the mixture is found to be 41 °C. Find the temperature of water of mass 30 g before hot water was added to it.
Solution:
Data : m1 = 70 g, T1 = 50 °C, m2 = 30 g, T = 41 °C, T2 = ?
According to the principle of heat exchange, heat lost by hot water = heat gained by cold water
∴ m1c (T1 – T) = m2c (T – T2)
∴ m1T1 – m1T = m2T – m2T2
∴ m2T2 = (m1 + m2) T – m1T1
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat 13
This is the required temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Problem 8.
Find the heat needed to raise the temperature of a silver container of mass 100 g by 10 °C. (c = 0.056 cal/g.°C)
Solution:
Data: m = 100 g, ΔT = 10 °C, c = 0.056 cal/g·°C
Heat needed to raise the temperature of the container = mc ΔT
= 100 g × 0.056 cal/g·°C × 10 °C .
= 56 calories.

Problem 9.
If steam of mass 100 g and temperature 100 °C is released on an ice slab of temperature 0 °C, how much ice will melt?
Solution:
Data: m1 = 100 g, L1 = 540 cal/g,
T1 = 100 °C, mass of ice, m = ?, L2 = 80 cal/g, c (water) = 1 cal/g·°C
According to the principle of heat exchange, heat lost by hot body = heat gained by cold body. Conversion of steam into water:
Q1 = m1L1 = 100 g × 540 cal/g = 54000 cal
Decrease in the temperature of this water to 0 °C:
Q2 = m1c × (T1 – 0 °C) = 100 g × 1 cal/g·°C × (100 °C – 0 °C) = 10000 Cal
Melting of ice: Q3 = mL2
= m × 80 cal/g
Now, Q1 + Q2 = Q3
∴ (54000 + 10000) cal = m × 80 cal/g
∴ m = \(\frac{64000}{80}\) = 800 g
800 g of ice will melt.

Numerical problems for practice:

Problem 1.
Calculate the amount of heat required to convert 80 g of ice at 0 °C into water at the same temperature. (Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal/g)
Solution:
6400 cal

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Problem 2.
Find the heat required to convert 20 g of ice at 0 °C into water at the same temperature. (Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal/g)
Solution:
1600 cal

Problem 3.
Calculate the quantity of heat released during the conversion of 10 g of ice cold water (temperature 0 °C) into ice at the same temperature. (Specific latent heat of freezing of water = 80 cal/g)
Solution:
800 cal

Problem 4.
How many calories of heat will be absorbed when 2 kg of ice at 0 °C melts? (Specific latent heat of fusion of ice = 80 cal/g)
Solution:
160000 cal

Problem 5.
How much heat will be required to convert 20 g of water at 100 °C into steam at 100 °C? (Specific latent heat of vaporization of water = 540 cal/g)
Solution:
10800 cal

Problem 6.
Find the heat absorbed by 25 g of water at 100 °C to convert into steam at the same temperature. (Specific latent heat of vaporization of water = 540 cal/g.)
Solution:
13500 cal

Problem 7.
If water of mass 60 g and temperature 50 °C is mixed with water of mass 40 g and temperature 30 °C, what will be the maximum temperature of the mixture?
Solution:
42 °C

Problem 8.
If water of mass 60 g and temperature 60 °C is mixed with water of mass 60 g and temperature 40 °C, what will be the maximum temperature of the mixture?
Solution:
50 °C

Problem 9.
Find the heat needed to raise the temperature of a piece of iron of mass 500 g by 20 °C. (c = 0.110 cal/g·°C)
Solution:
1100 cal

Problem 10.
Water of mass 200 g and temperature 30 °C is taken in a copper calorimeter of mass 50 g and temperature 30 °C. A copper sphere of mass 100 g and temperature 100 °C is released into it. What will be the maximum temperature of the mixture? [c (water) = 1 cal/g·°C, c (copper) =0.1 cal/g·°C]
Solution:
33.26 °C

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 5 Heat

Problem 11.
A copper calorimeter of mass 100 g and temperature 30 °C contains water of mass 200 g and temperature 30 °C. If a piece of ice of mass 40 g and temperature 0 °C is added to it, what will be the maximum temperature of the mixture? [c (copper) = 0.1 cal/g·°C, c (water) = 1 cal/g·°C, L = 80 cal/g]
Solution:
12.4 °C

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 1.
Match the pairs.

Group A Group B
a. C2H6 1. Unsaturated hydrocarbon
b. C2H2 2. Molecular formula of an alcohol
c. CH4O 3. Saturated hydrocarbon
d. C3H6 4. Triple bond

Question 2.
Draw an electron dot structure of the following molecules. (Without showing the circles)
a. Methane.
Answer:
Molecular formula: CH4
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 1

b. Ethene.
Answer:
Molecular formula: H2C = CH2
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 2

c. Methanol.
Answer:
Molecular formula: H3C – OH
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 3

d. Water.
Answer:
Molecular formula: H2O
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 4

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 3.
Draw all possible structural formulae of compounds from their molecular formula given below.
a. C3H8
b. C4H10
c. C3H4
Answer:
a. C3H8 Propane:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 5

b. C4H10 Butane:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 6

c. C3H4 Propyne:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 7

Question 4.
Explain the following terms with example.
a. Structural isomerism.
Answer:
The phenomenon in which compounds having different structural formulae have the same molecular formula is called structural isomerism. Butane is represented by two different compounds as their structural formulae are different. The first compound is a straight chain compound and the second compound is a branched chain compound. These two different structural formulae have the same molecular formula i.e. C4H10.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 8

b. Covalent bond.
Answer:
The chemical bond formed by sharing of two valence electrons between the two atoms is called covalent bond.
Example:
1. Hydrogen molecule formation: The atomic number of hydrogen is 1, its atom contains 1 electron in K shell. It requires one more electron to complete the K shell and attain the configuration of helium (He). To meet this requirement two hydrogen atoms share their electrons with each other to form H2 molecule. One covalent bond, i.e. a single bond is formed between two hydrogen atoms by sharing of two electrons.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 9

2. Formation of oxygen molecule:
(1) The atomic number of oxygen is 8. The electronic configuration of oxygen is (2, 6). Oxygen has 6 electrons in the outermost shell.
(2) It requires 2 electrons to complete the L shell and attain the configuration of neon (Ne).
(3) Each oxygen atom shares its valence electron with the valence electron of another oxygen atom to give two shared pairs of electrons which results in the formation of oxygen molecule.
(4) Thus, two electron pairs are shared between two oxygen atoms, forming double covalent bond (=).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 10

c. Hetero atom in a carbon compound.
Answer:
Carbon compounds are formed by formation of bonds of carbon with other elements such as halogens, oxygen, nitrogen, sulfur. The atoms of these elements substitute one or more hydrogen atoms in the hydrocarbon chain and thereby the tetravalency of carbon is satisfied. The atom of the element which is substitute for hydrogen is referred to as a heteroatom. Sometimes hetero atoms are not alone but exist in the form of certain groups of atoms.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 11

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

d. Functional group.
Answer:
The compound acquire specific chemical properties due to these hetero atoms or the groups of atoms that contain hetero atoms, irrespective of length and nature of the carbon chain in that compound. Therefore these hetero atoms or groups of atoms containing hetero atoms are called the functional groups.

e. Alkane.
Answer:
In hydrocarbon, the four valencies of carbon atom are satisfied only by the single bonds, such compounds are called alkane.
Example: In methane, four hydrogen atoms are bonded to carbon atom by four single covalent bonds.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 12

f. Unsaturated hydrocarbons.
Answer:
The carbon compounds having a double bond or triple bond between two carbon atoms are called unsaturated hydrocarbons. The unsaturated hydrocarbons containing a carbon-carbon double bond are called alkenes.
e.g. Ethene (CH2 = CH2), Propene (CH3 – CH = CH2).
The unsaturated hydrocarbons containing a carbon-carbon triple bond are called alkynes e.g. Ethyne (CH ≡ CH).

g. Homopolymer.
Answer:
The polymers formed by repetition of single monomer are called homopolymer. e.g. polyethylene (CH2 – CH2)n.

h. Monomer.
Answer:
The small unit that repeats regularly to form a polymer is called monomer.
Example: Ethylene.

i. Reduction.
Answer:
In a chemical reaction, removal of oxygen from a compound or addition of hydrogen to a compound is called a reduction.

j. Oxidant.
Answer:
An oxidant is a reactant that oxidizes or removes electrons from other reactants during a redox reaction. An oxidant may also be called an oxidizer or oxidizing agent. When the oxidant includes oxygen, it may be called an oxygenation reagent or oxygen-atom transfer (OT) agent.
Examples of oxidants include:

  1. Hydrogen peroxide
  2. Ozone
  3. Nitric acid
  4. Sulfuric acid

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 5.
Write the IUPAC names of the following structural formulae.
a. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH3
Answer:
The number of carbon atopic in the longest chain: 4
Parent alkane: Butane IUPAC name: n-Butane

b. CH3 – CHOH – CH3 (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 3
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 13
Parent alkane: Propane
Functional group: -OH (ol)
Assign the number: 2
The carbon atom to which the -OH group is attached is numbered as C2. If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -OH group then change the ending of the parent name, i.e., ‘e’ of propane is replaced by ‘ol’. (ol stands for alcohol)
Parent suffix: Propan-2-ol
IUPAC name: Propan-2-ol

c. CH3 – CH2 – COOH (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 3
Parent alkane: Propane
Functional group: -COOH (-oic acid)
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -COOH group then change the ending of the parent name, i.e., ‘e’ of propane is replaced by ‘oic acid’.
Parent suffix: Propanoic acid
IUPAC name: Propanoic acid

d. CH3 – CH2 – NH2
Answer:
Number of carbon atoms: 2
Parent alkane: Ethane
Functional group: -NH2 (amine)
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -NH2 group, then change the ending of the parent name, i.e., ‘e’ of ethane is replaced by ‘amine’.
Parent suffix: Ethanamine
IUPAC name: Ethanamine.

e. CH3 – CHO
Answer:
Number of carbon atoms: 2
Parent alkane: Ethane
Functional group: -CHO (al)
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -CHO group, then change the ending of the parent name, i.e., ‘e’ of ethane is replaced by ‘al’.
Parent suffix: Ethanal
IUPAC name: Ethanal

f. CH3 – CO – CH2 – CH3
Answer:
Number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 4
Parent alkane: Butane Functional group: -CO- (one)
Assign the number:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 14
In the longest chain, the numbering of carbon atom starts from the carbon atom nearest to the function group.
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a (-CO-) group, then change the ending of the parent name, i.e., ‘e’ of butane is replaced by ‘one’.
Parent suffix: Butan-2-one
IUPAC name: Butan-2-one

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 6.
Identify the type of the following reaction of carbon compounds.
1. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – OH + (O) → CH3 – CH2 – COOH
2. CH3 – CH2 – CH3 + O2 → 3CO2 + 4H2O
3. CH3 – CH = CH – CH3 + Br2 → CH3 – CHBr – CHBr – CH3
4. CH3 – CH3 + Cl2 → CH3 – CH2 – Cl + HCl
5. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH2 – OH → CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 + H2O
6. CH3 – CH2 – COOH + NaOH → CH3 – CH2 – COONa+ + H2O
7. CH3 – COOH + CH3 – OH → CH3 – COO – CH3 + H2O
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 15
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 16

Question 7.
Write the structural formulae for the following IUPAC names:
a. Pent-2-one
Answer:
Pent-2-one.
(1) Pent stands for 5 carbon atoms in a chain.
Number the carbon atoms in a chain as 1, 2, 3,…..
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 17
(2) ‘one’ stands for functional group
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 18
ketone. The number assigned for the ketone group is 2. Show the ketone group at C2.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 19
(3) Now satisfy the valencies of each carbon atom
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 20

b. 2-Chlorobutane
Answer:
(1) In 2-chlorobutane, butane is parent alkane stands for 4 carbon atoms and number the carbon atoms in a chain as 1, 2, 3,….
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 21
(2) Chloro (Halo) is the prefix and the number assigned for prefix (chloro) is 2. Show the chloro atom at C2
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 22
(3) Now satisfy the valencies of each carbon atom
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 23

c. Propan-2-ol
Answer:
(1) Propan stands for 3 carbon atoms in a chain. Number the carbon atom in a chain as 1, 2, 3.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 24
(2) ‘-ol’ stands for (-OH) hydroxyl group. The number assigned for the hydroxyl group is 2. Show the -OH group at C2.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 25
(3) Now satisfy the valencies of each carbon atom
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 26

d. Methanal
Answer:
(1) Meth – stands for one carbon atom and assigned the number ‘1’ to carbon in the functional group -CHO.
(2) ‘-al’ stands for functional group (-CHO) aldehyde.
(3) Now satisfy the valencies of carbon in -CHO.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 27

e. Butanoic acid
Answer:
(1) But stands for 4 carbon atoms in a chain. Number the carbon atoms in a chain as 1, 2, 3,….
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 28
‘-oic acid’ stands for functional group -COOH. Assign the number 1 to carbon in the functional group -COOH.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 29
Now satisfy the valencies of each carbon atom
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 30

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

f. 1-Bromopropane.
Answer:
(1) In 1-bromopropane, propane is parent alkane stands for 3 carbon atoms and number the carbon atoms in a chain as 1, 2, 3…….
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 31
(2) Bromo (Halo) is the prefix and the number assigned for prefix (bromo) is 1, show the bromine atom at C1.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 32
(3) Now satisfy the valencies of each carbon atom
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 33

g. Ethanamine
Answer:
(1) Eth stands for 2 carbon atoms in a chain and the parent alkane is ethane.
– C – C –
(2) ‘amine’ stands for (- NH2) amino group. Show the amino (-NH2) at any carbon atom.
– C – C – NH2
(3) Now satisfy the valencies of each carbon atom
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 34

h. Butanone.
Answer:
(1) But stands for 4 carbon atoms in a chain and the parent alkane is butane. Number the carbon atoms in a chain 1, 2, 3,….
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 35
(2) ‘one’ stands for functional group
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 36
ketone. The number assigned for the ketone group is 2. Show the ketone group at C2.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 37
(3) Now satisfy the valencies of each carbon atom
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 38

Question 8.
a. What causes the existance of very large number of carbon compound?
Answer:
(1) Carbon has a unique ability to form strong covalent bonds with other carbon atoms; this results in formation of big molecules. This property of carbon is called catenation power. The carbon compounds contain open chains or closed chains of carbon atoms. An open chain can be a straight chain or a branched chain. A closed chain is a ring structure. The covalent bond between two carbon atoms is strong and therefore stable. Carbon is bestowed with catenation power due to the strong and stable covalent bonds.

(2) One, two or three covalent bonds can bond together two carbon atoms. These bonds are called single covalent bond, double covalent bond and triple covalent bond respectively. Due to the ability of carbon atoms to form multiple bonds as well as single bonds, the number of carbon compounds increases. For example, there are three compounds, namely, ethane (CH3 – CH3), ethene (CH2 = CH2) and ethyne (CH = CH) which contain two carbon atoms.

(3) Carbon being tetravalent, one carbon atom can form bonds with four other atoms (carbon or any other). This results in formation of many compounds. These compounds possess different properties as per the atoms to which carbon is bonded. For example, five different compounds are formed using one carbon atom and two monovalent elements hydrogen and chlorine: CH4, CH3Cl, CH2Cl2, CHCl3, CCl4. Similarly carbon atoms form covalent bonds with atoms of elements like O, N, S, halogen and P to form different types of carbon compounds in large number.

(4) Isomerism is one more characteristic of carbon compound which is responsible for large number of carbon compounds.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

b. Saturated hydrocarbons are classified into three types. Write these names giving one example each.
Answer:
In hydrocarbon, the four valencies of carbon atom are satisfied only by the single bonds, such compounds are called saturated hydrocarbons. Methane molecule contains only one carbon atom. In methane, four hydrogen atoms are bonded to carbon atom by four covalent bonds.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 39

c. Give any four functional groups containing oxygen as the heteroatom in it. write name and structural formula of one example each.
Answer:

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 40

d. Give names of three functional groups containing three different heteroatoms. Write name and structural formula of one example each.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 41

e. Give names of three natural polymers. write the place of their occurance and names of monomers from which they are formed.
Answer:

  1. Poly saccharide is a natural polymer. It occurs in starch/carbohydrates. It is formed from monomer glucose.
  2. Protein is a natural polymer. It occurs in muscles, hair, enzymes, skin, egg. It is formed from alpha amino acids.
  3. Rubber is a natural polymer. It occurs in latex of rubber tree. It is formed from monomer isoprene.

f. What is meant by vinegar and gasohol? What are their uses?
Answer:
(1) Vinegar is a 5 – 8% aqueous solution of acetic acid. It is used as preservative in pickles. It is used to cook meat. 1t is used as a salad dressing.
(2) To increase the efficiency of petrol, it is mixed with 10% anhydrous ethanol, such a fuel is called gasohol. It is used as a fuel in cars and other vehicles.

g. what is a catalyst ? write any one reaction which is brought about by use of catalyst?
Answer:
Catalyst is a substance, which changes the rate of reaction, without causing any disturbance to it. Vegetable oil (unsaturated compound) undergoes addition reaction with hydrogen in the presence of nickel catalyst to form vanaspati ghee (saturated compound).

Project:
Prepare a chart giving detailed information of carbon compounds in everyday use. Display it in the cluss and discuss.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 110)

Question 1.
What are the types of compounds?
Answer:
Organic and inorganic compounds are the two important types of compounds.

Question 2.
Objects in everyday use such as foodstuff, fibres, paper, medicines, wood, fuels are made of various compounds. Which constituent elements are common in these compounds?
Answer:
The constituent elements common in these compounds are carbon (C), hydrogen (H) and oxygen (O).

Question 3.
To which group in the periodic table does the element carbon belongs? Write down the electronic configuration of carbon and deduce the valency of carbon.
Answer:
The element carbon belongs to group 14 and its electronic configuration is 2, 4. The valency of carbon is 4.

Use your brain Power! (Text Book Page No. 115)

Question 1.
The molecular formula of ethyne is C2H2. From this draw its structural formula and electron-dot structure.
Answer:
Ethyne: Molecular formula: C2H2
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 42

Question 2.
How many bonds have to be there in between the carbon atoms in ethyne so as to satisfy their tetra valency?
Answer:
To satisfy their tetravalency, three double bonds have to be there in between two carbon atoms in ethyne.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 116)

Question 1.
Draw the electron-dot structure of cyclohexane.
Answer:
Cyclohexane: Molecular formula: C6H12
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 43

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 112)

Question 1.
Atomic number of chlorine is 17. What is the number of electrons in the valence shell of the chlorine?
Answer:
There are seven electrons in the valence shell of the chlorine.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 2.
Molecular formula of chlorine is Cl2. Draw electron-dot and line structure of a chlorine molecule.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 44

Question 3.
The molecular formula of water is H2O. Draw electron-dot and line structures for triatomic molecule. (Use dots for electron of oxygen atom and crosses for electrons of hydrogen atoms.)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 45

Question 4.
The molecular formula of ammonia is NH3. Draw electron-dot and line structures for ammonia molecule.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 46

Question 5.
The molecular formula of carbon dioxide is CO2. Draw the electron-dot structure (without showing circle) and line structure for CO2.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 47

Question 6.
With which bond C atom in CO2 is bonded to each of the O atoms ?
Answer:
In CO2, carbon atom is bonded to each of the O atoms by double bond.

Question 7.
The molecular formula of sulfur is S8 in which eight sulphur atoms are bonded to each other to form one ring. Draw electron-dot structure for S8 without showing the circles.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 48
The above S8 molecule of sulphur has crown shaped structure. One molecule of sulpur is made up of eight atoms of sulphur.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 113)

Question 1.
Hydrogen peroxide decomposes of its own by the following reaction:
2H – O – O – H → 2H – O – H + O2
From this, what will be your inference about the strength O – O covalent bond ?
Tell from the above example whether oxygen has catenation power or not.
Answer:
In hydrogen peroxide (H2O2), the O – O covalent bond is not strong as oxygen has no catenation power.

Name Molecular
formula
Condensed Structural formula Number of carbon atoms Number of
-CH2– units
Boiling point ° C
Ethene C2H4 CH2 = CH2 2 0 -102
Propone C3H6 CH3 – CH = CH2 3 1 -48
1-Butene C4H8 CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2 -6.5
1-Pentene C5H10 CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CH = CH2 30

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 120)

Question 1.
The above table shows the homologous series of alkenes. Inspect the molecular formulae of the members of this series. Do you find any relationship, in the number of carbon atoms and the number of hydrogen atoms in the molecular formulae?
Answer:
In the above homologous series, if we observe the molecular formulae of alkenes then the number of carbon atoms are half the number of hydrogen atoms.

Question 2.
If the number of carbon atoms in the molecular formulae of alkenes is denoted by ‘n’ what will be the number of hydrogen atoms?
Answer:
If the number of carbon atoms in the molecular formulae of alkenes is denoted by ‘n’ then the number of hydrogen atoms would be 2n.

Question 3.
What would be the general formula for the molecular formulae of the members of the homologous series of alkanes? What would be the value of ‘n’ for the first member of this series?
Answer:
The general formula for the homologous series of alkane is CnH2n + 2. The value of ‘n’ for the first member of homologous series is 1.
CnH2n+2 = C1H2 × 1 + 2 = CH4

Question 4.
The general molecular formula for the homologous series of alkynes is CnH2n – 2. Write down the individual molecular formulae of the first, second and third members by substituting the values 2, 3 and 4 respectively for ‘n’ in this formula.
Answer:
The general molecular formula for the homologous series of alkynes is CnH2n – 2
n = 2 C2H2 × 2 – 2 = C2H2 Ethyne
n = 3 C3H2 × 3 – 2 = C3H4 Propyne
n = 4 C4H2 × 4 – 2 = C4H6 Butyne

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 5.
Write down structural formulae of the first four members of the various homologous series formed by making use of the functional groups.
Answer:

Functional group Halo – X (Cl, Br, -I) Functional group
Aldehyde – CHO
Functional group
Carboxylic acid – COOH
Functional group
Amine -NH2
CH3Cl
Chloromethane
HCHO
Methanal
HCOOH
Methanoic acid
CH3NH2
Methenamine
CH3 – CH2 – Cl
Chloroethane
CH3CHO
Ethanal
CH3COOH
Ethanoic acid
CH3CH2NH2
Ethanamine
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Cl
1-Chloropropane
CH3CH2CHO
Propanal
CH3CH2COOH
Propanoic acid
CH3CH2CH2NH2
Propanamine
CH3 – CH2 – CH2 CH2 – Cl
1-Chlorobutane
CH3CH2CH2 CHO
Butanal
CH3CH2CH2COOH
Butanoic acid
CH3CH2CH2CH2NH2
Butanamine

Question 6.
General formula of the homologous series of alkanes is CnH2n + 2. Write down the molecular formula of the 8th and 12th member using this.
Answer:
General formula of alkanes is CnH2n + 2
n = 8 C8H2 × 8 + 2 = C6H18 Octane
n = 12 C12H2 × 12 + 2 = C12H26 Dodecane

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 121)

Question 1.
Draw three structural formulae having molecular formula C5H12. Give the names n-pentane, i-pentane and neo-pentane to the above structural formulae.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 49

Question 2.
Draw all possible structural formulae having molecular formula C6H14. Give names to all the isomers.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 50
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 51

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Try This! (Text Book Page No. 124)

Question 1.
Light a bunsen burner. Open and close the air hole at the bottom of the burner by means of the movable ring around it. When do you get yellow sooty flame? When do you get blue flame?
Answer:
When the air hole at the bottom of the burner is open, sufficient oxygen is mixed gaseous fuel for complete combustion and a clean blue flame is obtained. When the air hole is partially blocked by means of the movable ring around it, the air supply is limited which results in incomplete combustion. Hence, yellow sooty flame is produced.

(Text Book Page No. 126)

Question 1.
The names of four fatty acids separated from vegetable oils are given in the table. Identify the number of carbon – carbon double bonds from their structure and molecular formula from the below fatty acids which one when reacts with iodine will make the colour of iodine disappear.
Answer:

Name Molecular Formula Number of C = C double bonds Will it decolorise I2?
Stearic acid C17H35COOH ———————– yes/no
Oleic acid C17H33COOH One double bond yes/no
Plamitic acid C15H31COOH ———————– yes/no
Linoleic acid C17H31COOH Two double bonds yes/no

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 128)

Question 1.
Explain by writing a reaction, what will happen when pieces of sodium metal are put in n-propyl alcohol.
Answer:
n-Propyl alcohol reacts with pieces of sodium metal, sodium propoxide and hydrogen gas are obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 52

Question 2.
Explain by writing a reaction, which product will be formed on heating n-butyl alcohol with concentrated sulphuric acid.
Answer:
When n-butyl alcohol is heated with concentrated sulphuric acid, one molecule of water is removed from its molecule to form 1-butene.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 53

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 129)

Question 1.
Which one of ethanoic acid and hydrochloric acid is stronger?
Answer:
Hydrochloric acid is stronger acid.

Question 2.
Which indicator paper out of blue litmus paper and pH paper is useful to distinguish between ethanoic acid and hydrochloric acid ?
Answer:
pH paper is useful to distinguish between ethanoic acid and hydrochloric acid.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 130)

Question 1.
Explain why does the lime water turns milky in the reaction of acetic acid with sodium carbonate.
Answer:
In the reaction of acetic acid with sodium carbonate, carbon dioxide gas is evolved which turns lime water milky resulting in the formation of insoluble calcium carbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 54

Question 2.
Explain the reaction that would take place when a piece of sodium metal is dropped in ethanoic acid.
Answer:
When a piece of sodium metal is dropped in ethanoic acid, sodium acetate and hydrogen gas is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 55

Question 3.
Two test tubes contain two colourless liquids ethanol and ethanoic acid. Explain by writing reaction which chemical test you would perform to tell which substance is present in which test tube.
Answer:
Ethanol does not react with sodium bicarbonate, while ethanoic acid reacts with sodium bicarbonate to form carbon dioxide gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 56

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 131)

Question 1.
When fat is heated with sodium hydroxide solution, soap and glycerin are formed. Which functional groups might be present in fat and glycerin? What do you think?
Answer:
The functional group carboxylic acid (-COOH) is present in fat whereas the functioned group hydroxyl group (-OH) is present in glycerin.

Can you tell? (Text Book Page No. 131)

Question 1.
What are the chemical names of the nutrients that we get from the foodstuff, namely, cereals, pulses and meat?
Answer:
The nutrients that we get from the foodstuff, namely cereals, pulses and meat are alpha amino acids.

Question 2.
What are the chemical substances that make cloth, furniture and elastic objects?
Answer:
The chemical substances that make cloth, furniture and elastic objects are cellulose and rubber.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 133)

Question 1.
Structural formulae of some monomers are given below. Write the structural formula of the homopolymer formed from them.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 57
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 58

Question 2.
From the given structural formula of polyvinyl acetate, that is used in paints and glues, deduce the name and structural formula of the corresponding monomer.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 59
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 60

(Text Book Page No. 133)

Question 1.
Complete the following table by writing their Structural formulae and Molecular formulae.
Answer:
(Answer is given directly in bold letters.)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 61
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 62

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Fill in the gaps in the table: (Text Book Page No. 119)
(Answer is given directly in bold letters.)
a. Homologous series of alkanes.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 63

b. Homologous series of alcohol.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 64

c. Homologous series of alkenes.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 65

(Text Book Page No. 123)

Question 1.
Complete the table by writing the IUPAC names in the third column.
(Answer is directly given with underline.)
Answer:

Common name Structural formula IUPAC name
Ethylene CH2 = CH2 Ethene
Acetylene HC = CH Ethyne
Acetic acid CH3 -COOH Ethanoic acid
Methyl alcohol CH3 – OH Methanol
Ethyl alcohol CH3 – CH2 – OH Ethanol

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 119)

Question 1.
By how many -CH2– (methylene) units do the formulae of the first two members of homologous series of alkanes, methane (CH4) and ethane (C2H6) differ? Similarly, by how many -CH2– units do the neighbouring members ethane (C2H6) and propane (C3H8) differ from each other?
Answer:
The first two members of homologous series of alkanes, methane (CH4) and ethane (C2H6) differed by one -CH2– unit. Similarly, ethane (C2H6) and propane (C3H8) differed by -CH2– unit.

Question 2.
How many methylene units are extra in the formula of the fourth member than the third member of the homologous series of alcohols?
Answer:
There is only one, methylene unit extra in the formula of the fourth member and the third member of the homologous series of alcohols.

Question 3.
How many methylene units are less in the formula of the second member than the third member of the homologous series of alkenes?
Answer:
There is only one methylene unit less in the formula of the second member of and the third member of the homologous series of alkenes.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Fill in the blanks and rewrite the completed statements:

Question 1.
The organic compounds having double or triple bonds in them are termed as …………
Answer:
The organic compounds having double or triple bonds in them are termed as unsaturated hydrocarbons.

Question 2.
The general formula of alkane is ……………
Answer:
The general formula of alkane is CnH2n + 2.

Question 3.
The compounds of homologous series have the same ………….. group.
Answer:
The compounds of homologous series have the same functional group.

Question 4.
A double bond is formed between carbon atoms by ………… pairs of electrons.
Answer:
A double bond is formed between carbon atoms by two pairs of electrons.

Question 5.
The compounds having different structural formulae having the same molecular formula is called ……….
Answer:
The compounds having different structural formulae having the same molecular formula is called structural isomerism.

Question 6.
The functional group of ether is …………..
Answer:
The functional group of ether is -O-.

Question 7.
The general formula of alkene is …………
Answer:
The general formula of alkene is CnH2n.

Question 8.
The bond between two atoms of nitrogen is a ………… bond.
Answer:
The bond between two atoms of nitrogen is a triple bond.

Question 9.
Benzene ring is made up of ………….. carbon atoms.
Answer:
Benzene ring is made up of six carbon atoms.

Question 10.
Due to …………., vegetable oil is converted into vanaspati ghee.
Answer:
Due to hydrogenation, vegetable oil is converted into vanatspati ghee.

Question 11.
………….. control the heredity at molecular level.
Answer:
Nucleic acids control the heredity at molecular level.

Question 12.
The regular repetition of a small unit is called …………..
Answer:
The regular repetition of a small unit is called polymer.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 13.
The structural formula of polypropylene is ……………….
Answer:
The structural formula of polypropylene is
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 66

Question 14.
The monomers of proteins are ……………..
Answer:
The monomers of proteins are alpha amino acids.

Question 15.
The monomer of cellulose is …………
Answer:
The monomer of cellulose is glucose.

Question 16.
…………. have sweet odour.
Answer:
Esters have sweet odour.

Choose the correct alternative and rewrite the statement:

Question 1.
The property of direct bonding between atoms of the same element to form a chain is called ………..
(a) catenation
(b) isomerism
(c) dehydration
(d) polymerization
Answer:
The property of direct bonding between atoms of the same element to form a chain is called catenation.

Question 2.
The molecular weight of two adjacent members in homologous series of an alkane differ by ………. units.
(a) 16
(b) 20
(c) 14
(d) 12
Answer:
The molecular weight of two adjacent members in homologous series of an alkane differ by 14 units.

Question 3.
Consecutive members of a homologous series differ by ………. group.
(a) -CH
(b) -CH2
(C) -CH3
(d) -CH4
Answer:
Consecutive members of a homologous series differ by CH2 group.

Question 4.
……….. is used to prepare carbon black.
(a) Methane
(b) Ethene
(c) Propane
(d) Butane
Answer:
Methane is used to prepare carbon black.

Question 5.
……….. is the general formula of alkene.
(a) CnH2n
(b) CnH2n + 2
(c) CnH2n – 2
(d) CnHn – 2
Answer:
CnH2n is the general formula of alkene.

Question 6.
The reaction of methane with chlorine in the presence of sunlight is called ………..
(a) pyrolysis
(b) an elimination reaction
(c) a substitution reaction
(d) an addition reaction
Answer:
The reaction of methane with chlorine in the presence of sunlight is called a substitution reaction.

Question 7.
The general formula for alkynes is ………….
(a) CnH2n
(b) CnH2n + 2
(c) CnH2n – 2
(d) CnH2n – 1
Answer:
The general formula for alkynes is CnH2n – 2

Question 8.
The reaction of ………… with ethanol is a fast reaction.
(a) calcium
(b) magnesium
(c) sodium
(d) aluminum
Answer:
The reaction of sodium with ethanol is a fast reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 9.
Ethylene has …………. bond between two carbon atoms.
(a) a single
(b) a double
(c) a triple
(d) an ionic
Answer:
Ethylene has a double bond between two carbon atoms.

Question 10.
The saturated hydrocarbons are those in which carbon atom are linked by ………….
(a) a single bond
(b) a double bond
(c) a triple bond
(d) an ionic bond
Answer:
The saturated hydrocarbons are those in which carbon atom are linked by a single bond.

Question 11.
C7H16 is ………….
(a) hexane
(b) octane
(c) methane
(d) heptane
Answer:
C7H16 is heptane.

Question 12.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 67
(a) carboxylic acid group
(b) aldehyde group
(c) ketonic group
(d) alcohol group
Answer:
(a) carboxylic acid group

Question 13.
The possible isomers for C5H12 are ……………
(a) 2
(b) 4
(c) 1
(d) 3
Answer:
The possible isomers for C5H12 are 3.

Question 14.
………. contains alcoholic functional group.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 68
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 15.
Oxygen molecule has ………… bond between two oxygen atoms.
(a) a double
(b) a single
(c) a triple
(d) an ionic
Answer:
Oxygen molecule has a double bond between two oxygen atoms.

Question 16.
Some acetic acid is treated with solid NaHCO3. The resulting solution will be ………..
(a) colourless
(b) blue
(c) green
(d) yellow
Answer:
Some acetic acid is treated with solid NaHCO3. The resulting solution will be colourless.

Question 17.
Ethanoic acid has a ……… odour.
(a) rotten eggs
(b) pungent
(c) mild
(d) vinegar-like
Answer:
Ethanoic acid has a vinegar-like odour.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 18.
Acetic acid ………..
(a) turns red litmus blue
(b) has pungent odour
(c) is red in colour
(d) is odourless
Answer:
Acetic acid has pungent odour.

Question 19.
When acetic acid reacts with sodium metal ……….. gas is formed.
(a) oxygen
(b) hydrogen
(c) chlorine
(d) nitrogen
Answer:
When acetic acid reacts with sodium metal hydrogen gas is formed.

Question 20.
The molecular formula of acetic acid (ethanoic acid) is …………
(a) HCOOH
(b) CH3COOH
(c) C2H5COOH
(d) C3H7COOH
Answer:
The molecular formula of acetic acid (ethanoic acid) is CH3COOH.

Question 21.
When sodium bicarbonate solution is added to dilute acetic acid …………
(a) a gas is evolved
(b) a solid settles at the bottom
(c) the mixture becomes warm
(d) the colour of the mixture becomes yellow
Answer:
When sodium bicarbonate solution is added to dilute acetic acid a gas-is evolved.

Question 22.
2 ml of ethanoic acid was taken in each of test tubes A, B, C and 2 ml, 4 ml, 6 ml of water was added respectively to them. A clear solution is obtained in ………..
(a) test tube A
(b) test tube B
(c) test tube C
(d) all the test tubes
Answer:
2 ml of ethanoic acid was taken in each of test tubes A, B, C and 2 ml, 4 ml, 6 ml of water was added respectively to them. A clear solution is obtained in all the test tubes.

Question 23.
In the presence of acid catalyst, ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol and ……….. ester is produced.
(a) ethanol
(b) ethanoic
(c) ethyl ethanoate
(d) ethyl ethanol (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Answer:
In the presence of acid catalyst, ethanoic acid reacts with ethanol and ethyl ethanoate ester is produced.

Question 24.
The following structural formula belongs to which carbon compound?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 69
(a) Camphor
(b) Benzene
(c) Starch
(d) Glucose (Practical activity sheet- 2)
Answer:
(b) Benzene

Question 25.
What type of reaction is shown below?
\(\mathrm{CH}_{4}+\mathrm{Cl}_{2} \stackrel{\text { Sunlight }}{\longrightarrow} \mathrm{CH}_{3}-\mathrm{Cl}+\mathrm{HCl}\)
(a) Addition
(b) Substitution
(c) Decomposition
(d) Reduction (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Answer:
(b) substitution

Question 26.
The carbon compound is used in daily life is ………..
(a) edible oil
(b) salt
(c) carbon dioxide
(d) baking soda (March 2019)
Answer:
The carbon compound is used in daily life is edible oil

State whether the following statements are true or false. (If a statement is false, correct it and rewrite it.):

Question 1.
Generally the melting and boiling points of carbon compounds are high.
Answer:
False. (Generally the melting and boiling points of carbon compounds are low.)

Question 2.
Till now the number of known carbon compounds is about 10 million.
Answer:
True.

Question 3.
Unsaturated hydrocarbons are less reactive than saturated hydrocarbons.
Answer:
False. (Unsatured hydrocarbons are more reactive than saturated hydrocarbons.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 4.
Benzene is an aromatic compound.
Answer:
True.

Question 5.
The carbon-carbon double and triple bonds are also recognised as functional groups.
Answer:
True.

Question 6.
The general formula of alkyne is CnH2n.
Answer:
False. (The general formula of alkyne is CnH2n – 2)

Question 7.
Naphthalene burns with a yellow flame.
Answer:
True.

Question 8.
When vegetable oil and tincture iodine react, the color of iodine does not change.
Answer:
False. (When vegetable oil and tincture iodine react, the colour of iodine changes.)

Question 9.
Saturated fats are healthy.
Answer:
False. (Saturated fats are harmful to health.)

Question 10.
Aqueous solution of ethanol is found to be neutral.
Answer:
True.

Question 11.
Denatured ethanol is used as industrial solvent.
Answer:
True.

Question 12.
Vinegar is a 12-15 % aqueous solution of acetic acid.
Answer:
False. (Vinegar is a 5-8 % aqueous solution of acetic acid.)

Question 13.
The functional group of ethanoic acid is a carboxylic group.
Answer:
True.

Question 14.
Sodium hydroxide is used in the preparation of soap from fats and oils.
Answer:
True.

Question 15.
Rubber is a manmade macromolecule.
Answer:
False. (Rubber is a natural macromolecule.)

Question 16.
Polyvinyl chloride is used in the manufacture of P.V.C. pipes and bags.
Answer:
True.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 17.
Polyethylene is a homopolymer.
Answer:
True.

Question 18.
The chemical bonds in carbon compounds do not produce ions.
Answer:
True.

Find the odd one out:

Question 1.
Propane, methane, ethene, pentane
Answer:
Ethene. (Others are saturated hydrocarbons.)

Question 2.
Methane, butane, benzene, sodium chloride
Answer:
Sodium chloride. (Others are organic compounds.)

Question 3.
CH4, C2H6, C3H8, CaCO3
Answer:
CaCO3. (Others are organic compounds.)

Question 4.
C2H2, C3H8, C2H6, CH4
Answer:
C2H2. (Others are saturated hydrocarbons.)

Question 5.
C2H4, C4H10, C3H8, CH4
Answer:
C2H4. (Others are saturated hydrocarbons.)

Question 6.
Polyethylene, Polysaccharide, Polystyrene, Polypropylene
Answer:
Polysaccharide (Others are manmade polymers.)

Question 7.
-NH2, -COOH,-SO4, -Br
Answer:
-SO4 (Others are functional groups.)

Question 8.
Methane, Ethane, Propene, Propane, Butane
Answer:
Propene (Others are members of homologous series of alkanes.)

Match the columns:

Question 1.

Column I Column II
(1) CH4 (a) CH2 = CH2
(2) Ethane (b) CnH2n – 2
(3) Alkene (c) Methane
(4) Alkyne (d) C2H6
(e) C3H8

Answer:
(1) CH4 – Methane
(2) Ethane – C2H6
(3) Alkene – CH2 = CH2
(4) Alkyne – CnH2n – 2.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 2.

Column I Column II
(1) Aromatic hydrocarbon (a) Propyne
(2) Alkane (b) Benzene
(3) Alkyne (c) Saturated hydrocarbon
(4) Alkene (d) CnH2n
(e) C n H2n – 1 OH

Answer:
(1) Aromatic hydrocarbon – Benzene
(2) Alkane – Saturated hydrocarbon
(3) Alkyne – Propyne
(4) Alkene – CnH2n.

Question 3.

Column I Column II
(1) Cyclohexane (a) CH3COOH
(2) Methanol (b) CH3Cl
(3) Acetaldehyde (c) CH2Cl2
(4) Ethanoic acid (d) CH3OH
(e) C6H12
(f) CH3CHO

Answer:
(1) Cyclohexane – C6H12
(2) Methanol – CH3OH
(3) Acetaldehyde – CH3CHO
(4) Ethanoic acid – CH3COOH.

Question 4.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 70
Answer:
(1) (-OH) – Alcohol
(2) (-COOH) – Carboxylic acid
(3) (-CHO) – Aldehyde
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 71

Question 5.

Column I Column II
(1) Ethyne (a) C2H6
(2) Ethene (b) C2H2
(3) Ethane (c) C3H6
(4) Propyne (d) C2H4
(e) C3H4

Answer:
(1) Ethyne – C2H2
(2) Ethene – C2H4
(3) Ethane – C2H6
(4) Propyne – C3H4.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 6.

Column I Column II
(1) Cellulose (a) P.V.C. pipes, bags
(2) R.N.A (b) Blankets
(3) Polyacrylonitrile (c) Wood
(4) Polyvinyl chloride (d) Chromosomes of plants

Answer:
(1) Cellulose – Wood
(2) R.N.A. – Chromosomes of plants
(3) Polyacrylonitrile – Blankets
(4) Polyvinyl chloride – P.V.C. pipes, bags.

Consider the relation between Column I and II. Fill in Column IV to match Column III.

Column I Column II Column III Column IV
(1) Ethylene Polyethylene Tetrafluoroethylene —————–
(2) Poly­propylene Propylene Polystyrene —————–
(3) Poly­saccharide Glucose Proteins —————–
(4) Rubber Isoprene D.N.A. —————–
(5) Wood Cellulose Chromosomes of plants —————–

Answer:
(1) Teflon
(2) Styrene
(3) Alpha aminoacid
(4) Nucleotide
(5) R.N.A.

Define the following:

Question 1.
Define Alkane
Answer:
Alkane: In hydrocarbon, the four valencies of carbon atom are satisfied only by the single bonds, such compounds are called alkane.
Example: Methane (CH4), Ethane (C2H6)

Question 2.
Define Alkene.
Answer:
Alkene: The unsaturated hydrocarbons containing a carbon-carbon double bond are called alkenes.
Example : Ethene (CH2 = CH2)

Question 3.
Define Alkyne.
Answer:
Alkyne: The unsaturated hydrocarbons containing a carbon-carbon triple bond are called alkynes.
Example: Ethyne C2H2 (CH ≡ CH).

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 4.
Define Addition reaction.
Answer:
Addition reaction: When a carbon compound combines with another compound to form a product that contains all the atoms in both the reactants; it is called an addition reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 72

Question 5.
Define Substitution reaction.
Answer:
Substitution reaction: The reaction in which the place of one type of atom/group in a reactant is taken by another atom/group of atoms, is called substitution reaction.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 73

Question 6.
Define Esterification.
Answer:
Esterification: A carboxylic acid reacts with an alcohol in presence of an acid catalyst, an ester is formed. The reaction is known as esterification.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 74

Question 7.
Define Saponification.
Answer:
Saponification: When an ester reacts with the alkali, i.e. sodium hydroxide, the corresponding alcohol and sodium salt of carboxylic acid are obtained. This reaction is called saponification reaction. It is used in the preparation of soap.
Ester + Sodium hydroxide → Sodium salt of carboxylic acid + Alcohol.

Question 8.
Define Polymerization.
Answer:
Polymerization: The reaction by which monomer molecules are converted into a polymer is called polymerization.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 75

Name the following:

Question 1.
The higher homologue of hexane.
Answer:
Keptane.

Question 2.
The number of double bonds in benzene.
Answer:
Three.

Question 3.
The functional group in ether and halogen.
Answer:
Functional groups:
Ether: – O –
Halogen: – X (-Cl, -Br, -I).

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 4.
Polymer of tetrafluoroethylene.
Answer:
Teflon.

Question 5.
The monomer of polysaccharide.
Answer:
Glucose.

Question 6.
The Polymer of nucleotide.
Answer:
D.N.A./R.N.A.

Question 7.
The Monomer of rubber.
Answer:
Isoprene.

Question 8.
Two oxidising compounds.
Answer:
Potassium permanganate, Potassium dichromate.

Question 9.
IUPAC name of sodium acetate.
Answer:
Sodium ethanoate.

Question 10.
The main component of natural gas.
Answer:
Methane.

Question 11.
Two isomers of butane.
Answer:
n-butane and i-butane.

Question 12.
A nomenclature system based on the structure of the compounds and it was accepted all over the world.
Answer:
International Union of Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC).

Answer the following questions in one sentence each:

Question 1.
State the atomic number and electronic configuration of carbon.
Answer:
The atomic number of carbon is 6 and the electronic configuration of carbon is (2, 4).

Question 2.
State number of electrons in the outermost orbit of carbon and valency of carbon.
Answer:
Four electrons are present in the outermost orbit of carbon and the valency of carbon is 4.

Question 3.
What are hydrocarbons? Give one example.
Answer:
The compounds containing only carbon and hydrogen are called hydrocarbons. These compounds are known as organic compounds. E.g. Methane, Ethane.

Question 4.
What is the molecular formula and structural of methane?
Answer:
The molecular formula of methane is CH4.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 76

Question 5.
How many atoms of carbon and hydrogen are present in methane?
Answer:
The molecule of methane has one carbon atom and four hydrogen atoms.

Question 6.
State the general formula of alkane.
Answer:
The general formula of an alkane is CnH2n + 2.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 7.
Give two examples of alkanes.
Answer:
Methane (CH4) and ethane (C2H6) are alkanes.

Question 8.
Give two examples of alkenes.
Answer:
Ethene (CH2 = CH2) and propene (CH3 – CH = CH2) are alkenes.

Question 9.
Give two examples of alkynes.
Answer:
Ethyne (HC ≡ CH) and propyne (CH3 – C ≡ CH) are alkynes.

Question 10.
Write the name and molecular formula of a higher homologue of propane.
Answer:
Butane (C4H10) is a higher homologue of propane.

Question 11.
Write the structure and molecular formula of ethane.
Answer:
Structure of ethane:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 77
Molecular formula of ethane: C2H6

Question 12.
What is meant by catenation power?
Answer:
Carbon has a unique ability to form strong covalent bonds with other carbon atoms, this result in formation of big molecules. This property of carbon is called catenation power.

Question 13.
State the structural and molecular formula of benzene.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 78

Question 14.
Which functional groups are present in aldehyde and ketone?
Answer:
The functional group -CHO is present in aldehyde and the functional group
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 79
is present in ketone.

Question 15.
Which functional group is present in
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 80
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 81

Question 16.
Compare: The proportions of carbon atoms in ethanol (C2H5OH) and naphthalene (C10H8).
Answer:
Ethanol contains two carbon atoms while naphthalene contains 10 carbon atoms. Ethanol is a saturated hydrocarbon and naphthalene is an unsaturated hydrocarbon.

Question 17.
What are the products of combustion of methane?
Answer:
Carbon dioxide (CO2) and water (H2O) are the products of combustion of methane.

Question 18.
Which gas is evolved when ethanol reacts with sodium?
Answer:
Hydrogen gas (H2) is evolved when ethanol reacts with sodium.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 19.
Compare: How is the transformation of ethanol into ethanoic acid on oxidation reaction?
Answer:
The transformation of ethanol into ethanoic acid is an oxidation process, in which ethanol accepts oxygen.

Question 20.
Complete the following:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 82
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 83

Question 21.
Which of the following hydrocarbons undergo addition reactions:
C2H6, C3H8, C2H4, C3H8?
Answer:
C2H4 (ethene) and C3H6 (propene) undergo addition reactions.

Question 22.
How many covalent bonds are there in a molecule of cyclohexane?
Answer:
A molecule of cyclohexane contains 18 covalent bonds.

Question 23.
Give the IUPAC name for CH3COOH.
Answer:
The IUPAC name for CH3COOH is ethanoic acid.

Question 24.
Write the IUPAC name of CH3COONa.
Answer:
IUPAC name of CH3COONa is sodium ethanoate.

Question 25.
What is meant by denatured alcohol?
Answer:
Ethanol is the important commercial solvent. To prevent the misuse of this solvent, it is mixed with the poisonous methanol. Such ethanol is called denatured spirit.

Question 26.
What is meant by glacial acetic acid ?
Answer:
The melting point of pure acetic acid is 17 °C. Therefore, during winter in old countries acetic acid freezes at room temperature itself and looks like ice. Therefore it is named glacial acetic acid.

Question 26.
Which useful components of hydro¬carbon are obtained by fractional distillation of crude oil?
Answer:
Various useful components of hydrocarbon such as CNG, LPG, petrol (gasoline), rockel, diesel, engine oil, lubricant, etc. are obtained by separation of crude oil using fractional distillation.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 28.
Which functional groups are present in ester and amine?
Answer:
Ester: -COO-
Amine: -NH2

Question 29.
Give two examples of natural macromolecules.
Answer:
Examples: Polysaccharide, protein and nucleic acid.

Question 30.
Write the structure of polystyrene and give its uses.
Answer:
Structure:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 84
Polystyrene is used to make thermocoal articles.

Question 31.
Write the name and the structure of monomer of polyacrylonitrile.
Answer:
The name and structure of monomer: Acrylonitrile CH2 = CH – CN

Question 32.
Write the name and the structure of monomer of teflon and its uses.
Answer:
The name and structure of monomer: Tetrafluro ethylene CF2 = CF2
Teflon is used to make nonstick cookware.

Question 33.
What is meant by copolymers?
Answer:
The polymers formed from two or more monomers are called copolymers.
Examples: Poly ethylene terephthalate.

Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
How is hydrogen molecule formed?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 85
The atomic number of hydrogen is 1, its atom contains 1 electron in K shell. It requires one more electron to complete the K shell and attain the configuration of helium (He). To meet this requirement two hydrogen atoms share their electrons with each other to form H2 molecule. One covalent bond, i.e. a single bond is formed between two hydrogen atoms by sharing of two electrons.

Question 2.
Describe the formation of oxygen molecule (O2).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 86
(1) The atomic number of oxygen is 8. The electronic configuration of oxygen is (2, 6). Oxygen has 6 electrons in the outermost shell.
(2) It requires 2 electrons to complete the L shell and attain the configuration of neon (Ne).
(3) Each oxygen atom shares its valence electron with the valence electron of another oxygen atom to give two shared pairs of electrons which results in the formation of oxygen molecule.
(4) Thus, two electron pairs are shared between two oxygen atoms, forming double covalent bond (=).

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 3.
Describe the formation of nitrogen molecule.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 87
(1) The atomic number of nitrogen is 7. The electronic configuration of nitrogen is (2, 5). Nitrogen has 5 electrons in the outermost shell.
(2) It requires three more electrons to complete the L shell and attain the configuration of neon (Ne).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 88
(3) Two nitrogen atoms come close together and share three pairs of electrons with each other, resulting in the formation of a triple bond.
(4) Thus, two nitrogen atoms are bound with a triple bond (=) to form a nitrogen molecule.

Question 4.
How is the methane molecule formed?
Answer:
(1) The electronic configuration of carbon is (2, 4). Carbon has four electrons in the outermost shell, hence it is tetravalent.
(2) The electronic configuration of hydrogen is 1, hence it is monovalent.
(3) Carbon needs four electrons to complete the L shell and attain the configuration of neon (Ne).
(4) Four atoms of hydrogen share 1 electron each with 4 electrons of carbon.
(5) A single covalent bond is formed by sharing of two electrons.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 89
Thus, the methane molecule contains four single bonds between the carbon and hydrogen atoms.

Question 5.
State the various compounds and its formulae formed by a single atom of carbon with monovalent hydrogen and chlorine.
Answer:

Compounds Names
CH4 Methane
CH3Cl Methyl chloride
CH2Cl2 Methylene dichloride
CHCl3 Methylene trichloride
CCl4 Carbon tetrachloride

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 6.
Observe the straight chain hydrocarbons given below and answer the following questions:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 90
(i) Which of the straight chain compounds from A and B is saturated and unsaturated straight chains?
(ii) Name these straight chains.
(iii) Write their chemical formulae and number of -CH2 units. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
(i) A is a saturated hydrocarbon, B is an unsaturated hydrocarbon.
(ii) A = Propane, B = Propene
(iii) The chemical formula of A = C3H8 and number of -CH2 units are 3.
The chemical formula of B = C3H6 and number of -CH2 unit is 1.

Question 7.
Draw electron-dot and line structure of an ethane molecule.
Answer:
The molecular formula of ethane is C2H6.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 91

Question 8.
The molecular formula of propane is C3H8. From this draw its structural formula. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Answer:
The structural formula of propane:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 92

Question 9.
Draw the structure and carbon skeleton for cyclohexane.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 93

Question 10.
Classify into saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbons: (1) Methane (2) Ethene (3) Ethane (4) Ethyne (5) Propene (6) Propyne (7) Butane (8) Cyclohexene (9) Cyclopentane (10) Heptane.
Answer:
(i) Saturated hydrocarbons: (1) Methane (2) Ethane (3) Butane (4) Cyclopentane (5) Heptane.
(ii) Unsaturated hydrocarbons: (1) Ethene (2) Ethyne (3) Propene (4) Propyne (5) Cyclohexene.

Question 11.
Classify into alkanes, alkenes and alkynes: (1) Ethane (2) Ethene (3) Methane (4) Propene (5) Ethyne (6) Propyne (7) Butane (8) Pentane.
Answer:
Alkanes: (1) Ethane (2) Methane (3) Butane. (4) Pentane
Alkenes: (1) Ethene (2) Propene
Alkynes: (1) Ethyne (2) Propyne

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 12.
Classify into straight chain carbon compounds, branched chain carbon compounds and ring carbon compounds:
(1) Propene (2) Butane (3) Iso-butane (4) Cyclopentane (5) Benzene (6) Isobutylene.
Answer:
Straight chain carbon compounds:

  1. Propene
  2. Butane.

Branched chain carbon compounds:

  1. Iso-butane
  2. Isobutylene.

Ring carbon compounds:

  1. Cyclopentane
  2. Benzene.

Question 13.
Draw chain and ring structures of organic compound having six carbon atoms in it.
Answer:
Chain structures of an organic compound having six carbon atoms:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 94
Ring structures of an organic compound having six carbon atoms:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 95

Question 14.
Explain the structure of benzene.
Answer:
The molecular formula of benzene is C6H6. It is a cyclic unsaturated hydrocarbon. Benzene ring is made of six carbon atoms. In benzene, each carbon atom is linked to two other carbon atoms, on one side by a single bond and on the other side by a double bond, i.e. three alternate single bonds and double bonds in the six membered ring structure of benzene. The compound having this characteristic unit in their structure are called aromatic compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 96

Question 15.
Draw the structures of isomers of pentane (C5H12).
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 97

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 16.
Recognize the carbon chain type for each of the following:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 98
(Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Answer:
In the reaction of acetic acid with sodium carbonate, carbon dioxide gas is evolved which turns lime water milky resulting in the formation of insoluble calcium carbonate.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 99

Question 17.
What is meant by functional group? Give examples.
(OR)
Explain the term functional group with example.
Answer:
The compound acquire specific chemical properties due to these hetero atoms or the groups of atoms that contain hetero atoms, irrespective of length and nature of the carbon chain in that compound. Therefore these hetero atoms or groups of atoms containing hetero atoms are called the functional groups.
Example: Methyl alcohol, acetic acid.

In methane (CH4), when one hydrogen atom is replaced by an -OH group, methyl alcohol (CH3OH), is formed. The -OH is known as the alcoholic functional group.
Similarly, from methane (CH4) when one hydrogen atom is replaced by -COOH group, acetic acid (CH3COOH) is formed. The -COOH group is known as the carboxylic acid functional group.

Question 18.
Define functional group and complete the following table:

Functional group Compound Formula
——————– Ethyl alcohol ——————–
——————– Acetaldehyde ——————–

Answer:
The compound acquire specific chemical properties due to these hetero atoms or the groups of atoms that contain hetero atoms, irrespective of length and nature of the carbon chain in that compound. Therefore these hetero atoms or groups of atoms containing hetero atoms are called the
functional groups.

Functional group Compound Formula
-OH Ethyl alcohol C2H5OH
-CHO Acetaldehyde CH3CHO

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 19.
What is meant by homologous series?
Answer:
The length of the carbon chains in carbon compounds is different their chemical properties are very much similar due to the presence of the same functional group in them. The series of compounds formed by joining the same functional group in place of a particular hydrogen atom on the chains having sequentially increasing length is called homologous series. Two adjacent members of the series differ by only one -CH2– (methylene) unit and their mass differ by 14 units.

The homologous series of straight chain alkanes can be represented by the general formula CnH2n + 2. The members of this series are as follows:

Methane – CH4
Ethane – C2H6
– These differ by – CH2 units
Ethane – C2H6
Propane – C3H8
– These differ by – CH2 units
Butane – C4H10
Pentane – C5H12
– These differ by – CH2 units

Question 20.
State the four characteristics of homologous series.
Answer:
Characteristics of Homologous series:
(1) In homologous series while going in an increasing order of the length of carbon chain
(a) one methylene unit ( -CH2– ) gets added
(b) molecular mass increases by 14 u (c) number of carbon atoms increases by one.
(2) Chemical properties of members of a homologous series show similarity due to the presence of the same functional group in them.
(3) Each member of the homologous series can be represented by the same general molecular formula.
(4) While going in an increasing order of the length there is gradation in the physical properties i.e. the boiling and melting points.

Question 21.
Write names of first four homologous series of alcohols: (March 2019)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 100
Answer:
First four homologous series of alcohols are

  1. Methanol CH3 – OH
  2. Ethanol C2H5 – OH
  3. Propanol C3H7 – OH
  4. Butanol C4H9 – OH

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 22.
Describe the IUPAC rules of naming organic compounds.
Answer:
IUPAC nomenclature system: International Union for Pure and Applied Chemistry (IUPAC) put forth a nomenclature system based on the structure of the compounds and it was accepted all over the world. There are three units in the IUPAC name of any carbon compound: parent, suffix and prefix. These are arranged in the name as follows:

Prefix-parent-suffix:
An IUPAC name is given to a compound on the basis of the name of its parent alkane. The name of the compound is constructed by attaching appropriate suffix and prefix to the name of the parent-alkane. The steps in the IUPAC nomenclature of straight chain compounds are as follows:

Step 1: Draw the structural formula of the straight chain compound and count the number of carbon atoms in it. The alkane with the same number of carbon atoms is the parent alkane of the concerned compound. Write the name of this alkane.

In case the carbon chain of concerned compound contains a double bond, change the ending of the parent name from ‘ane’ to ‘ene’. If the carbon chain in the concerned compound contains a triple bond, change the ending of the parent name from ‘ane’ to ‘yne’.

Sr. No.

Structural formula Straight chain

Parent name

1. CH3 – CH2 – CH3 C – C – C propane
2. CH3 – CH2 – OH C – C ethane
3. CH3 – CH2 – COOH C – C – C propane
4. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CHO C – C – C – C butane
5. CH3 – CH = CH2 C – C = C propene
6. CH3 – C ≡ CH C – C ≡ C propyne

Step 2: If the structural formula contains a functional group, replace the last letter ‘e’ from the parent name by the condensed name of the functional group as the suffix. (Exception: The condensed name of the functional group ‘halogen’ is always attached as the prefix.)

Step 3: Number the carbon atoms in the carbon chain from one end to the other. Assign the number T to carbon in the functional group -CHO or -COOH, if present. Otherwise, the chain can be numbered in two directions. Accept that numbering which gives smaller number to the carbon carrying the functional group. In the final name, a digit (number) and a character (letter) should be separated by a small horizontal line.

Question 23.
Write the IUPAC names of the following structural formulae.
a. CH3 – CH2 – CH = CH2
Answer:
Number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 4
Parent alkane: Butene
Functional group: double bond
Assign the number:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 101

In the longest chain, the numbering of carbon atom starts from the carbon atom nearest to the double bond and the other c-atoms are numbered accordingly.
Parent suffix: But-1-ene
IUPAC name: But-1-ene

b. CH3 – C ≡ C – H
Answer:
Number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 3
Parent alkane: Propyne
Functional group: triple bond
Parent suffix: Propyne
IUPAC name: Propyne

c.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 102
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 5
Parent alkane: Pentane
Prefix functional group: Chloro
Assign the number: 2
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 103
The carbon atom to which the -Cl atom is attached is numbered as C2 and the other C atoms are numbered accordingly.
Prefix parent: 2-Chloropentane
IUPAC name: 2-Chloropentane

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

d. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – Br
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 3
Parent alkane : Propane Prefix functional group: Bromo
Assign the number:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 104
The carbon atom to which the -Br atom is attached is numbered as C1 and the other C atoms are numbered accordingly.
Prefix parent: 1-Bromopropane
IUPAC name: 1-Bromopropane

e.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 105
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 4
Parent alkane: Butane Functional group: -OH (ol)
Assign the number:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 106
The carbon atom to which the -OH group is attached is numbered as C2.
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -OH group, then change the ending ‘e’ of the parent name, i.e. ,‘e’ of butane is replaced by ‘ol’ (ol for alcohol).
Parent suffix: Butan-2-ol
IUPAC name: Butan-2-ol

f.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 107
The number of carbon atoms: 3
Parent alkane: Propane
Functional group: -NH2 (amine)
Assign the number:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 108
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -NH2 group then change the ending of the parent name, i.e. ‘e’ of propane is replaced by ‘amine’.
Parent suffix: 2-Propanamine
IUPAC name: 2-Propanamine

g. HCOOH
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms: 1
Parent alkane: Methane
Functional group: -COOH (-oic cid)
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -COOH group, then change the ending of the parent name, i.e. ‘e’ of methane is replaced by ‘-oic acid’.
Parent suffix: Methanoic acid
IUPAC name: Methanoic acid

h. CH3 – CH2 – CH2 – CHO
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 4
Parent alkane : Butane Functional group: -CHO (al)
Assign the number: 1
Assign the number ‘1’ to carbon in the functional group
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 109
If the carbon chain of the compound contains a -CHO group then change the ending of the parent name, i.e. ‘e’ of the butane is replaced by ‘al’.
Parent suffix: Butanal
IUPAC name: Butanal

i.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 110
Answer:
The number of carbon atoms in the longest chain: 5
Parent alkane: Pentane
Functional group:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 111
Assign the numbering:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 112
In the longest chain, the numbering of carbon atom starts from the carbon nearest to the functional group (both the numbering equivalent).
If the carbon chain of compound contains a
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 113
group, then change the ending of the parent name i.e. ‘e’ of pentane is replaced by ‘one’.
Parent suffix: Pentan-3-one
IUPAC name: Pentan-3-one.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 24.
What happens when methane is burnt in air? Write the balanced chemical equation for the same.
Answer:
When methane burns in air, carbon dioxide and water are formed. The reaction is exothermic with release of large amount of heat and light.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 114

Question 25.
What happens when ethanol is burnt in air?
Answer:
When ethanol is burnt in air, it burns with a clean blue flame, carbon dioxide and water are formed. In this reaction, release of large amount of heat and light takes place.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 115

Question 26.
What happens when ethanol is treated with alkaline potassium permanganate? Write the balanced chemical equation for the same.
Answer:
When ethanol is treated with alkaline potassium permanganate, ethanol gets oxidised by alkaline potassium permanganate to’ form ethanoic acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 116

Question 27.
What happens when vegetable oil is hydrogenated? Write the balanced chemical equation.
Answer:
When vegetable oil (unsaturated compound) is hydrogenated in the presence of nickel catalyst, vanaspati ghee (saturated) compound is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 117

Question 28.
What happens when chlorine is treated with methane?
(OR)
Describe the action of chlorine on methane.
(OR)
Write a note on chlorination of methane.
Answer:
Methane reacts rapidly with chlorine in the presence of sunlight to form four products. In this reaction, chlorine atoms replace, one by one, all the hydrogen atoms in the methane.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 118
The reaction in which the place of one type of atom/group in a reactant is taken by another atom/group of atoms is called substitution reaction. Chlorination of methane is a substitution reaction.

Question 29.
What happens when ethanol is reacted with sodium?
Answer:
When ethanol is reacted with sodium at room temperature, sodium ethoxide is formed and hydrogen gas is liberated.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 119

Question 30.
What happens when ethanol is heated at 170 °C with excess of conc. sulphuric acid?
Answer:
When ethanol is heated at 170 °C with excess of conc. sulphuric acid, one molecule of water is removed from its molecule to form ethene (unsaturated compound).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 120

Question 31.
What happens when ethanoic acid is treated with sodium hydroxide? Write the balanced equation for the same.
Answer:
When ethanoic acid is treated with sodium hydroxide, neutralization takes place to form sodium acetate (sodium ethanoate) and water.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 121

Question 32.
What happens when ethanoic acid is treated with sodium carbonate?
Answer:
When ethanoic acid is treated with sodium carbonate, sodium ethanoate, carbon dioxide and water is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 112

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 33.
What happens when ethanoic acid is treated with sodium bicarbonate?
Answer:
When ethanoic acid is treated with sodium bicarbonate, sodium ethanoate, water and carbon dioxide is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 123

Question 34.
What happens when ethanoic acid is treated with ethanol? Write the balanced equation for the same.
Answer:
When ethanoic acid is treated with ethanol in the presence of an acid catalyst, an ester, i.e., ethyl ethanoate is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 124

Question 35.
What happens when ethylene gas is heated at high pressure and high temperature in the presence of suitable catalyst?
Ans. When ethylene gas is heated at high pressure and high temperature in the presence of suitable catalyst, it polymerizes to form polyethylene or polythene (plastic).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 125

Question 36.
State the physical properties of ethyl alcohol ethanol.
Answer:

  1. Ethanol is a colourless liquid and it is soluble in water in all proportions and has pleasant odour.
  2. The boiling point of ethanol is 78 °C and the freezing point is -114 °C.
  3. It is combustible and burns with a blue flame.
  4. An aqueous solution of ethanol is neutral to litmus paper.

Question 37.
State the properties of ethanoic acid.
Answer:

  1. Ethanoic acid is a colourless liquid with boiling point 118 °C and melting point 17 °C. It has a pungent odour.
  2. Its aqueous solution is acidic and turns blue litmus red.
  3. A 5-8% aqueous solution of acetic acid is used as vinegar.
  4. It is a weak acid.

Write short notes:

Question 1.
Catenation power.
Answer:
(1) Carbon has a unique ability to form strong covalent bonds with other carbon atoms; this results in formation of big molecules. This property of carbon is called catenation power.

(2) Carbon shows catenation. Two or more carbon atoms can share their valence electrons and bond with each other. Thus, carbon chains can be straight or branched or closed chain ring structure forming large molecules. The covalent bond between two carbon atoms is strong and therefore stable. Carbon is bestowed with catenation power due to the strong and stable covalent bonds.

(3) Hence, carbon atoms can form an unlimited number of compounds.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 126

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 2.
Characteristics of Carbon.
Answer:
(1) Carbon has a unique ability to form strong covalent bonds with other carbon atoms: this results in formation of big molecules. This property of carbon is called catenation power. The carbon compounds contain open chains or closed chains of carbon atoms. An open chain can be a straight chain or a branched chain. A closed chain is a ring structure. The covalent bond between two carbon atoms is strong and therefore stable. Carbon is bestowed with catenation power due to the strong and stable covalent bonds.

Question 3.
Functional group.
Answer:
(1) The compound acquire specific chemical properties due to these hetero atoms or the groups of atoms that contain hetero atoms, irrespective of the length and nature of the carbon chain in that compound. Therefore these hetero atoms or the groups of atoms containing hetero atoms are called functional groups.

All organic compounds are derivatives of hydrocarbons. The derivatives are formed by replacing one or more H-atom/atoms of hydrocarbon by some other hetero atom or groups of atoms containing hetero atoms. After replacement, a new compound is formed which has properties different from the parent hydrocarbon.

Examples: For methane, if one hydrogen atom is replaced by an – OH group, then a compound is methyl alcohol (CH3OH). The -OH group is known as the alcoholic functional group.
Functional group is organic compound:
1. Alcohol: – OH (hydroxy group)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 127
4. Carboxylic acid : -COOH

Question 4.
Homologous series.
Answer:
The length of the carbon chains in carbon compounds is different their chemical properties are very much similar due to the presence of the same functional group in them. The series of compounds formed by joining the same functional group in place of a particular hydrogen atom on the chains having sequentially increasing length is called homologous series. Two adjacent members of the series differ by only one -CH2– (methylene) unit and their mass differ by 14 units.

The homologous series of straight chain alkanes can be represented by the general formula CnH2n + 2
The members of this series are as follows:

Methane – CH4
Ethane – C2H6
– These differ by – CH2 units
Ethane – C2H6
Propane – C3H8
– These differ by – CH2 units
Butane – C4H10
Pentane – C5H12
– These differ by – CH2 units

Characteristics:
(1) In homologous series while going in an increasing order of the length of carbon chain
(a) one methylene unit (-CH2-) gets added
(b) molecular mass increases by 14 u
(c) number of carbon atoms increases by one.
(2) Chemical properties of members of a homologous series show similarity due to the presence of the same functional group in them.
(3) Each member of the homologous series can be represented by the same general molecular formula.
(4) while going in an increasing order of the length there is gradation in the physical properties i.e., the boiling and melting points.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Question 5.
Polymerization.
Answer:
(1) The reaction by which monomer molecules are converted into a polymer is called polymerization. A macromolecule formed by regular repetition of a small unit is called polymer. The small unit that repeats regularly to form a polymer is called monomer. The important method of polymerization is to make a polymer by joining alkene type of monomers.

(2) When ethylene gas is heated at high pressure and high temperature in the presence of suitable catalyst, it polymerizes to form polyethylene or polythene (plastic).
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds 128

(3) The polymer polystyrene is used to make thermocoal articles. The polymer polyvinyl chloride is used to make P.V.C. pipes, doormats, etc. The polymer teflon is used to make nonstick cookware. The polymer polypropylene is used to make injection syringe, furniture, etc.

Give scientific reasons:

Question 1.
Carbon atoms are capable of forming an unlimited number of compounds.
Answer:

  1. Carbon has the property of catenation. Two or more carbon atoms can share some of their valence electrons to form (single, double and triple) bonds.
  2. The straight chains or branched chains or rings may have different shapes and sizes. This results in formation of many compounds. Hence, carbon atoms are capable of forming an unlimited number of compounds.

Question 2.
Ethylene is an unsaturated hydrocarbon.
Answer:
(1) Ethylene (CH2 = CH2) contains a double bond between carbon atoms.
(2) Thus, the valencies of the two carbon atoms are not fully satisfied by single covalent bonds. Hence, ethylene is an unsaturated hydrocarbon.

Question 3.
Naphthalene burns with a yellow flame.
Answer:
(1) Naphthalene is an unsaturated compound. In unsaturated hydrocarbon the proportion of carbon is larger than that of saturated hydrocarbon. As a result, some unburnt carbon particles are also formed during combustion of unsaturated compounds.

(2) In the flame. these unburnt hot carbon particles emit yellow light and therefore the flame appears yellow. Hence, naphthalene burns with a yellow flame.

Question 4.
The colour of iodine disappears in the reaction between vegetable oil and iodine.
Answer:
(1) Vegetable oils (unsaturated compound) contains a multiple bond as their functional group. They undergo addition reaction to form a saturated compound as the product.
(2) The addition reaction of vegetable oil with iodine takes place instantaneously at room temperature. The colour of iodine disappears in this reaction. This iodine test indicates the presence of a multiple bond in vegetable oil.

Question 5.
The hydrogenation of vegetable oil in the presence of nickel catalyst forms vanaspati ghee.
Answer:
(1) The molecules of vegetable oil contain long and unsaturated carbon chains. These unsaturated hydrocarbons contain a multiple bond as their functional group. They undergo addition reaction to form a saturated compound as the product.

(2) When vegetable oil (unsaturated compound) is hydrogenated in the presence of nickel catalyst, the addition reaction takes place, vanaspati ghee (saturated compound) is formed.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Distinguish between the following:

Question 1.
Saturated hydrocarbons and Unsaturated hydrocarbons.
Answer:
Saturated hydrocarbons:

  1. In saturated hydrocarbons, the carbon atoms are linked to each other only by single covalent bonds.
  2. They contain only a single bond.
  3. They are chemically less reactive.
  4. Substitution reaction is a characteristic property of these hydrocarbons.
  5. Their general formula is CnH2n + 2.

Unsaturated hydrocarbons:

  1. In unsaturated hydrocarbons, the valencies of carbon atoms are not fully satisfied by single covalent bonds.
  2. They contain carbon to carbon double or triple bonds.
  3. They are chemically more reactive.
  4. Addition reaction is a characteristic property of these hydrocarbons.
  5. Their general formula is CnH2n or CnH2n – 2

Question 2.
Open chain hydrocarbons and closed chain hydrocarbons.
Answer:
Open chain hydrocarbons:

  1. A hydrocarbon in which the chain of carbon atoms is not cyclic is called an open chain hydrocarbon.
  2. All aliphatic hydrocarbons contain open chains.

Closed chain hydrocarbons:

  1. A hydrocarbon in which the chain of carbon atoms is present in a cyclic form or ring form is called a closed chain hydrocarbon.
  2. All aromatic hydrocarbons contain closed chains.

Question 3.
Alkane and Alkene.
Answer:
Alkane

  1. Alkanes in which the carbon atoms are linked to each other only by single bonds.
  2. The general formula of an alkane is CnH2n + 2
  3. They are chemically less reactive.

Alkene:

  1. Alkenes in which carbon atoms are linked to each other by double bonds.
  2. The general formula of an alkene is CnH2n.
  3. They are chemically more reactive.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 9 Carbon Compounds

Project:

Question 1.
Prepare a list of carbon compounds which occur in nature and discuss their uses in daily life.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 1.
Fill in the blanks and complete the statements.
a. Methods like artificial insemination and embryo transplant are mainly used for ………..
(a) animal husbandry
(b) wild life
(c) pet animals
(d) for infertile women
Answer:
(a) animal husbandry

b. ……….. is the revolutionary event in biotechnology after cloning.
(a) Human genome project
(b) DNA discovery
(c) Stem cell research
(d) All the above
Answer:
(c) Stem cell research

c. The disease related with the synthesis of insulin is …………..
(a) cancer
(b) arthritis
(c) cardiac problems
(d) diabetes
Answer:
(d) diabetes

d. Government of India has encouraged the ……….. for improving the productivity by launching NKM-16.
(a) aquaculture
(b) poultry
(c) piggery
(d) apiculture
Answer:
(a) aquaculture

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 2.
Match the pairs.

Column ‘A’ Column ‘B’
(1) Interferon (a) Diabetes
(2) Factor VIII * (b) Dwarfness
(3) Somatostatin (c) Viral infection
(4) Interleukin (d) Cancer
(e) Haemophilia

[Note: In examination match the column question will have 2 components in Column A’ with 4 alternatives in Column B’.]
Answer:
(1) Interferon – Viral infection
(2) Factor VIII – Haemophilia
(3) Somatostatin – Dwarfness
(4) Interleukin – Cancer
[Note: Factor VIII* is an important protein factor and it should not be just factor as given in the textbook.]

Question 3.
Rewrite the following wrong statements after corrections:
a. Changes in genes of the cells are brought about in non-genetic technique.
Answer:
Non-genetic biotechnology involves use of either cell or tissue.

b. Gene from Bacillus thuringiensis is introduced into soyabean.
Answer:
Gene from Bacillus thuringiensis is introduced with gene of cotton.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 4.
Write short notes.
a. Biotechnology: Professional uses. (Commercial uses)
Answer:
(1) Biotechnology can be used in the following professional fields, viz. crop biotechnology, animal husbandry, human health, etc.

(2) In crop biotechnology, improvement in the yield and variety of agricultural field is done. The hybrid seeds, genetically modified crops, herbicide tolerant plants are some of the areas in which lot of biotechnological research is being done. By such research, high yielding and disease resistant varieties and varieties which can tolerate stresses such as alkalinity, weeds, cold and drought etc. are produced. BT cotton, BT Brinjal and golden rice are some GMO plants which have become popular in India.

Due to herbicide tolerant plants, the weeds are now selectively destroyed. By using biofertilizers, the use of chemical fertilizers is reduced. Use of bacteria such as Rhizobium, Azotobacter, Nostoc, Anaixiena and plants like Azolla the nitrogen fixation and phosphate solubilization abilities of the plants are improved.

(3) Animal husbandry is now using the methods of artificial insemination and embryo transfer by which the breeds of cattle are improved.

(4) To improve and to manage the human health, diagnosis ahd treatment of diseases have to be focussed. Diagnosis of diabetes, heart diseases and infectious diseases such as AIDS and dengue can be done rapidly due to biotechnology.

(5) The treatment and prevention of diseases need hormones, interferons, antibiotics and different vaccine which are now manufactured through biotechnology. Gene therapy is also used to treat hereditary disorders.

(6) Industrial products and clean technology to combat environmental pollution uses biotechnology practices.

(7) DNA fingerprinting has revolutionized the profession of forensic science.

b. Importance of medicinal plants.
Answer:

  • In Ayurveda practices, the natural remedies were used. Since India had great biodiversity and traditional knowledge of herbal medicinal uses, therefore, people depended on such medicinal plants.
  • In olden days, such herbs were collected by roaming in the jungles.
  • Such important medicinal herbs are now cultivated with care.
  • In entire world people have understood the importance of holy basil (tulsi), Adulsa, Jyesthmadh, etc.
  • In some of the allopathy medicines too, the plant extracts are used.
  • Medicines made from harmful chemicals have side effects and are not safe to be used unless there is medical supervision. Therefore, world-wide herbal remedies are gaining more popularity.

Question 5.
Answer the following questions in your own words.
a. Which products produced through biotechnology do you use in your daily life?
Answer:

  • The simplest use of biotechnology that we practice at home is making curd and buttermilk.
  • The primary type of biotechnology is used in the process of fermentation while making food stuffs, like bread, idli-dosa, dhokla, etc.
  • Nowadays, different types of cheese, paneer, yoghurt, energy drinks, etc. are produced with the help of biotechnology. We are consuming these in our daily life.
  • Seedless grapes, papaya, and watermelons are available in the market these days.
  • Violet cabbage, yellow capsicum and exotic vegetables used for salad are also biotechnology products.
  • The vaccines, antibiotics and the injections of human insulin are in regular use in many house-holds.

b. Which precautions will you take during spraying of pesticides?
Answer:

  • Pesticides are toxic chemicals. By using them indiscriminately, they contaminate the water, soil and also crops.
  • The D.D.T., chloropyriphos and malathion are very dangerous. They spread through the food chain causing biomagnification.
  • Therefore, we shall not use such insecticides and pesticides. We shall use organic pesticides. Excessive use will be avoided.
  • At the time of spraying, nose, eyes and skin will be covered and protected.
  • Care will be taken not to allow children or domestic animals to come in, contact with a pesticide.

c. Why some of the organs in human body are most valuable?
Answer:

  • The body can be in best health,if all the vital organs of the body are also in the best condition.
  • Brain, kidney, heart, liver, etc. are some such vital organs which are most essential for proper metabolism and functioning of the body. The sense organs of the body are also of utmost importance, especially eyes.
  • One cannot survive if any of these vital organs are not functioning properly. Some of the organs like brain will never regenerate too.
  • Some of the organs can be brought back to functionality by performing surgeries. However, any problem with these vital organs make life miserable, therefore, they are said to be valuable.

d. Explain the importance of fruit processing in human life?
Answer:
(1) Fruits are perishable food stuff. They are spoilt soon if not consumed immediately. Hence for storage and usage for a long term, their preservation is absolutely essential.
(2) For year-long use of the fruits they are dried, salted, packed in air tight containers, used for preparing jams and jellies or condensed into pulps or syrups. Beverages, pickles, sauce, and various other products made from the fruits are largely used by us.
(3) The preserved products also fetch financial benefits.
(4) In national and international markets, Indian fruits like mangoes are in great demand. We can get foreign currency through exports of fruits and fruit products. The local horticulturists get good benefit from their orchards.
(5) Processed fruit products also give vitamins and minerals that help in maintaining good health. Thus fruit processing is important for human life.

e. Explain the meaning of vaccination.
Answer:

  • Vaccination is the administering of vaccine. Vaccine is the ‘antigen’, given to a person or even to animals for acquiring immunity against particular pathogens or diseases.
  • In olden days, vaccipes were prepared with the help of completely or partially killed pathogens. But this method causes some inconvenience. Some persons were allergic to such raw vaccines or they contracted the same disease through such vaccines.
  • Hence in recent times the vaccines are produced by using biotechnology. These vaccines are artificial which are synthesised in the laboratories.
  • The antigen is produced with the help of gene of the pathogen. Such vaccine becomes safe for administering.
  • These antigenic proteins are injected to people to make their immune systems strong. This process of vaccination is absolutely safe. The vaccines are more thermostable and active for a long period of time.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 6.
Complete the following chart.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 1
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 2

Question 7.
Write the correct answer in blank boxes.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 3
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 4

Question 8.
Identify and complete the following correlations:
a. Insulin : Diabetes : : Interleukin : …………….
Answer:
Insulin : Diabetes : : Interleukin : Cancer

b. Interferon : ………. : : Erythropoietin : Anaemia.
Answer:
Interferon : Viral infection : : Erythropoietin : Anaemia.

c. ……….. : Dwarfness : : Factor VIII : Haemophilia.
Answer:
Somatostatin : Dwarfness : : Factor VIII : Haemophilia.

d. White revolution : Dairy : : Blue revolution : ………
Answer:
White revolution : Dairy : : Blue revolution : Fishery

Question 9.
Write a comparative note on usefulness and harmfulness of biotechnology.
(OR)
“Biotechnology is not only beneficial but it has some harmful effects too”. Express your opinion about this statement.
Answer:
(1) Biotechnology has proved to be useful in the field of agriculture, medicine, clean technology and industrial products.
(2) Due to various biotechnological experiments, the food production is increased substantially. The milk and milk products are now freely available. People no longer die of hunger due to abundant food supply.
(3) The sophisticated vaccines have stopped the spread of epidemics.
(4) The diseases like diabetes can be controlled due to human insulin injections that can be manufactured by biotechnology.
(5) The problems of pollution control, solid waste management and fuels are partially tackled by biotechnological alternatives.
(6) Though all such positive aspects are there, the biotechnology also poses some problems. The genetic changes are breaking the principles of nature. By inserting human genes in bacteria or virus, the products that are needed only for humans are produced.
(7) Human cloning is also a debatable issue. It will cause social and ethical problems. The new generations formed by cloning will have mothers but no fathers. If man tries to manipulate the genomes of other living organisms, it will cause disturbances in the natural balance. The long ternT effects of all such genetic manipulations can be disastrous. Thus, according to some views, biotechnology can be dangerous too.

Projects: (Do it your self)

Project 1.
Visit the organic manuring projects nearby your place and collect more information.

Project 2.
What will you do to increase public awareness about organ donation in your area?

Project 3.
Collect information about ‘green corridor’. Make a news-collection about it.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 88)

Question 1.
What is cell?
Answer:
The structural and functional unit of the body is called a cell.

Question 2.
What is tissue? What are the functions of tissue?
Answer:
Tissue is a group of cells that performs a similar and definite function. E.g. The muscular tissues in the body perform contraction and extensions thereby helping in locomotion. The conducting tissues of the plants like xylem and phloem transport the water and food respectively.

Question 3.
Which technique in relation to tissues have you studied in earlier classes?
Answer:
The technique of tissue culture and genetic engineering has been studied last year. Tissue culture is ‘Ex vivo growth of cells or tissues in an aseptic and nutrient-rich medium’. Genetic engineering and its use has also been studied under, ‘Introduction to biotechnology’.

Question 4.
Which are the various processes in tissue culture?
Answer:
Various step-wise processes are done while performing the-tissue culture. These processes are primary treatment, reproduction/cell division/multiplication, shooting or rooting, primary hardening, secondary hardening, etc.

Observe: (Text Book Page No. 88)

Question 1.
Assign names in the figure given below. Explain the various stages those are kept blank:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 5
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 6
Tissue Culture: Tissue culture is the technique in which ‘ex vivo growth of cells or tissues in an aseptic and nutrient-rich medium’ is done. While performing experiments of tissue culture, a liquid, solid or gel-like ” medium prepared from agar, is used. Such medium supplies nutrients and energy necessary for tissue culture technique. Different processes are to be done while performing tissue culture, viz. primary treatment, reproduction or multiplication, shooting and rooting, primary hardening, secondary hardening, etc. From the source plant, required tissues are taken out and all the processes are carried in an aseptic medium in laboratory.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

(Use your brain power. (Text Book Page No. 89)

Question 1.
Just like the grafting in plants, is the organ transplantation possible in humans?
Answer:
The grafting as done in case of plants, cannot be done in human beings. But the transplantation of certain organs can be done. Liver, kidney, heart, eyes, etc. can be transplanted. But for these transplantations the donor and the recipient should match with each other in respect of their bloodr groups, age, disease condition, etc. In future, the stem cell research can bring about certain changes in the field of transplantations.

(Text Book Page No. 94)

Question 1.
What will happen if the transgenic potatoes are cooked before consumption?
Answer:
Some types of transgenic potatotes that contain edible vaccine against Hepatitis can be cooked. The cooking does not destroy the antigen incorporated into these transgenic potatoes. But according to some scientists, transgenic potatoes with enterotoxin vaccine, if cooked shows denaturation of vaccine.

Choose the correct alternative and write its alphabet against the sub-question number:

Question 1.
The property of stem cells is called ………….
(a) diversity
(b) equality
(c) differentiation
(d) pluripotency
Answer:
(d) pluripotency

Question 2.
Cell ……….. starts from 14th day of conception.
(a) development
(b) specialization
(c) growth
(d) differentiation
Answer:
(d) differentiation

Question 3.
Availability of ………… is an important requirement in organ transplantation.
(a) doctor
(b) clinic
(c) donor
(d) ambulance
Answer:
(c) donor

Question 4.
The toxin which is lethal for ……….. was produced in leaves and bolls of BT cotton.
(a) bollworm
(b) locust
(c) birds
(d) frogs
Answer:
(a) bollworm

Question 5.
Transgenic raw potatoes generate the immunity against ………… disease.
(a) plague
(b) cholera
(c) leprosy
(d) TB
Answer:
(b) cholera

Rewrite the following wrong statements after corrections:

Question 1.
High-class varieties of crops have been developed through the technique of transplantation.
Answer:
High-class varieties of crops have been developed through the technique of tissue-culture.

Question 2.
Earlier, insulin was being collected from, the pancreas of pigs.
Answer:
Earlier, insulin was being collected from the- pancreas of horses.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 3.
Malaria arises due to genetic changes in hepatocytes.
Answer:
Phenylketonuria (PKT) arises due to genetic changes in hepatocytes.

Question 4.
The E.coli bacteria are useful for cleaning the hydrocarbon and oil pollutants from soil and water.
Answer:
The Pseudomonas bacteria are useful for cleaning the hydrocarbon and oil pollutants from soil and water.

Question 5.
Various essential elements like N, P, K are removed and hence become unavailable to the crops due to earthworms and fungi.
Answer:
Various essential elements like N, P, K become available to crops due to earthworms and fungi.

Question 6.
We do not have any tradition that cures the diseases with the help of natural resources.
Answer:
We have a great tradition of ayurveda that cures the diseases with the help of natural resources.

Match the pairs:

Question 1.

Scientist Contribution
(1) Dr. Anand Mohan Chakravarti (a) Wheat production in America
(2) Dr. M. S. Swaminathan (b) White revolution
(c) Green revolution in India
(d) Cleaning the oil spill

Answer:
(1) Dr. Anand Mohan Chakravarti – Cleaning the oil spill
(2) Dr. M.S. Swaminathan – Green revolution in India

Question 2.

Organism Substance that is absorbed
(1) Pseudomonas (a) Uranium and arsenic
(2) Pteris vitata (b) Selenium
(c) Arsenic
(d) Hydrocarbons

Answer:
(1) Pseudomonas – Hydrocarbons
(2) Pteris vitata – Arsenic

Find the odd man out:

Question 1.
Green revolution, Industrial revolution, White revolution, Blue revolution
Answer:
Industrial revolution. (All others are concerned with food.)

Question 2.
DDT, malathion, chloropyriphos, Humus
Answer:
Humus. (All others are insecticides.)

Question 3.
Sodium, Aluminium, Potassium, Phosphorus
Answer:
Aluminium. (All others are essential elements for plant growth.)

Question 4.
Diabetes, Anaemia, Leukaemia, Thalassemia
Answer:
Diabetes. (All other diseases involve reduction in the number of blood cells.)

Question 5.
Drying, Salting, Cooking, Soaking with sugar
Answer:
Cooking. (All others are food preservative methods.)

Identify and complete the following correlations:

Question 1.
White revolution : Increase in dairy production : : Green revolution : ………. (March 2019)
Answer:
White revolution : Increase in dairy production : : Green revolution : Increase in agricultural production or crop yield

Question 2.
Nostoc, Anabaena : Biofertilizers : : Alfalfa : ………..
Answer:
Nostoc, Anabaena : Biofertilizers : : Alfalfa : Phytoremediation.

Give definition/Give meanings:

Question 1.
Stem cell or what are stem cells?
Answer:
The special cells having pluripotency and ability to divide and differentiate into new cells are called stem cells. They are present in multicellular living beings.

Question 2.
Biotechnology.
Answer:
Technology that brings about artificial genetic changes and hybridization in organisms for human welfare is called biotechnology.

Question 3.
Genetically modified crops.
Answer:
Crops having desired characters are developed by integrating foreign gene with their genome, such crops have modified genome and are known as genetically modified crops.

Question 4.
Golden rice.
Answer:
Biotechnologically developed variety of rice in which gene synthesizing the vitamin A (Beta carotene) has been incorporated and which contains 23 times more amount of beta carotene than that of the normal variety is called golden rice. It was developed in 2005.

Question 5.
Vaccine.
Answer:
The ‘antigen’ containing material given to a person or animal to acquire either permanent or temporary immunity against a specific pathogen or disease is called a vaccine.

Question 6.
Cloning.
Answer:
Production of replica of any cell or organ or entire organism through biotechnological process is called cloning.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 7.
DNA fingerprint.
Answer:
The nucleotide sequence present on the DNA of each person is unique just like the fingerprint, thus for establishing the identity of any person DNA can be analysed, this technique is known as DNA fingerprinting.

Question 8.
Green revolution.
Answer:
All the methods applied for harvesting maximum yield from minimum land are collectively referred to as green revolution.

Question 9.
White revolution.
Answer:
Achieving the self-sufficiency in dairy business, by performing various experiments for quality control, bringing about newer dairy products and their preservation and thus raising economic standards is called white revolution.

Question 10.
Blue revolution.
Answer:
The aquaculture practices to increase the yield of edible aquatic organisms is called blue revolution.

Name the following:

Question 1.
Research institutes involved with cell science.
Answer:

  • National Centre of Cell Science, Pune
  • Instem, Bengaluru.

Question 2.
Sources of stem cells.
Answer:

  • Umbilical cord
  • Embryonic cells
  • Redbone marrow
  • Adipose connective tissue and blood of adult human being.

Question 3.
Types of Stem cells.
Answer:

  • Embryonic stem cells
  • Adult stem cells.

Question 4.
Organs that can be donated.
Answer:
Eyes, heart, pancreas, liver, kidneys, skin, J bones, lungs.

Question 5.
Organisms used as biofertilizers.
Answer:
Rhizobium, Azotobacter, Nostoc, Anabaena, Azolla.

Question 6.
Two main methods used in animal husbandry.
Answer:

  1. Artificial insemination
  2. Embryo transfer.

Question 7.
Two important aspects of human health management.
Answer:

  1. Diagnosis
  2. Treatment of diseases.

Question 8.
Place where DNA fingerprinting research is done in India.
Answer:
Centre of DNA fingerprinting and Diagnostics, Hyderabad.

Question 9.
One benefit of biotechnology to the agriculture.
Answer:
Expenses on the pesticides are reduced.

scientific reasons:

Question 1.
Nowadays, safer vaccines are being produced.
Answer:

  • Before the advent of biotechnology, the vaccines were made from inactive or dead pathogens of that disease.
  • But now the vaccine is made artificially using biotechnological processes.
  • Such vaccines produced some disease symptoms in some cases.
  • The antigen of the disease is researched upon and its genetic code is found out.
  • A similar antigen is made in the laboratories which is used as a vaccine.
  • Such vaccines are more thermostable and remain active for longer duration. Therefore, the vaccines are now safer.

Question 2.
Awareness about organ donation after death is increasing.
Answer:

  • Due to accidents or illness, some of the vital organs may get damaged and may not work to fullest capacity.
  • In such cases, if organ transplantation is done, it will be very helpful for that needy patient.
  • The dead person’s organs can be used for organ transplantation and a life can be saved.
  • Many government and social organizations are spreading awareness about such donations. Therefore, gradually the awareness about organ transplantation is increasing.

Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
Write two uses of biotechnology related to human health. (Board’s Model Activity Sheet)
Answer:

  1. Biotechnology is used to manufacture vaccines for controlling diseases.
  2. Different hormones such as insulin, somatotropin and somatostatin can be prepared in laboratories by using new biotechnological processes. The clotting factors are also manufactured through such techniques.

Question 2.
Answer the following questions:
(a) What is biotechnology?
(b) Explain any two commercial applications of it. (March 2019)
Answer:
(a) Biotechnology: Technology that brings about artificial genetic changes and hybridization in organisms for human welfare is called biotechnology.

(b)

  • The treatment and prevention of diseases need hormones, interferons, antibiotics and different vaccine which are now manufactured through biotechnology. Gene therapy is also used to treat hereditary disorders.
  • Industrial products and clean technology to combat environmental pollution uses biotechnology practices.
  • DNA fingerprinting has revolutionized the profession of forensic science.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 3.
What is mainly included under biotechnology?
Answer:
Biotechnology includes the following main areas:

  • Abilities of microbes are used in producing yoghurt from milk and making alcohol from molasses.
  • Production of antibiotics and vaccines, etc. is carried out by with the help of specific cells using their productivity.
  • Bio-molecules like DNA and proteins are used for human welfare.
  • By performing gene manipulation, plants, animals and products of desired quality are produced. Genetically modified bacteria are used to produce human hormones such as Human Growth Hormone and insulin.
  • Tissue culture is a non-genetic technique which is used for production of new cells or tissues. Hybrid seeds are also produced in a similar way.

Question 4.
What are edible vaccines?
Answer:

  • Edible vaccines are those which are given as a food by incorporating them into the food-stuff.
  • Such edible vaccines are produced through biotechnology.
  • Transgenic potatoes are produced with the help of biotechnology which contain vaccine that act against bacteria like Vibrio cholera, Escherichiatoli.
  • If raw potatoes are consumed, then the immunity is generated in the body of a person. However, eating only raw potatoes generates the immunity against cholera and the disease caused due to E. coli.

Question 5.
What is DNA fingerprinting? Explain it in brief. Where is this technique used? Give any two examples. (Board’s Model Activity Sheet)
Answer:

  • As the fingerprints are unique for every individual, similarly the nucleotide sequence in the DNA molecule is also unique.
  • By knowing this sequence, one can find out the identity of any person. Such technique to establish the identity of a person by taking into consideration the nucleotide sequence is called DNA fingerprinting.
  • Its main use is in forensic sciences to confirm the identity of the criminal.
  • Similarly, identity of parents in case of disputed parentage for any child can be understood by taking DNA fingerprints of both the parents and a child.

Write short notes on:

Question 1.
Uses of stem cells.
Answer:
Stem cells are used for following purposes:

  • In regenerative therapy stem cells are used.
  • In case of diseased conditions like diabetes, myocardial infarction, Alzheimer’s disease, Parkinson’s disease, etc., stem cells can be used to replace the damaged or functionless cells.
  • In conditions such as anaemia, thalassaemia, leukaemia, etc. there is always the need of newer blood cells. Here, stem cells can be used to restore the number of blood cells.
  • In techniques of organ transplantation stem cells can be used and they can help in the transplantation of new organs such as kidney and liver The defective organs can be replaced by those that are produced with the help of stem cells and transplanted.

Question 2.
Cloning.
Answer:

  • Cloning is the modern technique in which there is production of replica of any cell or organ or entire organism is done.
  • There are two types of cloning, viz. (i) Reproductive cloning and (ii) Therapeutic cloning.
  • Reproductive cloning: In reproductive cloning, a clone is produced by fusion of a nucleus of diploid somatic cell with the enucleated ovum of anybody. In the process, the sperm or male gamete is not needed.
  • Therapeutic cloning: This technique is largely used for treatment purpose. Stem cells are derived from the cell formed in laboratory by the union of somatic cell nucleus with the enucleated egg cell.
  • This technique is used for therapy of various diseases.
  • Gene cloning can also be done to form millions of copies of same gene. Such genes are used for gene therapy and other purposes.
  • Due to cloning technique, the inheritance of hereditary diseases can be controlled, continuation of generations can be achieved and certain characteristic genes can be enhanced.
  • However, for human cloning, there is world-wide opposition due to ethical reasons.

Question 3.
Dolly.
Answer:

  • Dolly was the first mammalian cloned sheep.
  • Dolly was born on 5th July 1996 in Scotland by the process of cloning.
  • The Finn Dorset sheep was chosen and her diploid nucleus from the udder cell was introduced into the ovum whose haploid nucleus was removed. This enucleated ovum was of Scottish sheep.
  • The egg was then introduced into uterus of another Scottish sheep and it grew into Dolly.
  • Dolly resembled exactly like Finn Dorset sheep whose diploid nucleus was used. None of the characters of Scottish sheep were seen in Dolly.
  • In this way, Dolly had three mothers but no father.
  • Dolly gave birth to many young ones. She died on 14th February 2003 due to cancer of the lungs.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 4.
Green revolution.
Answer:

  • In agriculture, different methods used to harvest maximum yield from minimum land, these methods are collectively called green revolution.
  • Dr. M.S. Swaminathan is called father of Green Revolution in India while Dr. Norman Borlaug has done the similar efforts in the U.S.
  • Before the Green Revolution in India, there was always the dearth of the food grains. The overflowing Indian population was badly affected due to poor quality and quantity of food.
  • But due to the Green Revolution in India, attention was focussed on the agricultural research.
  • Improvised dwarf varieties of wheat and rice, proper use of fertilizers and pesticides and water management were the proper methods that increased production of food grains.
  • This created abundance of the grains for Indian population.

Question 5.
White revolution.
Answer:

  • Few years back, there was scarcity of milk in various parts of India. At some places, milk and milk products were abundant but they did not reach all the consumers.
  • Dr. Verghese Kurien ^ho was then the founder director of Anand Milk Union Limited (AMUL) started thecooperative movement in the direction to produce “operation flood”, i.e. abundance of milk everywhere.
  • The use of biotechnology was also done to increase the milk production.
  • Dr. Kurien’s efforts have reached all-time high status as India is now self-sufficient in dairy business.
  • This is popularly known as White Revolution. Different experiments were performed for quality control, newer dairy products were thought off and preservation methods were improved.
  • This created White Revolution. AMUL from Anand has now reached international standards.

Question 6.
Blue Revolution.
Answer:

  • Utilization of aquaculture practices for obtaining edible and commercial aquatic organisms is called blue revolution.
  • In East Asian countries where water bodies and fish population is abundant, the aquaculture was started.
  • On similar lines, in India, the aquaculture of different fresh water and marine organisms is being done with the help of fishery scientists.
  • Government of India has vowed to increase the aquaculture production by encouraging the people for aquaculture by launching the program ‘Nil- Kranti Mission-2016’ (NKM-16).
  • Pisciculutre is culturing of fish, mariculture is culture of marine organisms such as prawns/shrimps and lobsters. Sea weeds, oysters, clams are also cultured.
  • For carrying out aquaculture, 50% to 100% subsidies are offered by the Government.
  • Fresh water fishes like rohu, catla and other edible varieties like shrimp and lobsters are being cultured on a large scale which can bring about Blue Revolution.

Complete the paragraph by choosing the appropriate words given in the bracket:

Question 1.
(degenerated, red bone marrow, adipose connective tissue, blastocyst, umbilical cord, Differentiation)
………… of stem cells form can form various tissues, in the body. Stem cells are present in the ………….. by which the foetus is joined to the uterus of the mother. Stem cells are also present in the ……….. stage of embryonic development. Stem cells are present in ……….. and ………… of adult human beings. It has become possible to produce different types of tissues and the ……… part of any organ with the help of these stem cells.
Answer:
Differentiation of stem cells form can form various tissues in the body. Stem cells are present in the umbilical cord by which the foetus is joined to the uterus of the mother. Stem cells are also present in the blastocyst stage of embryonic development. Stem cells are present in red bone marrow and adipose connective tissue of adult human beings. It has become possible to produce different types of tissues and the degenerated part of any organ with the help of these stem cells.

Paragraph-based questions :

1. Green corridor refers to a special road route that enables harvested organs meant for transplants to reach the destined hospital. A 45-year-old woman, a victim of a railway accident, was declared brain dead, her husband and children agreed to donate her kidneys, liver and heart. One of her kidneys was transplanted to a patient in MGM Hospital and the second kidney helped a patient in Jaslok hospital. Her liver helped the transplant of a patient in Wockhardt Hospital. And her heart was sent to Fortis to the patient on a super urgent priority list, transported via a green corridor covering 18km in less than 16 minutes. This was possible due to Green corridor.
Questions and Answers :

Question 1.
What is Green corridor?
Answer:
Green corridor is a special road route that enables harvested organs meant for transplants to reach the destined hospital

Question 2.
Which organs of brain-dead lady were transplanted?
Answer:
Two kidneys, liver and heart of the brain- dead lady were transplanted.

Question 3.
How many lives were saved from organs of one lady?
Answer:
Four patients lives were saved due to organ donation of one lady.

Question 4.
How was distance of 18km covered in 16 minutes? Why?
Answer:
The distance was covered because the concept of Green corridor was applied. The heart was sent from one hospital to another, where the recipient was kept ready. The quick transportation is necessary to keep heart in living condition.

Question 5.
Who takes the decision to donate the organs?
Answer:
The close relatives of deceased person take the decision to donate the organs.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

2. Read the following extract and answer the questions that follow: (March 2019)
A liberal view behind the concept of organ and body donation is that after death our body should be useful to other needful persons so that their miserable life would become comfortable. Awareness about these concepts is. increasing in our country and people are voluntarily donating their bodies.

Life of many people can be saved by organ and body donation. Blinds can regain their vision. Life of many people can be rendered comfortable by donation of organs like liver, kidneys, heart, heart valves, skin, etc. Similarly, body can be made available for research in medical studies. Many government and social organizations are working towards increasing the awareness about body donation.
Questions and Answers :

Question 1.
What is the liberal view behind the organ and body donation?
Answer:
By body donation, research in medical studies is possible. The needy persons can get vital organs which can save their lives.

Question 2.
Name any four organs that can be donated.
Answer:
Liver, Kidneys, heart, eyes, skin, etc. can be donated.

Complete the following table:

Question 1.

Plant/Microbes Functions
(1) Pteris vitata ______________________________
(2) Pseudomonas ______________________________
(3) ______________________________ Absorption of uranium and arsenic
(4) ______________________________ Absorption of radiations of nuclear waste

Answer:

Plant/Microbes Functions
(1) Pteris vitata Absorbs arsenic from soil.
(2) Pseudomonas Separates hydrocarbon and oil from water and soil
(3) Sunflower Absorption of uranium and arsenic
(4) Deinococcus radiodurans Absorption of radiations of nuclear waste

Diagram/chart based questions:

Question 1.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 7
(A) Which process is shown in the above figure? *
Answer:
The figure shows process to make transgenic

(B) Describe in brief the steps I, II, III and IV.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 8

Question 2.
Draw well labelled diagram of Stem cell therapy.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 9

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 3.
Label the following diagram :
(i) Stem cells and organ transplantation,
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 10

(ii) Organs that can be donated:
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 11

Question 4.
(i) Which therapy is shown in the Fig. 8.5?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 12
(ii) Which will be possible benefits of this therapy in organ transplantation ?
Answer:
(i) The figure 8.5 shows the ‘regenerative therapy’ using stem cells. Also called stem cell therapy.
(ii) With the help of above therapy organs like liver, kidney from stem cells can be redeveloped to replace the failed ones.

Activity based questions:

Question 1.
Bring a packet of ‘Balghuti’ from ayurveda shop. Learn the information about each component in it. Collect information about various other medicines and prepare the chart as shown below. (Try this: Textbook page no. 99)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 13

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 2.
Give five examples of each of the fruiting and flowering plants developed through tissue culture and mention their benefits. (Make a list and discuss: Textbook page no. 93)
Answer:
I. Fruiting trees: Banana, Chikoo (Sapota), Tomato, Fig, Pineapple.

II. Flowering trees: Orchids, Roses, Chrysanthemum, Gerbera, Begonia, Carnation, Lili. Benefits of such plants may be varied. Mostly fruits developed are made seedless and tastier.

III. Benefits of plants produced through technique of tissue culture:

  • Techniques of tissue culture can produce more copies of same plant with better characters. ’ The plant grower likes to have bigger and more fruits from fruit trees. On the flowering trees, colourful flowers with good fragrance are favoured.
  • Plants which do not depend on particular climate and local seasonal changes are produced by tissue culture methods. This helps to rise the yield in an area which otherwise may not produce a specific crop.
  • For tissue culture, saplings and seedlings are made available throughout the year through laboratory. The limitations of getting natural seeds are not there thus planting can be done throughout the year.
  • Tissue culture techniques create the plants of uniform size, shape and yield. Since they are exactly alike, it becomes beneficial.
  • In lesser time period, the crops reach maturity.
  • The crops are pest and disease resistant.
  • Tissue culture techniques are cost effective and easy to carry out.

Question 3.
Which new species of the rice have been developed in India? (Collect Information: Textbook page no. 97)
Answer:

  1. Species in 2015-16: High zinc species (DRR Dhan 45), Pusa 1592, Punjab basmati 3, Pusa 1609, Telangana Sona.
  2. Species in 2014: CR Dhan 205, CR Dhan 306, CRR, 451.

Question 4.
Discuss about stem cells and organ transplantation in the class with the help of figures given on textbook page no. 90. (Observe: Textbook page no. 90)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 14
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 15
Organ transplantation:
Various organs in the human body either become less efficient or completely functionless due to various reasons like aging, accidents, infections, disorders, etc. Life of such person becomes difficult or even fatality may occur under such conditions. However, if a person gets the necessary organ under such conditions, its life can be saved.

Availability of donor is an important requirement in organ transplantation. Each person has a pair of kidneys. As the process of excretion can occur with the help of single kidney, person can donate another one. Similarly, skin from certain parts of the body can also be donated.

Various factors like blood group, diseases, disorders, age, etc. of the donor and recipient need to be paid attention during transplantation.

However, other organs cannot be donated during life time. Organs like liver, heart, eyes can be donated after death only. This has lead to the emergence of concepts like posthumous (after death) donation of body and organs.

Organ and Body Donation: human bodies are disposed off after death as per traditional customs. However due to progress in science, it has been realized that many organs remain functional for certain period even after death occurs under specific conditions. Concepts like organ donation and body donation have emerged recently after realization that such organs can be used to save the life of other needful persons. A liberal view behind the concept of organ and body donation is that after death, our body should be useful to other needful persons so that their miserable life would become comfortable. Awareness about these concepts is increasing in our country and people are voluntarily donating their bodies.

Life of many people can be saved by organ and body donation. Blinds can regain the vision. Life of many people can be rendered comfortable by donation of organs like liver, kidneys, heart, heart valves, skin. etc. Similarly, body can be made available for research in medical studies. Many government and social organizations are working towards increasing the awareness about body donation.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Question 5.
Which fruits processing industries you observe in your surrounding? What is their effect? (Make a list and discuss: Textbook page no. 99)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology 16
Fruit Processing:
we are daily using various products prepared from fruits. All are consuming the products like chocolates, juices, jams and jellies. All these products can be produced by processing on fruits. Fruits are perishable agro-produce. It needs the processing in such a way that it can be used throughout the year. Fruit processing includes various methods ranging from storage in cold storage to drying, salting, air tight pucking, preparing murabba, evaporating, etc.

Projects: (Do it your self)

Project 1.
Collect information about various hybrid varieties of animals. What are their benefits? Make a presentation of various pictures and videos. (Use of ICT: Textbook page no. 93)

Project 2.
Visit the websites: http://www.who.int/transplantation/organ/en/ and www.organindia.org / approaching-the- transplant/and collect more information about ‘brain dead’, organ donation and body donation (Internet is my friend: Textbook page no. 90)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 2 Chapter 8 Cell Biology and Biotechnology

Project 3.
Collect more information about the Human Genome Project, one of the important projects in the world.
(Internet is my friend: Textbook page no. 95)

Project 4.
Collect the information and make the chart about the work of various state and national-level institutes related with biotechnology. (Internet is my friend: Textbook page no. 97)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 1.
a. Alloy of sodium with mercury.
Answer:
Silver amalgam.

b.Molecular formula of common ore of aluminium.
Answer:
Al2O3.nH2O

c. The oxide that forms salt and water by reacting with both acid and base.
Answer:
Aluminium oxide (Al2O3).

d. device used for grinding an ore.
Answer:
The device used for grinding an ore is grinding mill.

e. The nonmetal having electrical conductivity.
Answer:
Graphite having electrical conductivity.

f. The reagent that dissolves noble metals.
Answer:
Aqua regia is the reagent that dissolves noble metals like gold and platinum.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 2.
Make pairs of substances and their properties.

Column I Column II
Substance Property
(1) Potassium bromide (a) Combustible
(2) Gold (b) Soluble in water
(3) Sulphur (c) No chemical reaction
(4) Neon (d) High ductility
(e) Magnetic ingredient

Answer:
(1) Potassium bromide – Soluble in water
(2) Gold – High ductility
(3) Sulphur – Combustible
(4) Neon – No chemical reaction

Question 3.
Identify the pairs of metals and their ores from the following.

Column I (ores) Column II (metals)
(1) Bauxite (a) Mercury
(2) Cassiterite (b) Aluminium
(3) Cinnabar (c) Tin
(d) Copper

Answer:
(1) Bauxite – Aluminium
(2) Cassiterite – Tin
(3) Cinnabar – Mercury

Question 4.
Explain the terms.
a. Metallurgy
Answer:
Metallurgy: The process used for extraction of metals in their pure form from their ores, then metals are further purified by different methods of purification. All the process is called metallurgy.

b. Ores.
Answer:
Ores: The minerals from which metals are extracted profitably and conveniently are called ores.
Examples: Bauxite (Al2O3.H2O), Cinnabar (HgS).

c. Minerals.
Answer:
Minerals: The naturally occurring compounds of metals along with other impurities are known as minerals.
Examples: Rocks are composed of mixtures of minerals. Talc and granite are minerals.

d. Gangue.
Answer:
Gangue: Ores contain metal compounds with some of the impurities like soil, sand, rocky material, etc. These impurities are called gangue.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 5.
Write scientific reasons.
a. Lemon or tamarind is used for cleaning copper vessels turned greenish.
Answer:

  • Copper undergoes oxidation in air to form black copper oxide. Copper oxide reacts slowly with carbon dioxide in air and gains a green coat. This green substance is copper carbonate.
  • Lemon and tamarind contain acid. The acid dissolves the green coating of basic copper carbonate present on the surface of a tarnished copper utensil and makes it shiny again.

b. Generally the ionic compounds have high melting points.
Answer:

  • The ionic compounds exist in solid state and are hard due to strong electrostatic force of attraction between oppositely charged ions.
  • The intermolecular force of attraction is high in ionic compounds and large energy is required to overcome it. Therefore, ionic compounds have high melting points.

c. Sodium is always kept in kerosene.
(OR)
Why is sodium stored in kerosene?
Answer:

  • Sodium reacts so vigorously with atmospheric oxygen that it catches fire if kept in the open.
  • It does not react with kerosene and sinks in it. Hence, to protect sodium and to prevent accidental fires it is always kept in kerosene.

d. Pine oil is used in the froth floatation process.
Answer:

  • In the concentration of an ore by froth floatation process, the ore is mixed with water and pine oil. When air is bubbled through the mixture a froth is formed.
  • The mineral particles in the ore are preferentially wetted by the oil and float on the top in the froth.
  • The gangue particles are wetted by water and settle down. Thus the mineral can be separated from the gangue and the ore is concentrated.

e. Anodes need to be replaced from time to time during the electrolysis of alumina.
Answer:

  • During electrolysis of alumina, the oxygen liberated at the carbon anode reacts with graphite rods (carbon anode) and forms carbon dioxide.
  • As the anodes get oxidised during electrolysis of alumina, they are continuously eroded. Hence, it is necessary to replace anodes from time to time.

Question 6.
When a copper coin is dipped in silver nitrate solution, a glitter appears on the coin after some time. Why does this happen? Write the chemical equation.
Answer:
When a copper coin is dipped in a silver nitrate solution, more reactive copper displaces silver from silver nitrate solution. The silver so liberated deposits on the copper coin. As a result, a shiny coat of silver is formed on the coin.
Cu(s) + 2AgNO3(aq) → Cu(NO3)2(aq) + 2Ag(s)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 7.
The electronic configuration of metal ‘A’ is 2, 8, 1 and that of metal ‘B’ is 2, 8, 2. Which of the two metals is more reactive? Identify these metals. Write their reaction with dilute hydrochloric acid. (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Answer:
If the number of electrons in the outermost orbit is less, then the metal is more reactive. Metal A contains one electron in the outermost shell, while metal B contains two electrons. Hence, metal A is more reactive than metal B.

Metal A is sodium and metal B is magnesium. Reactions of Na and Mg with dil. HCl are,
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 1

Question 8.
Draw a neat labelled diagram.
a. Magnetic separation method.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 2

b. Forth floatation.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 3

c. Electrolytic reduction of alumina.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 4

d. Hydraulic separation method.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 5

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 9.
Write chemical equation for the following events.
a. Aluminium came in contact with air.
Answer:
When aluminium is exposed to air, it develops a thin oxide layer of aluminium.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 6

b. Iron filings are dropped in aqueous solution of copper sulphate.
Answer:
When iron filings are dropped in copper sulphate solution, more reactive iron displaces copper from copper sulphate solution. The iron filings get coated with reddish brown copper metal and the blue colour of copper sulphate fades gradually and ferrous sulphate is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 7

c. A reaction was brought about between ferric oxide and aluminium.
Answer:
The reaction between ferric oxide and iron produces aluminium oxide and iron. It is a thermite reaction and is highly exothermic.
It produces a large amount of heat, which is released to melt oxygen and aluminium. This reaction is used in welding of machineries. It is also used in warfare to make grenades.

The chemical reaction for the above is as follows:
3Fe3O2 + 4Al → 2Al2O3 + 6Fe

d. Electrolysis of alumina is done.
Answer:
During electrolysis of alumina, aluminium is deposited at the cathode. Molten aluminium being heavier than the electrolyte, is collected at the bottom of the tank. Oxygen gas is liberated at the anode.
Anode reaction: 2O → O2 + 4e (Oxidation)
Cathode reaction: Al3+ + 3e → Al(l) (Reduction)

e. Zinc oxide is dissolved in dilute hydrochloric acid.
Answer:
Zinc oxide is dissolved in dilute hydrochloric acid, zinc chloride and water are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 8

Question 10.
Complete the following statement using every given options.
During the extraction of aluminium
a. Ingredients and gangue in bauxite.
b. Use of leuching during the concentration of ore.
c. Chemical reaction of transformation of bauxite into alumina by Hall’s process.
d. Heating the aluminium ore with concentrated caustic soda.
Answer:
c. Chemical reaction of transformation of bauxite into alumina by Hall’s process.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 11.
Divide the metals Cu, Zn, Ca, Mg, Fe, Na, Li into three groups, namely, reactive metals, moderately reactive metals and less reactive metals.
Answer:
Reactive metals: Na, Li, Ca
Moderately reactive metals: Zn, Fe, Mg,
Less reactive metals: Cu

Project: (Do it your self)

Collect metal vessels and various metal articles. Write detailed informciton. write the steps in the procedure that can be done in the laboratory for giving glitter to these. Seek guidance from your teacher.

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 93)

Question 1.
what are the physical properties of metals and nonmetals?
Answer:
Properties of metals:

  1. Solid state (Exception: Mercury and gallium)
  2. Typical lustre
  3. Malleability and ductility
  4. Hardness (Exception: Lithium, sodium and potassium)
  5. Good conductors of heat and electricity
  6. High melting and boiling points (On the other hand, the melting and boiling points of the metals sodium, potassium, mercury and galium are very low.)
  7. Sonorous and produce sound on striking a hard surface.

Properties or nonmetals:

  1. Gaseous or solid state (Exception: Bromine in liquid state)
  2. Lack of any typical lustre (Exception: Iodine and Diamond)
  3. Brittleness in the solid state (Exception: Diamond is the hardest natural substance)
  4. Bad conductors of heat and electricity (Exception: Graphite) (Diamond is good conductor of heat)
  5. Low melting and boiling points.

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 102)

Question 1.
What is the electronic definition of oxidation and reduction?
Answer:
When a metal loses çlectrons the process is called an oxidation while when a nonmetal gains electrons, it is called a reduction,
Na → Na+ + e (oxidation)
Cl + e → Cl (reduction)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 106)

Question 1.
What is meant by corrosion?
Answer:
Corrosion is degradation of a material due toreaction with its environment.

Question 2.
Have you observed the following things?
(1) Old iron bars in the builthngs.
Answer:
When old iron bars in the buildings are exposed to moist air for a long time, they acquire a coating of browm nlaky substance called rust. (Fe2O3.H2O)

(2) Copper vessels not cleaned for a long time.
Answer:
If copper vessels are not cleaned for a long time, they react with moist carbon dioxide in the air, lose their shine and gain a green coat of copper carbonate. (CuCO3)

Question 3.
Silver ornaments or idols exposed to air for a long time.
Answer:
When silver ornaments or idols are kept exposed to air for a long time, silver reacts with sulphur in the air to form a coating of black silver sulphide. (Ag2S)

Question 4.
Old vehicles fit to be thrown away.
Answer:
The metallic parts of the body of old cars are corroded, eaten up and sometimes become perforated. The old cars also lose the original colour due to formation of flakes of rust.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 98)

Question 1.
In the reaction between chlorine and HBr a transformation or HBr into Br2 takes place. Can this transformation be called oxidation? What Is the oxidant that brings about this oxidation?
Answer:
The conversion of HBr to Br2 is an oxidation process. In the above reaction, Cl2 in the oxidant.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Can you tell? (Text Book Page No. 104)

Question 1.
what are the moderately reactive metals?
Answer:
In the middle of the reactivity series, metals such as iron. zinc, lead, copper are moderately reactive.

Question 2.
In which form to the moderately reactive metals occur in nature?
Answer:
The moderately reactive metals which occur in nature are in the form of their sulphide salts or carbonate salts.

Think about it (Text Book Page No. 106)

Question 1.
Why do silver articles turn blackish while copper vessels turn greenish on keeping in air for long time?
Answer:

  1. Silver articles turn blackish on exposure to air for a long time. This is because of silver sulphide (Ag2S) laver formed on the silver articles by the reaction of silver with hydrogen sulphide.
  2. Carbon dioxide in moist air reacts with copper vessel. Copper loses its lustre due to formation of greenish layer of copper carbonate (CuCO3) on its surface.

Question 2.
Why do pure gold and platinum always glitter?
Answer:
Gold and platinum are noble metals as they do not react with moisture, O2 and CO2 from air also acids and alkalis, therefore, pure gold and platinum always glitter.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 103)

Question 1.
Write the electrode reaction for electrolysis of molten magnesium chloride and calcium chloride.
Answer:
(1) Magnesium chloride (MgCl2):
MgCl2 → Mg2+ + 2Cl
At the cathode: Mg2+ + 2e → Mg
At the anode: 2Cl → Cl2 + 2e

(2) Calcium chloride (CaCl2):
At the cathode: Ca2+ + 2e → Ca
At the anode: 2Cl → Cl2 + 2e

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Can you tell? (Text Book Page No. 106)

Question 1.
Which measures would you suggest to stop the corrosion of metallic articles or not allow the corrosion to start?
Answer:
Various types of methods are used to protect metals from corrosion. Almost in all the methods, special attention is paid so that iron does not rust. It is possible to lower the rate of the process of rusting of iron. Corrosion of metals can be stopped by detaching the air from metals.

Some methods are as follows :

  1. To fix a layer of some substance on the metal surface so that the contact of the metal with moisture and oxygen in the air is prevented and no reaction would occur between them.
  2. To prevent corrosion of metals by applying a layer of paint, oil, grease or varnish on their surface. For example, corrosion of iron can be prevented by this method.

Question 2.
What is done so to prevent rusting of iron windows and iron doors of your house?
Answer:
To prevent rusting of iron windows and iron doors in the house, they are painted so that they do not rust.

Question 3.
What is done so to prevent rusting or iron windows and iron doors of your house?
Answer:
To prevent rusting of iron windows and iron doors in the house, they are painted so that they do not rust.

Use your brain power! (Text Book Page No. 107)

Question 1.
Can we permanently prevent the rusting of an iron article by applying a layer of paint on its surface?
Answer:
The method of painting is alright for some time. We cannot protect the articles permanently from rusting by painting them.

Question 2.
Why do new iron sheets appear shiny?
Answer:
The new iron sheets appear shiny because a layer of non-corrosionable metal is fixed on the surface of corrosionable metal.

Collect information. (Text Book Page No. 108)

Question 1.
What are the various alloys used in daily life? Where are those used?
Answer:

Various alloys Uses
1. Bronze It is used to prepare: Coins, utensils, medals, statues
2. Brass Pipes, condenser tubes, utensils worshipping God.
3. Stainless steel Utensils, tools, dairy equipment, boilers.
4. Steel Construction of bridges and buildings, cutting tools, blades.
5. Tungsten steel High speed cutting tools
6. Amalgam Silver amalgam used by dentists
7. Duralumin Bodies of aircraft, buses, kitchenwares
8. Aluminium bronze Pigment in ink and paint
9. German silver Electrical heaters, resistors
10. Gun metal Guns, boiler fittings
11. Magnelium Beams of scientific balances, aircraft parts.
12. Gold with copper or nickel or silver or platinum Jewellery

Question 2.
What are the properties that the alloy used for minting coins should have?
Answer:
The alloy used for minting coins should have excellent wear resistance and anti-corrosion properties.

Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
……………has the highest melting point.
Answer:
Tungsten has the highest melting point.

Question 2.
Mercury and…………are two metals in the liquid state at room temperature.
Answer:
Mercury and galium are two metals in the liquid state at room temperature.

Question 3.
…………is the hardest natural substance.
Answer:
Diamond is the hardest natural substance.

Question 4.
The naturally occurring compounds of metals along with other impurities are known as………….
Answer:
The naturally occurring compounds of metals along with other impurities are known as minerals.

Question 5.
The minerals from which metals are extracted profitably and conveniently are called…………..
Answer:
The minerals from which metals are extracted profitably and conveniently are called ores.

Question 6.
An ore contains some of the impurities like soil, sand, etc. These impurities are called…………
Answer:
An ore contains some of the impurities like soil, sand, etc. These impurities are called gangue.

Question 7.
The process of extraction of a metal from its ore is called……….
Answer:
The process of extraction of a metal from its ore is called metallurgy.

Question 8.
Bauxite is a common ore of………..
Answer:
Bauxite is a common ore of aluminium.

Question 9.
…………. process is used for the purification of bauxite.
Answer:
Bayer’s process is used for the purification of bauxite.

Question 10.
During the electrolysis of alumina, ………..is liberated at the anode.
Answer:
During the electrolysis of alumina, oxygen is liberated at the anode.

Question 11.
The reaction of iron oxide with aluminium is known as…………..reaction.
Answer:
The reaction of iron oxide with aluminium is known as thermit reaction.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 12.
The process of coating a thin layer of zinc on iron is known as…………
Answer:
The process of coating a thin layer of zinc on iron is known as galvanising.

Question 13.
The metal that produces a sound on striking a hard surface is said to be………….
Answer:
The metal that produces a sound on striking a hard surface is said to be sonorous.

Question 14.
The process in which carbonate ores are changed into oxides by heating strongly in limited air is known as …………….
Answer:
The process in which carbonate ores are changed into oxides by heating strongly in limited air is known as calcination.

Question 15.
…………compounds are insoluble in solvents like kerosene and petrol.
Answer:
Ionic compounds are insoluble in solvents like kerosene and petrol.

Question 16.
…………… is used to obtain pure metals from impure metals.
Answer:
Electrolys is method is used to obtain pure metals from impure metals.

Question 17.
Corrosion can be prevented-by putting a layer of…………metal on corrosionable metal.
Answer:
Corrosion can be prevented by putting a layer of non-corrosionable metal on corrosionable metal.

Rewrite the following statements by selecting the correct options:

Question 1.
………… is a metal.
(a) Mg
(b) S
(c) P
(d) Br
Answer:
Mg is a metal.

Question 2.
………. is a nonmetal.
(a) Au
(b) Hg
(c) Br
(d) Cu
Answer:
Br is a nonmetal.

Question 3.
………… is a metalloid.
(a) Aluminium
(b) Antimony
(c) Zinc
(d) Mercury
Answer:
Antimony is a metalloid.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 4.
Metalloids have properties of ………..
(a) metals
(b) nonmetals
(c) both metals and nonmetals
(d) neither metals nor nonmetals
Answer:
Metalloids have properties of both metals and nonmetals.

Question 5.
…………. is a good conductor of electricity.
(a) Bromine
(b) Iodine
(c) Graphite
(d) Sulphur
Answer:
Graphite is a good conductor of electricity.

Question 6.
………. is a metal which is in liquid form at ordinary temperature and pressure.
(a) Magnesium
(b) Sodium
(c) Scandium
(d) Mercury
Answer:
Mercury is a metal which is in liquid form at ordinary temperature and pressure.

Question 7.
………. is an amphoteric oxide.
(a) Na2O
(b) MgO
(c) ZnO
(d) SO2
Answer:
ZnO is an amphoteric oxide.

Question 8.
……….. is an acidic oxide.
(a) Na2O
(b) CO2
(c) FeO3
(d) H2O
Answer:
CO2 is an acidic oxide.

Question 9.
………. is a basic oxide.
(a) CO2
(b) K2O
(C) SO2
(d) Al2O3
Answer:
K2O is a basic oxide.

Question 10.
………… is an ore of aluminium.
(a) Cryolite
(b) Bauxite
(c) Haematite
(d) Aluminium carbonate
Answer:
Bauxite is an ore of aluminium.

Question 11.
Bronze is an alloy of ………..
(a) copper and tin
(b) copper and zinc
(c) copper and iron
(d) iron and nickel
Answer:
Bronze is an alloy of copper and tin.

Question 12.
An alloy prepared from iron, nickel and chromium is known as …………
(a) brass
(b) bronze
(c) stainless steel
(d) amalgam
Answer:
An alloy prepared from iron, nickel and chromium is known as stainless steel.

Question 13.
…………. is an allotropic form of a nonmetal which conducts electricity.
(a) Sulphur
(b) Graphite
(c) Chlorine
(d) Iodine
Answer:
Graphite is an allotropic form of a nonmetal which conducts electricity.

Question 14.
………….. has an oxide which is soluble in sodium hydroxide.
(a) Calcium
(b) Magnesium
(c) Iron
(d) Zinc.
Answer:
Zinc has an oxide which is soluble in sodium hydroxide.

Question 15.
………… prevents the rusting of iron.
(a) Copper
(b) Zinc
(c) Aluminium
(d) Silver
Answer:
Zinc prevents the rusting of iron.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 16.
………….. is obtained by the reduction of its oxide by carbon.
(a) Zinc
(b) Aluminium
(c) Sodium
(d) Potassium
Answer:
Zinc is obtained by the reduction of its oxide by carbon.

Question 17.
………….. is used as an anode during the electrolytic reduction of bauxite.
(a) Sulphur
(b) Graphite
(c) Platinum
(d) Aluminium
Answer:
Graphite is used as an anode during the electrolytic reduction of bauxite.

Question 18.
Silver gets corroded due to ………… in air.
(a) oxygen
(b) hydrogen sulphide
(c) carbon dioxide
(d) nitrogen
Answer:
Silver gets corroded due to hydrogen sulphide in air.

Question 19.
…………. is the hardest substance and has the highest melting and boiling points.
(a) Iodine
(b) Sulphur
(c) Diamond
(d) Phosphorus
Answer:
Diamond is the hardest substance and has the highest melting and boiling points.

Question 20.
Jewellery articles are gold plated ………….
(a) to prevent corrosion
(b) to prevent rusting of the base metal
(c) to make articles attractive
(d) all of these
Answer:
(d) all of these

Question 21.
To show that zinc is more reactive than copper, the correct procedure is to ………..
(a) prepare copper sulphate solution and dip a zinc strip in it
(b) prepare zinc sulphate solution and dip a copper strip in it
(c) heat together zinc and copper strips
(d) add dil. nitric acid to both the strips
Answer:
To show that zinc is more reactive than copper, the correct procedure is to prepare copper sulphate solution and dip a zinc strip in it.

Question 22.
Iron is ………
(a) more reactive than zinc
(b) more reactive than aluminuium
(c) less reactive than copper
(d) less reactive than aluminium
Answer:
Iron is less reactive than aluminium.

Question 23.
A solution of Al2(SO4)3 in water is …………
(a) blue
(b) pink
(c) green
(d) colourless
Answer:
A solution of Al2(SO4)3 in water is colourless.

Question 24.
A solution of ………… in water is blue in colour.
(a) CuSO4
(b) FeSO4
(c) ZnSO4
(d) Al2(SO4)3
Answer:
A solution of CuSO4 in water is blue in colour.

Question 25.
A solution of …………. n water is green in colour.
(a) CuSO4
(b) FeSO4
(c) ZnSO4
(d) Al2(SO4)3
Answer:
A solution of FeSO4 in water is green in colour.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 26.
What would be the correct order if Zn, Fe, Al and Cu are arranged in increasing order of reactivity?
(a) Cu, Fe, Zn, Al
(b) Al, Cu, Fe, Zn
(c) Zn, Al, Cu, Fe
(d) Fe, Zn, Al, Cu (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
(a) Cu, Fe, Zn, Al

Question 27.
During the extraction of aluminium ……….
(a) Ingredients and gangue in bauxite
(b) Use of leaching during the concentration of ore
(c) Chemical reaction of transformation of bauxite into alumina by Hall’s process.
(d) Heating the aluminium ore with concentrated caustic soda.
Answer:
During the extraction of aluminium Chemical reaction of transformation of bauxite into alumina by Hall’s process.

Question 28.
A solution of CuSO4 in water is ………… in colour.
(a) pink
(b) blue
(c) colourless
(d) green
Answer:
A solution of CuSO4 in water is blue in colour.

Question 29.
Which of the following process is to be carried out to avoid the formation of greenish layer on brass vessels due to corrosion?
(a) Plating
(b) Anodization
(c) Tinning
(d) Alloying (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Answer:
(c) Tinning

State whether the following statements are True or False (If a statement is false, correct it and rewrite it.):

Question 1.
Metals are known as sonar metals.
Answer:
True.

Question 2.
Diamond is the softest natural substance.
Answer:
False. (Diamond is the hardest natural substance.)

Question 3.
Electrolysis method is used to obtain pure metals from impure metals.
Answer:
True.

Question 4.
Iodine and diamond are lustrous substances.
Answer:
True.

Question 5.
Aqua Regia is a mixture of conc. HCl and conc. HNO3 in the ratio of 1:3.
Answer:
False. (Aqua Regia is a mixture of conc. HCl and conc. HNO3 in the ratio of 3:1.)

Question 6.
Corrosion of metals can be stopped by detaching the air from metals.
Answer:
True.

Question 7.
Due to corrosion a greenish layer forms on the surface of copper or brass vessel.
Answer:
True.

Question 8.
Ionic compounds are soluble in kerosene.
Answer:
False. (Ionic compounds are soluble in water and insoluble in kerosene.)

Question 9.
Ionic compounds in the solid state conduct electricity.
Answer:
False. (Ionic compounds in the solid state do not conduct electricity.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 10.
Mercury, silver and gold are very reactive metals.
Answer:
False. (Mercury, silver and gold are least reactive metals.)

Question 11.
In electroplating a metal is coated with another metal using electrolysis.
Answer:
True.

Question 12.
In anodising method. the copper or aluminium article is used as anode.
Answer:
True.

Question 13.
Silver plated spoon, gold plated ornaments are the examples of alloying.
Answer:
False. (Silver plated spoon, gold plated ornaments are the examples of electroplating)

Question 14.
silver amalgam is mainly used by dentists.
Answer:
True.

Question 15.
Aluminium oxide is an acidic oxide.
Answer:
False. (Aluminium oxide is an amphoteric oxide.)

Question 16.
copper reacts with moist carbon form copper carbonate.
Answer:
True.

Question 17.
Corrosion is degradation of a reaction with its environment.
Answer:
True.

Find the correlation in the given pair and rewrite the answer:

Question 1.
Brass : Copper and Zinc :: Bronze :………….
Answer:
Brass : Copper and Zinc :: Bronze : Copper and tin

Question 2.
Tinning : Tin :: Galvanizing :…………….
Answer:
Tinning : Tin :: Galvanizing : Zinc

Question 3.
Pressure cooker : Anodizing :: Silver plated spoons :…………..
Answer:
Pressure cooker : Anodizing :: Silver plated spoons : Electro-plating

Question 4.
The sulphides ores are strongly heated in air : Roasting :: The carbonates ores are strongly heated in a limited supply of air :………….
Answer:
The sulphides ores are strongly heated in air : Roasting :: The carbonates ores are strongly heated in a limited supply of air : Calcination.

Question 5.
Sulphide ores : Froth floatation method : Cassiterite ore :………..
Answer:
Sulphide ores : Froth floatation method : Cassiterite ore : Magnetic separation method.

Find the odd one out:

Question 1.
Sodium, Potassium, Silver, Sulphur
Answer:
Sulphur. (All except sulphur, others are metals.)

Question 2.
Boron, Chlorine, Bromine, Fluorine
Answer:
Boron. (All except boron, others are nonmetals.)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 3.
Copper, Iron, Mercury, Brass
Answer:
Brass. (All except brass, others are metals.)

Question 4.
Brass, Bronze, Phosphorus, Stainless steel
Answer:
Phosphorus. (All except phosphorus, others are alloys.)

Question 5.
Magnesium chloride, Sodium chloride, Water, Zinc chloride
Answer:
Water. (All except water, others are ionic compounds.)

Question 6.
Tinning, Anodization, Alloying, Froth floatation (March 2019)
Answer:
Froth floatation. (All except froth floatation, others are processes of coating a thin layer of metal on the surface of other metals.)

Match the following:

Question 1.

Column I Column II
(1) ZnS (a) Cuprous sulphide
(2) HgS (b) Bauxite
(3) Cu2S (c) Zinc blend
(4) Al2O3.H2O (d) Cinnabar
(e) Cryolite

Answer:
(1) ZnS – Zinc blend
(2) HgS – Cinnabar
(3) Cu4S – Cuprous sulphide
(4) Al2O3.H2O – Bauxite.

Question 2.

Column I Column II
(1) Copper and zinc (a) Stainless steel
(2) Copper and tin (b) Zinc amalgam
(3) Iron, nickel and chromium (c) Bronze
(4) Mercury and zinc (d) Brass
(e) Steel

Answer:
(1) Copper and zinc – Brass
(2) Copper and tin – Bronze
(3) Iron, nickel and chromium – Stainless steel
(4) Mercury and zinc – Zinc amalgam.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 3.

Column I Column II
(1) Galvanising (a) Pressure cooker
(2) Tinning (b) Silver plated spoons
(3) Electroplating (c) Coating of tin on copper
(4) Anodizing (d) Coating of Zn on iron

Answer:
(1) Galvanising – Coating of Zn on iron
(2) Tinning – Coating of tin on copper
(3) Electroplating – Silver plated spoons
(4) Anodizing – Pressure cooker.

Translate the following statements into chemical equations and then balance them:

Question 1.
steam is passed over aluminium.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 9

Question 2.
Extraction of copper from its sulphide ore.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 10
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 11

Question 3.
Thermit reaction.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 12

Question 4.
Magnesium reacts with hot water.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 13

Question 5.
what happens when aluminium oxide dissolves in aqueous sodium hydroxide?
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 14

Question 6.
Zinc reacts with sulphuric acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 15

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 7.
Iron reacts with sulphuric acid.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 16

Name the following:

Question 1.
A metal which forms an amphoteric oxide.
Answer:
Aluminium forms an amphoteric oxide.

Question 2.
An alloy of copper and zinc.
Answer:
An alloy of copper and zinc is termed as brass.

Question 3.
A compound which is added to lower the fusion temperature.
Answer:
Cryolite (AlF3, 3NaF) and fluorspar (CaF2) are added to lower the fusion temperature.

Question 4.
A metal which does not react with cold water but reacts with steam.
Answer:
Aluminium does not react With cold water but reacts with Steam.

Question 5.
A common ore of aluminium.
Answer:
Bauxite (Al2O3.H2O) is a common ore of aluminium.

Question 6.
A metal which is in liquid state at ordinary temperature.
Answer:
Mercury is in liquid state at ordinary temperature.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 7.
Two metals which are malleable.
Answer:
Iron and aluminium are malleable metals.

Question 8.
Two metals which are ductile.
Answer:
Gold and silver are ductile metals.

Question 9.
Two metals which are good conductors of heat.
Answer:
Silver and copper are good conductors of heat.

Question 10.
Two metals which are good conductors of electricity.
Answer:
Copper and aluminium are good conductors of electricity.

Question 11.
Two metals which are used for making cooking vessels.
Answer:
Copper and aluminium are used in making cooking vessels.

Question 12.
Two metals having low melting points.
Answer:
Sodium and potassium have low melting points.

Question 13.
Two highly reactive metals.
Answer:
Sodium and potassium are highly reactive metals.

Question 14.
A nonmetal which is in liquid state at room temperature.
Answer:
Bromine is in liquid state at room temperature.

Question 15.
Two ionic compounds.
Answer:
Sodium chloride (NaCl) and magnesium chloride (MgCl2) are ionic compounds.

Question 16.
The process of heating the sulphide ore to a high temperature in the excess of air.
Answer:
In roasting, sulphide ore is heated to a high temperature in the excess of air.

Question 17.
The process of heating the carbonate ore to a high temperature in limited air.
Answer:
In calcination, carbonated ore is heated to a high temperature in limited air.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 18.
The compound formed by the reaction between aluminium oxide and sodium hydroxide.
Answer:
Sodium aluminate is formed by the reaction between aluminium oxide and sodium hydroxide.

Question 19.
Two metals which are found in the free state in nature.
Answer:
Gold (Au) and silver (Ag) are found in the free state in nature.

Question 20.
A metal which has the highest melting point.
Answer:
Tungsten has the highest melting point.

Question 21.
Two nonmetals which are lustrous.
Answer:
Iodine and diamond are lustrous in nature.

Answer the following questions in one sentence each:

Question 1.
State the property of the metals due to which they can be drawn into wires.
Answer:
The property of the metal due to which they can be drawn into wires is called ductility.

Question 2.
State the property of the metals due to which they can be beaten into thin sheets.
Answer:
The property of the metals due to which they can be beaten into thin sheets is called malleability.

Question 3.
Which is the hardest substance?
Answer:
Diamond which is a form of carbon is the hardest substance.

Question 4.
What material is used to coat electrical wires?
Answer:
PVC (Polyvinyl chloride) is used to coat electrical wires.

Question 5.
State two metals which can be cut easily with a knife.
Answer:
Sodium and potassium are soft metals and can be cut easily with a knife.

Question 6.
Which of the following metals react with cold water?
Sodium, iron, copper, potassium.
Answer:
Sodium and potassium metals react with cold water.

Question 7.
Which of the following metals do not react with cold water or hot water?
Sodium, potassium, aluminium, iron.
Answer:
Aluminium and iron do not react with cold water or hot water.

Question 8.
State two metals which displace hydrogen from dilute acids and two metals which do not do so.
Answer:
Metals which displace hydrogen from dilute acids are: Magnesium and zinc.
Metals which do not displace hydrogen from dilute acids are: Copper and silver.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 9.
Arrange the following metals in the increasing order of their activity:
Copper, Silver, Aluminium, Iron. (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Answer:
The arrangement of metals in the increasing order of their activity:
Silver < Copper < Iron < Aluminium

Question 10.
Write the chemical equation for the reaction of hot iron with steam.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 17

Question 11.
Complete the following reactions:
(1) Zn(s) + H2O(g) → _____________
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 18
Answer:
(1) Zn(s) + H2O(g) → ZnO(s) + H2(g)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 19

Question 12.
Complete the following reactions:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 20
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 21

Question 13.
3MnO2 + 4Al → 3Mn + 2Al2O3 + heat.
Identify the substances undergone oxidation and reduction reactions.
Answer:
MnO2 is reduced to Mn.
Al is oxidised to Al2O3

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 14.
State the impurities present in the bauxite ore.
Answer:
The main impurities present in the bauxite ore are silica (SiO2) and iron oxide (Fe2O3).

Question 15.
Write the formula of (i) bauxite (ii) cryolite.
Answer:
The formula of bauxite is Al2OH2O and that of cryolite is (Na3AlF6).

Question 16.
What is galvanization?
Answer:
The process of coating a thin layer of zinc on iron or steel is called galvanization.

Question 17.
Name the reaction in which aluminium is used as a reducing agent.
Answer:
The thermite reaction in which iron oxide is reduced by aluminium. Aluminium is used as a reducing agent in the thermit reaction.

Question 18.
What are the constituents of bronze?
Answer:
Copper and tin are the constituents of bronze.

Question 19.
State the term used to express the purity of gold.
Answer:
The purity of gold is expressed in carat.

Question 20.
What is meant by amalgam?
Answer:
The amalgam is an alloy in which one of the metals is mercury.

Question 21.
What is meant by electroplating?
Answer:
A process in which a less reactive metal is coated on a more reactive metal by electrolysis is called electroplating.

Question 22.
Why are metals called electropositive elements?
Answer:
Metals are reactive. They lose electrons and become positively charged ions. Therefore, metals are called electropositive elements.

Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
Distinguish between the physical properties of metals and nonmetals with respect to the following points:
(1) Physical state (2) Lustre (3) Ductility and malleability (4) Conduction of heat and electricity (5) Hardness (6) Melting and boiling points.
Answer:
(1) Physical state: Under ordinary conditions, metals are generally solids. Exceptions: mercury and gallium are liquids. Under ordinary conditions, nonmetals may be solids or gases. Exception: bromine is in liquid state.

(2) Lustre: Metals usually have a high lustre (called metallic lustre). They can be polished to give a highly reflective surface. With the exceptions of gold and copper, metals usually have silvery grey colour. Nonmetals lack lustre, exceptions: graphite and iodine. Some nonmetals are colourless and others possess a variety of colours.

(3) Ductility and malleability: Metals are ductile and malleable. Nonmetals are not ductile and mallfeable.

(4) Conduction of heat and electricity: Metals are good conductors of heat and electricity. Nonmetals are bad conductors of heat and electricity. Exception: Graphite is a good conductor of electricity.

(5) Hardness: Metals are usually hard, but not brittle, exceptions: sodium, potassium, lead, zinc. Nonmetals are brittle in the solid state, exception: diamond.

(6) Melting and boiling points: The melting and boiling points of metals are high, exceptions: sodium, potassium, mercury, gallium. The melting and boiling points of nonmetals are low, exceptions: carbon, silicon.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 2.
Write any three physical properties of nonmetals.
Answer:

  1. Nonmetals may be solid or gaseous.
  2. Nonmetals lack lustre. They are not ductile and malleable.
  3. The melting and boiling points of nonmetals are low.
  4. Nonmetals are bad conductors of heat and electricity.

Question 3.
Metals are good conductors of heat. Explain why.
Answer:
(1) The electrons in the outermost shells of atoms of a metal are free to move throughout the metal.
(2) When a metal is heated, these electrons start moving with higher velocity and conduct heat. Hence, metals are good conductors of heat.

Question 4.
Metals are good conductors of electricity. Explain why.
Answer:
(1) The electrons in the outermost shells of atoms of a metal are free to move throughout the metal.
(2) When a potential difference is applied between the ends of a metal wire, the net movement of the electrons in a particular direction, from a point at lower potential to a point at higher potential, constitutes an electric current. Hence, metals are good conductors of electricity.

Question 5.
A metal can be drawn into a wire. Explain why.
Answer:

  1. The property due to which a substance can be drawn into a thin wire without cracking or breaking is called ductility.
  2. Metals are ductile. Thus, a metal can be drawn into a wire.

Question 6.
A metal can be hammered into a thin sheet. Explain why.
Answer:

  1. The property due to which a substance can be hammered (or rolled) into a thin sheet without cracking is called malleability.
  2. Metals are malleable. Thus, a metal can be hammered to form a thin sheet.

Question 7.
How do metals react with oxygen?
Answer:
Metals combine with oxygen on heating in air and metal oxides are formed.
Metal + Oxygen → Metal oxide
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 22

Question 8.
How does a metal react with water?
Answer:
Sodium and potassium react vigorously with water to evolve hydrogen. Calcium reacts with water slowly and less vigorously to evolve hydrogen and the metal floats on water. Magnesium reacts with hot water to evolve hydrogen. Aluminium, iron and zinc do not react with cold or hot water but they react with steam to evolve their oxides and hydrogen.
2Na(s) + 2H2O(l) → 2NaOH(aq) + H2(g) + heat energy
2K(s) + 2H2O(l) → 2KOH(aq) + H2(g) + heat energy
2Ca(s) + 2H2O(l) → 2Ca(OH)2(aq) + H2(g)
Mg(s) + 2H2O(hot) → Mg(OH)2(aq) + H2(g)
2Al(s) + 3H2O steam → Al2O3(s) + 3H2(g)
3Fe(s) + 4H2O steam → Fe3O4 + 4H2(g)
Zn(s) + H2O steam → ZnO(s) + H2(g)

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 9.
(9) How does a metal react with an acid?
Answer:
Reaction of metals with acids: Metals react with dilute hydrochloric acid or dilute sulphuric acid to form metal chloride or metal sulphate and hydrogen gas. The rate of evolution of H2 is maximum in case of magnesium. The reactivity decreases in the order
Mg > Al > Zn > Fe.
Mg(s) + 2HCl(aq) → MgCl2(s) + H2(g)
2Al(s) + 6HCl(aq) → 2AlCl3(aq) + 3H2(g)
Zn(s) + 2HCl(aq) → ZnCl2(aq) + H2(g)
Fe(s) + 2HCl(aq) → FeCl2(aq) + H2(g)
Fe(s) + H2SO4(aq) → FeSO4 + H2(g)
Zn(s) + H2SO4(aq) → ZnSO4 + H2(g)
Mg(s) + H2SO4(aq) → MgSO4(aq) + H2(g)

Question 10.
How does a metal react with nitric acid?
Answer:
Metals react with nitric acid to form nitrate salts. Depending on the concentration of nitric acid, various oxides of nitrogen (NO, NO2) are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 23

Question 11.
Arrange the following metals in the decreasing order of chemical reactivity:
Cu, Mg, Fe, Ca, Zn, Na.
Answer:
The reactivity of metal decreases in the following order:
Na > Mg > Ca > Zn > Fe > Cu.

Question 12.
What is meant by aqua regia?
Answer:
Aqua regia is a highly corrosive and fuming liquid. It is a freshly prepared mixture of conc. HCl and conc. HNO3 in the ratio of 3:1. Most of the substances dissolve in it. Aqua regia is a reagent which dissolves gold and platinum.

Question 13.
How does a metal react with salts of other metals?
Answer:
The reaction of metals with solutions of salts of other metals is the displacement reaction. If a metal A displaces other metal B from the solution of its salt, it means that the metal A is more reactive than the metal B.
Metal A + Salt solution of metal B → Salt solution of metal A + metal B
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 24
In this reaction Fe has displaced Cu from CuSO4. It means Fe is more reactive than Cu.

Question 14.
Explain the reactivity series of the metals.
Answer:
The arrangement of metals in decreasing order of their reactivity in the form of a series is called the reactivity or activity series of the metals.
The most reactive metal is placed at the top of the list and least reactive metal is placed at the bottom of the list.

On the basis of reactivity, we can classify metals into the following categories:

  1. High reactivity metals
  2. Moderately reactive metals
  3. Less reactive metals.

1. Extraction of High reactivity metals: The metals which are placed at the top of the reactivity series are very reactive. They are never found in nature as free elements, e.g., sodium, potassium, calcium and aluminium. These metals are obtained by electrolytic reduction.

2. Extraction of Moderately reactive metals: The metals in the middle of reactivity series such as iron, zinc, lead, copper are moderately reactive. These elements are present as sulphides or carbonates in nature. Generally metals are obtained from their oxide as compared to their sulphides and carbonates.

3. Extraction of Less reactive metals: The metals which are placed at the bottom of the reactivity series are least reactive. They occur in free state, e.g. gold, silver and copper. Copper and silver are also found in the combined state as sulphide and oxide ores. These metals are obtained from their ores by just heating the ores in air.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 15.
Atomic number of metal “A” is 11, while atomic number of metal “B” is 20. Which of them will be more reactive? Write the chemical reaction of dilute HCl with metal “A”. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
Metal ‘A’ is more reactive than metal ‘B’.
Atomic number of metal ‘A’ is 11, hence it is Na.
2Na + 2HCl → 2NaCl(aq) + H2(g)

Question 16.
How does a metal react with a nonmetal?
Answer:
By oxidation of a metal, cations are formed, on the other hand by reduction of a nonmetal, anions are formed. The ionic compound is formed due to the metal losing electrons while the nonmetal accepts the electrons. The ionic compound of sodium chloride is formed as sodium loses one electron while chlorine accepts one electron.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 25
Similarly Mg and K form ionic compounds MgCl2 and KCl.

Question 17.
How do nonmetals react with oxygen?
Answer:
Nonmetals combine with oxygen to form acidic oxides. In some cases, neutral oxides are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 26

Question 18.
How do nonmetals react with water?
Answer:
Nonmetals do not react with water, (exception : halogen). Chlorine dissolves in water giving hypochlorous acid.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 27

Question 19.
How do nonmetals react with dilute acids?
Answer:
Nonmetals do not react with dilute acid, (exception: halogen). Chlorine reacts with dil. hydrobromic acid to form bromine and HCl.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 28

Question 20.
How do nonmetals react with hydrogen?
Answer:
Nonmetals react with hydrogen under certain conditions (such as proper temperature, pressure, catalyst, etc.)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 29

Question 21.
What is meant by an ionic compound?
Answer:
The compound formed from two units, namely cation and anion is called an ionic compound.

Question 22.
What is meant by an ionic bond?
Answer:
The cation and anion being oppositely charged, there is an electrostatic force of attraction between them, this force of attraction between cation and anion is called the ionic bond.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 23.
State the general properties of ionic compounds.
Answer:

  1. Ionic compounds are solids and hard due to strong electrostatic force of attraction between oppositely charged ions.
  2. They are generally brittle. When pressure is applied they break into pieces.
  3. They have high melting and boiling points, due to intermolecular force of attraction is high in ionic compounds.
  4. They are soluble in water and insoluble in solvents such as kerosene and petrol.
  5. Ionic compounds cannot conduct electricity when in solid state, they are electrically neutral. They conduct electricity in the molten state and also in an aqueous solution.

Question 24.
Explain the following terms:
1. Concentration of ores
2. Roasting
3. Calcination
4. Refining
Answer:
1. Concentration of ores: The process of separating gangue from the other ores is called concentration of ores.
2. Roasting: The process of heating an ore to a high temperature in excess of air and converting it into its oxide is called roasting.
Examples: ZnS (zinc blend), PbS (Galena)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 30
3. Calcination: The process of heating an ore in a limited supply of air and converting it into its oxide is called calcination.
Example: Zinc carbonate (ZnCO3)
ZnCO3 → ZnO + CO2
4. Refining: The metal obtained by chemical reduction contains impurities. The process of electrolysis method is used to obtain pure metals from impure metals is known as refining.

Question 25.
State two methods of concentration of ores in which the heavy particles of ores can be separated from the light gangue particles by the gravitational method.
Answer:

  1. Wilfley table method
  2. Hydraulic separation method are two methods of concentration of ores in which the heavy particles of ores can be separated from the light, gangue particles by the gravitational method.

Question 26.
What are the different methods used for removing gangue from ores?
(OR)
Write the five methods of concentration of ores.
Answer:

  1. Wilfley table method
  2. Hydraulic separation method
  3. Magnetic separation method
  4. Froth floatation method
  5. Leaching method.

Question 27.
Write short notes on: (1) Wilfley table method (2) Hydraulic separation method (3) Magnetic separation method (4) Froth floatation method (5) Leaching method.
Answer:
(1) Wilfley table method : (Separation based on gravitation) This method of separation uses the Wilfley table, it is made by fixing narrow and thin wooden wedges/blocks on inclined surface with low slope. The table is kept continuously vibrating.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 31
Lumps of the ore is made powdered ore by using ball mill. This powdered ore is poured on the table and a stream of water is simultaneously released from the upper side. This result in the lighter gangue particles getting carried away along with the flowing water, while the heavier particles in which proportion of minerals is more and proportion of gangue particles is less, are blocked by the wooden wedges and is collected through the slits between them.

(2) Hydraulic separation method: The hydraulic separation method is based on the working of a mill. This is a tapering vessel similar to that used in a grinding mill. It opens in a tank like a container that is tapering on the lower side. The tank has an outlet for water on the upper side and a water inlet on the lower side.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 32
Finely ground ore is added to the tank. A fast stream of water is released in the tank from the lower side. The lighter gangue particles flow out along with the water stream from the outlet on the upper side of the tank and are collected separately, simultaneously the heavy particles of the ore are collected at the bottom from the lower side of the tank. This method is based on the law of gravitation, wherein particles of the same size are separated by their weight with the help of water.

(3) Magnetic separation method: Electro-magnetic machine is used in this method. The main parts of this machine are two types of iron rollers and the conveyor belt continuously moving around them. One of the rollers is nonmagnetic while the other is electromagnetic. The conveyor belt moving around the rollers is made up of leather or brass (nonmagnetic). The powdered ore is poured at that end of the conveyor belt which is on the side of the nonmagnetic roller. Two collector vessels are placed below the magnetic roller.

The particles of the nonmagnetic part in the ore are not attracted towards the magnetic roller. Therefore, they are carried out further along the belt and fall in the collector vessel which is away from the magnetic roller. Simultaneously the particles of the magnetic ingredients of the ore stick to the magnetic roller and therefore fall in the collector vessel near the belt.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 33
In this way the magnetic and nonmagnetic particles in the ore are separated because of their magnetic nature. For example, cassiterite is a tin ore. It contains mainly the nonmagnetic ingredient stannic oxide (SnO2) and the magnetic ingredient ferrous tungstate (FeWO4). These are separated by the electromagnetic method.

(4) Froth floatation method: The froth floatation method is based on the two opposite properties, hydrophilic and hydrophobic, of the particles. The metal sulphides particles get wet mainly with oil due to their hydrophobic property. The gangue particles get wet with water due to the hydrophilic property.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 34
In this method the finely ground mineral is put into a big tank containing a lot of water. The finely powdered ore and vegetable oil such as pine oil, eucalyptus oil are mixed with water for formation of froth. The pressurised air is blown through the mixture. There is an agitator rotating around its axis in the centre of the floatation tank. The agitator is used as per the requirement. Bubbles are formed due to the blown air.

A foam is formed from oil, water and air bubbles together, due to the agitating. This foam rises to the surface of the water and floats. Hence this method is called froth floatation. Sulphide minerals float with the foam on water as they get and can be removed. The gangue particles are wetted by water, settles down at the bottom. This method is used for concentration of zinc blend (ZnS) and copper pyrite (CuFeS2).

(5) Leaching: Leaching is the first step in the extraction of the metals like aluminium, gold and silver from their ores. In this method the ore is soaked in a particular solution for long time. The ore dissolves in that solution due to specific chemical reaction. The gangue, however, does not react and therefore does not dissolve in that solution. It can be separated easily.

For example, concentration of bauxite, the aluminium ore, is done by leaching method. Bauxite is soaked in aqueous NaOH or aqueous Na2CO3 which dissolves the main ingredient alumina in it. This means that bauxite is leached by sodium hydroxide.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 28.
Draw a neat labelled diagram of the arrangement of the equipment used in (1) Wilfley table method (2) Hydraulic separation method.
Answer:
1. Wilfley table method:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 35

2. Hydraulic separation method:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 36

Question 29.
Complete the following flow chart and answer the questions below:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 37
(i) In which method pine oil is used?
(ii) Explain that method of concentration in brief. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 38
(i) Pine oil is used in froth floatation method.

(ii) The finely powdered ore and vegetable oil such as pine oil, eucalyptus oil are mixed with water for formation of froth. The pressurised air is blown through the mixture. The agitator is used as per the requirement. Bubbles are formed due to the blown air. A foam is formed from oil, water and air bubbles together, due to the agitating. This foam rises to the surface of the water and floats. Hence this method is called froth floatation. Sulphide minerals float with the foam on water as they get and can be removed. The gangue particles are wetted by water, settles down at the bottom. This method is used for concentration of zinc blend (ZnS) and copper pyrite (CuFeS2).

Question 30.
A tapping vessel opens in a tank like container that is tapering on the lower side. The tank has an outlet for water on the upper side and a water inlet on the lower side. Finely ground ore is released in the tank. A forceful jet of water is introduced in the tank from lower side and gangue particles and pure ore are separated by this method.
(i) The above description is of which gravitation separation method?
(ii) Draw labelled diagram of this method. (March 2019)
Answer:
(i) Hydraulic separation method.
(ii)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 39

Question 31.
How are sodium, magnesium and potassium obtained from their molten chloride salts?
Answer:
The metals sodium, calcium and magnesium are obtained by electrolysis of their molten chloride salts. In this process metal is deposited on the cathode while chlorine gas is liberated at the anode.

Question 32.
Name the main ore of aluminium.
Answer:
Bauxite (Al2O3·H2O) is the main ore of aluminium.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 33.
What is bauxite? What are the main impurities found in this ore?
Answer:
Bauxite (Al2O3·H2O) is hydrated aluminium oxide. It contains 30% to 70% Al2O3. The main impurities present in it are iron oxide (Fe2O3) and sand (SiO2).

Question 34.
From which ore is aluminium extracted? What are the stages in its extraction (give only names)?
Answer:
Aluminium is extracted from bauxite (Al2O3·nH2O). Stages id the extraction: (i) Concentration of ore, i.e., conversion of bauxite into alumina, (ii) Electrolytic reduction of alumina.

Question 35.
Describe Bayer’s process for concentration of bauxite.
Answer:
(1) Bayer’s process is used to obtain pure aluminium oxide from bauxite.
(2) Bauxite is then concentrated by chemical separation. Bauxite contains impurities like iron oxide (Fe2O3) and silica (SiO2).
(3) Bauxite ore is powdered and heated with sodium hydroxide under high pressure for 2 to 8 hours at 140 °C in the digester. The aluminium oxide being amphoteric in nature present in bauxite reacts with sodium hydroxide to form water soluble sodium aluminate. This means that bauxite leached by sodium hydroxide. Silica reacts with sodium hydroxide to form soluble sodium silicate. The basic iron oxide (Fe2O3) in the gangue remains unaffected. It is separated by filtration.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 40
(4) The filtrate containing sodium aluminate and sodium silicate is stirred with water and then cooling to 50° C. It is hydrolysed to give precipitate of aluminium hydroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 41
(5) Aluminium hydroxide is then filtered, washed with water, dried and then calcinated by heating at 1000 °C to get pure aluminium oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 42

Question 36.
Describe Hall’s process for concentration of bauxite.
Answer:
In Hall’s process the ore is powdered and then it is leached by heating with aqueous sodium carbonate in the digester to form water soluble sodium aluminate. Then the insoluble impurities are filtered opt. The filtrate is warmed and neutralised by passing carbon dioxide gas through it. This result in precipitation of aluminium hydroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 43
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 44
The precipitate of Al(OH)3 obtained in this processes is filtered, washed, dried and then calcinated by heating at 1000 °C to obtain alumina.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 45

Question 37.
Describe the process of preparation of aluminium by the electrolysis of alumina.
(OR)
Draw and label the diagram of electrolysis of alumina and explain the electrolytic reduction of alumina.
Answer:
Electrolytic reduction of alumina:
(1) The electrolytic cell consists of a rectangular steel tank lined from inside with graphite.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 46
(2) The carbon lining (graphite) acts as a cathode. The anode consists of graphite rods suspended in the molten electrolyte.
(3) Alumina has very high melting point ( > 2000 °C). The electrolysis of alumina is carried out at a low temperature by dissolving it in molten cryolite (Na3AlF6). The solution of alumina in cryolite and small amount of fluorspar (CaF2) is added in the mixture to lower its melting point up to 1000 °C.
(4) On passing an electric current, alumina is electrolysed.
(5) Molten aluminium is collected at the cathode, while oxygen gas is evolved at the anode.
The electrode reactions are shown below:
Al2O3 → 2Al3+ + 3O2-
Anode reaction: 2O2- → O2(g) + 4e
Cathode reaction: Al3+ + 3e → Al
The molten aluminium is heavier than the electrolyte. Therefore, it sinks to the bottom of the electrolyte and is removed from time to time. About 99% pure aluminium is obtained by this process. The oxygen gas liberated reacts with carbon anode and forms carbon dioxide. As the anode gets oxidised during the electrolysis of alumina, it has to be replaced from time to time.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 38.
In the extraction of aluminium:
(i) Name the process of concentration of bauxite.
Answer:
The process of concentration of bauxite is known as Bayer’s process.

(ii) Write the cathode reaction in electrolytic reduction of alumina.
Answer:
At the cathode: Al3+ + 3e → Al.

(iii) Write the function and formula of cryolite in the extraction of aluminium.
Answer:
Cryolite is added to the molten mixture of alumina to reduce the melting point to about 1000 °C.
The formula of cryolite is (Na3AlF6) or AlF3, 3NaF.

(iv) write an equation for the action of heat on aluminium hydroxide.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 47

(v) Draw the diagram of extraction of aluminium.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 48

(vi) Write the anode reaction in electrolytic reduction of alumina.
Answer:
Al2O3 → 2Al3+ + 3O2-
At Anode: 2O2- → O2(g) + 4e

(vii) Write the cathode reaction in electrolytic reduction of alumina.
Answer:
Al2O3 → 2Al3+ + 3O2-
Cathode: Al3+ + 3e → Al(l)

Question 39.
What happens when aluminium ore is heated with caustic soda? Write the balanced chemical equation for the same.
Answer:
When aluminium ore is heated with caustic soda solution under high pressure for 2 to 8 hours and at 140 °C to 150 °C, aluminium oxide from aluminium ore, being amphoteric in nature, dissolves in caustic soda solution to form sodium aluminate.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 49

Question 40.
How is zinc extracted from its ore zinc sulphide or zinc carbonate?
Answer:
The crude zinc sulphide ore is heated strongly in excess of air. Zinc sulphide is converted into zinc oxide. This process is known as roasting.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 50
(OR)
The crude zinc carbonate ore is heated strongly in limited supply of air. Zinc carbonate is converted into zinc oxide. This process is known as calcination.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 51
The zinc oxide is reduced to zinc by using a reducing agent such as carbon.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 52

Question 41.
How is copper extracted from its sulphide ore?
Answer:
Copper is found as cuprous sulphide (Cu2S) in nature. When Cu2S is heated in air, copper is obtained.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 53

Question 42.
How is mercury extracted from cinnabar?
(OR)
Extraction of mercury from its ore cinnabar and write the corresponding chemical reaction.
Answer:
Cinnabar is an ore of mercury. When cinnabar is heated (roasted), it is converted into mercuric oxide (HgO). Mercuric oxide is then reduced to mercury on further heating.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 54

Question 43.
Show the steps involved in the extraction of moderately reactive metals from their sulphide ores.
Answer:
Moderately reactive elements are present as sulphides or carbonates in nature.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 55

Question 44.
In the reactivity series of metals, some metals are misplaced. Rearrange these metals in the decreasing order of their reactivity.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 56
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 57

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 45.
Complete the table, if a metal reacts with the reagent then mark ✓ and if not then ✗.

Metal Ferrous
sulphate
Silver
nitrate
Copper
sulphate
Zinc
sulphate
Cu
Al

Answer:

Metal Ferrous
sulphate
Silver
nitrate
Copper
sulphate
Zinc
sulphate
Cu
Al

Question 46.
Explain the term corrosion with a suitable example.
(OR)
What is corrosion ?
Answer:
The process in which a metal is destroyed gradually by the action of air, moisture or a chemical (like an acid) on its surface is called corrosion.
(OR)
Corrosion is degradation of a material due to reaction with its environment.
The major problem of corrosion occurs with iron, as it is used as a structural material in construction, bridges, shipbuilding.
Iron gets covered by reddish brown flakes when exposed to atmosphere. This is an example of corrosion.

Question 47.
Explain the different methods to prevent corrosion of metals.
Answer:
(1) Corrosion of a metal can be prevented if the contact between metal and air is cut off.
(2) Corrosion of a metal is prevented by coating with something which does not allow moisture and oxygen to react with it.
(3) A layer of oil or paint or grease is applied on the surface of a metal to prevent corrosion. The rusting or corrosion of iron can be prevented by this method.
(4) Corrosion is also prevented by coating a corrosive metal with a noncorrosive metal. Galvanising, tinning, electroplating, anodising and alloying are the different methods in which a metal is coated with a noncorrosive metal to prevent corrosion.

Question 48.
Write three methods of preventing rusting of iron.
Answer:

  1. The rusting of iron can be prevented by painting, oiling, greasing or varnishing its surface.
  2. Galvanisation is another method of protecting iron from rusting by coating iron with a thin layer of zinc.
  3. Corrosion of iron is prevented by coating iron with noncorrosive substance like carbon. This process is termed as alloying.

Question 49.
What is meant by an alloy? Give two examples with chemical composition.
Answer:
The homogeneous mixture formed by mixing a metal with other metals or nonmetals in certain proportion is called an alloy.
Examples:
1. Bronze: Bronze is an alloy formed from 90% copper and 10% tin. Bronze statues stay well in sun and rain.
2. Stainless steel: Stainless steel alloy is made from 74% iron, 18% chromium and 8% carbon. This alloy does not get stained with air or water and does not rust.

Write short notes on the following:

Question 1.
Galvanizing.
Answer:
(1) The process of coating a thin layer of zinc on iron or steel is called galvanization.
(2) In this method corrosion of zinc occurs first because zinc is more electropositive than iron. After a few years zinc layer goes away and the iron layer gets exposed and starts rusting.
(3) In galvanization an iron object is dipped into molten zinc. A thin layer of zinc is formed all over the iron object. Examples: Shiny iron nails, pin, iron pipes.

Question 2.
Tinning.
Answer:
The process of coating a thin layer of tin (molten tin) on copper or brass is called tinning. Cooking vessels made of copper and brass get a greenish coating due to corrosion. The greenish substance is copper carbonate and it is poisonous. If buttermilk or curry is placed in such a vessel it gets spoiled. Therefore, these vessels are coated with tin to prevent corrosion.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 3.
Electroplating.
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 58
The process in which a less reactive metal is coated on a more reactive metal by electrolysis is called electroplating.
Examples: Silver-plated spoon, gold-plated jewellery.
(1) Which process will you study with the help of above material and solutions.
Answer:
With the help of above material and solutions, electroplating process is studied.

(2) Define the process.
Answer:
The process in which less reactive metal is coated on a more reactive metals by electrolysis is called electroplating.

(3) Write the anode and cathode reactions.
Answer:
At anode: Ag → Ag+ + e
At cathode: Ag+ + e → Ag

Question 4.
Anodizing.
(OR)
Identify the process shown in the above diagram and explain it in brief. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 59
Answer:
The anodizing technique is an application of electrolysis. In this method copper or aluminium article is used as anode and it is coated with a strong film of their oxides by means of electrolysis. This oxide layer is strong and uniform all over the surface. This thin film protects the metals from corrosion. The protection can be further increased by making the oxide layer thicker during the anodization.
Examples: Kitchen articles such as ; anodized pressure cooker and anodized pan.

Question 5.
Alloying.
Answer:
A homogenous mixture of two or more metals or a metal and a nonmetal in a definite proportion is called an alloy. The physical properties of an alloy are different from those of its constituents. Alloys are corrosion resistant. Alloy decreases the intensity of corrosion of metals.

Examples: Brass is made from copper and zinc, 90 % Copper and 10 % tin are used to make an alloy called bronze, Stainless steel is made from 74% iron, 8 % carbon and 18 % chromium.

Distinguish between: (Two points of distinction)

Question 1.
Metals and Nonmetals.
Answer:
Metals:

  1. Metals have a lustre.
  2. They are generally good conductors of heat and electricity.
  3. They are generally solids at room temperature.
    Exception: Mercury and gallium are liquids.
  4. Metals form basic oxides.

Nonmetals:

  1. Nonmetals have no lustre.
    Exception: Iodine and Diamond.
  2. They are bad conductors of heat and electricity.
    Exception: Graphite.
  3. They are generally gases and solids at room temperature.
    Exception: Bromine is a liquid.
  4. Nonmetals form acidic or neutral oxides.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 2.
Roasting and Calcination.
Answer:
Roasting:

  1. In this process, the ore is heated strongly in the presence of air.
  2. In this process, sulphide ore is converted into metal oxide.
  3. During this process SO2 is given out.

Calcination:

  1. In this process, the ore is heated strongly in the limited supply of air.
  2. In this process, carbonate ore is converted into metal oxide.
  3. During this process CO2 is given out.

Give scientific reasons for the following:

Question 1.
Calcium floats on water during the reaction with water.
Answer:

  1. Calcium reacts with water less vigorously hence the heat evolved is not sufficient for hydrogen to catch fire.
  2. Instead, calcium floats on water because the bubbles of hydrogen gas formed stick to the surface of the metal.

Question 2.
Common salt has high melting and boiling points.
Answer:

  • Common salt is an ionic compound. Common salt is solid and hard due to strong electrostatic attraction between oppositely charged Na+ and Cl- ions.
  • A large amount of energy is required to break the strong intermolecular attraction (strong ionic bond). Hence, common salt has high melting and boiling points.

Question 3.
Metals are good conductors, while non-metals are poor conductors of electricity.
Answer:

  • The electrons in the outermost orbit of atoms of a metal are free to move throughout the metal.
  • When a potential difference is applied between the ends of a metal wire, the movement of the electrons constitutes an electric current. Hence, metals are good conductors of electricity.
  • Nonmetals involve covalent bonding and do not have free electrons like metals. Hence, nonmetals are poor conductors of electricity.

Question 4.
Sodium is more reactive than aluminium.
Answer:

  • If the number of electrons in the outermost orbit of an atom of a metal is less, the metal is more reactive.
  • Sodium has electronic configuration (2, 8, 1) and aluminium has electronic configuration (2, 8, 3). The number of electrons in the outermost orbit of sodium and aluminium atoms are 1 and 3, respectively. Hence, sodium is more reactive than aluminium.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 5.
When zinc granules are added to copper sulphate solution, the blue coloured solution turns colourless.
Answer:

  • Zinc is more reactive than copper.
  • When zinc granules are added to copper sulphate solution, they displace copper from the copper sulphate solution to form zinc sulphate solution. As zinc sulphate is colourless, the blue coloured solution of copper sulphate disappears.

Question 6.
When an iron nail is dipped into a copper solution, a shiny coat of copper is formed on the nail.
Answer:

  • Iron is more reactive than copper.
  • When an iron nail is dipped into copper sulphate solution, iron displaces copper from the copper sulphate solution. The copper so liberated deposits on the iron nail. As a result, a shiny coat of copper is formed on the nail.

Question 7.
Cryolite (Na3AlF6) and fluorspar (CaF2) are added to the electrolytic mixture containing pure alumina.
Answer:
(1) Alumina has very high melting point ( > 2000 °C). Cryolite (Na3AlF6) and fluorspar (CaF2) lower the fusion temperature of the mixture containing alumina from 2000 ° C to 1000 ° C, thereby saving electrical energy.
(2) They increase the conductivity and the mobility of the fused mixture. Hence, cryolite and fluorspar are added to the electrolytic mixture containing pure alumina.

Question 8.
Air is bubbled through the mixture in Froth floatation process.
Answer:
(1) In the froth floatation process, in a tank water, ore and an oil are mixed. When air is bubbled through the mixture the oil forms froth.
(2) The mineral particles are wetted by the oil and float on the surface.
(3) The gangue particles are wetted by water and settle down. Hence, the ore can be concentrated. Hence, air is bubbled through the mixture in froth floatation process.

Question 9.
Silver amalgam is used for filling dental cavities.
Answer:
(1) Silver is a soft metal and wears off on constant usage particularly due to abrasion. Silver amalgam is an alloy of silver with mercury.
(2) It is a hard substance. It is nontoxic. Besides these properties it is a lustrous shining substance. It melts at a comparatively low temperature and can therefore conveniently fill in the cavities. Hence, silver amalgam is used for filling dental cavities.

Explain the following reactions with the help of balanced equations:

Question 1.
Out of sodium and sulphur which is a metal? Explain its reaction with oxygen. (March 2019)
Answer:
Sodium is a metal. Sodium reacts with oxygen in air at room temperature to form sodium oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 60

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 2.
Magnesium burns in air.
Answer:
When magnesium bums in air, it combines with oxygen, emitting intense light and heat to form magnesium oxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 61

Question 3.
Copper reacts with air.
Answer:
Copper tarnishes in moist air and forms black coloured oxide when strongly heated.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 62

Question 4.
Sodium reacts with water.
Answer:
When sodium reacts with water, it evolves hydrogen which immediately catches fire producing a lot of heat.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 63

Question 5.
Calcium reacts with water.
Answer:
Calcium reacts with water less vigorously to form hydrogen gas and calcium hydroxide. In this reaction, the heat evolved is not sufficient for hydrogen to catch fire.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 64

Question 6.
Steam is passed over aluminium.
Answer:
When steam is passed over aluminium, hydrogen gas and aluminium oxide are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 65

Question 7.
Steam is passed over iron.
Answer:
When steam is passed over iron, iron (III) oxide and hydrogen gas are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 66

Question 8.
Magnesium reacts with dil. hydrochloric acid.
Answer:
When magnesium reacts with dil. hydrochloric acid, magnesium chloride is formed and hydrogen gas is evolved.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 67

Question 9.
Aluminium is treated with dil. hydrochloric acid.
Answer:
When aluminium is treated with dil. hydrochloric acid, aluminium chloride and hydrogen gas are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 68

Question 10.
Zinc reacts with dil. hydrochloric acid.
Answer:
When zinc reacts with dil. hydrochloric acid, zinc chloride and hydrogen gas are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 69

Question 11.
Iron is treated with dil. hydrochloric acid.
Answer:
When iron reacts with dil. hydrochloric acid, ferrous chloride and hydrogen gas is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 70

Question 12.
Copper is reacted with cone, nitric acid.
Answer:
When copper is reacted with cone, nitric acid, copper nitrate and reddish brown nitrogen dioxide are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 71

Question 13.
Copper is reacted with dil. nitric acid.
Answer:
When copper is reacted with dil. nitric acid, copper nitrate and nitric oxide are formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 72

Question 14.
Sodium metal is reacted chlorine gas.
Answer:
When sodium metal is reacted with chlorine, sodium chloride an ionic compound is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 73

Question 15.
Sulphur burns in air.
Answer:
When sulphur burns in air, it combines with oxygen to form acidic sulphur dioxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 74

Question 16.
Chlorine dissolves in water.
Answer:
When chlorine dissolves in water, hypochlorous acid is formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 75

Question 17.
Chlorine is treated with hydrobromic acid.
Answer:
When chlorine is treated with hydrobromic acid, chlorine displaces bromine from hydrobromic acid.
Cl2(g) + 2HBr(aq) → 2HCl(aq) + Br2(aq)

Question 18.
Hydrogen gas is passed over boiling sulphur.
Answer:
When hydrogen gas is passed over boiling sulphur, sulphur combines with hydrogen to form hydrogen sulphide which has rotten egg smell.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 76

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Question 19.
Sodium aluminate is treated with water.
Answer:
When sodium aluminate is treated with water, it is hydrolysed to give a precipitate of aluminium hydroxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 77

Question 20.
Dry aluminium hydroxide is ignited at 1000 °C.
Answer:
When dry aluminium hydroxide is ignited at 1000 °C, alumina (Al2O3) formed.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 78

Question 21.
Zinc sulphide is heated strongly in excess of air.
Answer:
When zinc sulphide is heated strongly in excess of air, it forms zinc oxide and sulphur dioxide gas.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 79

Question 22.
Zinc carbonate is heated strongly in a limited supply of air.
Answer:
When zinc carbonate is heated strongly in a limited supply of air, it gives zinc oxide and carbon dioxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 80

Question 23.
Zinc oxide is treated with carbon.
Answer:
When zinc oxide is treated with carbon, it is reduced to zinc. In this reaction, carbon acts as reducing agent.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 81

Question 24.
Manganese dioxide is heated with aluminium.
Answer:
When manganese dioxide is heated with aluminium, manganese dioxide is reduced to manganese and large amount of heat is evolved.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 82

Question 25.
Cinnabar is heated in air.
Answer:
When cinnabar is heated in air, it forms mercuric oxide and sulphur dioxide.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 83

Question 26.
Cuprous sulphide is heated in air.
Answer:
When cuprous sulphide is heated in air, cuprous oxide is formed. Cuprous oxide is reduced to copper in the presence of ore.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy 84

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 8 Metallurgy

Project: (Do it your self)

Project 1.
Which metals are used in day to day life? What are its uses?

Project 2.
Which nonmetals are used in day to day life? What are its uses?

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Balbharti Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions Notes, Textbook Exercise Important Questions and Answers.

Maharashtra State Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 1.
Fill in the blanks and explain the statements with reasoning:
a. If the height of the orbit of a satellite from the earth’s surface is increased, the tangential velocity of the satellite will ………………
Answer:
If the height of the orbit of a satellite from the earth’s surface, is increased, the tangential velocity of the satellite will decrease.
Explanation: The gravitational force (F) exerted by the earth on the satellite will decrease if the height of the orbit of the satellite from the earth’s surface is increased. Hence, the tangential velocity of the satellite will decrease.
The formula
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 1
shows that υc decreases with increasing h.

b. The initial velocity (during launching) of the Mangalyaan must be greater than ………… from the earth.
Answer:
The initial velocity (during launching) of the Mangalyaan must be greater than the escape velocity from the earth.
Explanation: If a satellite is to travel beyond the gravitational pull of the earth, its velocity must be more than the escape velocity from the earth.
[Note: The velocity must be atleast equal to the escape velocity. Refer the definition of escape velocity.]

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 2.
State with reasons whether the following statements are true or false.
a. If a spacecraft has to be sent away from the influence of the earth’s gravitational field, its velocity must be less than the escape velocity.
Answer:
False.
Explanation: The escape velocity of a body is the minimum velocity with which it should be projected from the earth’s surface, so that it can escape the influence of the earth’s gravitational field. This clearly shows that the given statement is false.

b. The escape velocity on the moon is less than that on the earth.
Answer:
True.
Explanation: Escape velocity of an object from the earth,
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 2

c. A satellite needs a specific velocity to revolve in a specific orbit.
Answer:
True.
Explanation:
Centripetal force on the satellite \(\frac{m v_{c}^{2}}{R+h}\) = gravitational force exerted by the earth on the satellite \(\frac{G M m}{(R+h)^{2}}\)
where,
m: mass of the satellite
υc: critical velocity of the satellite
h: height of the satellite from the surface of the earth
M: mass of the earth
R: radius of the earth
G: gravitational constant
∴ \(v_{\mathrm{c}}^{2}=\frac{G M}{R+h}\)
∴ \(v_{\mathrm{c}}=\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R+h}}\)
Thus, if the value of h changes, the value of υc also changes. It means a satellite needs to be given a specific velocity (in the tangential direction) to keep it revolving in a specific orbit.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 3

d. If the height of the orbit of a satellite increases, its velocity must also increase.
Answer:
False.
Explanation:
Centripetal force on the satellite \(\frac{m v_{c}^{2}}{R+h}\) = gravitational force exerted by the earth on the satellite \(\frac{G M m}{(R+h)^{2}}\)
where,
m : mass of the satellite
υc : critical velocity of the satellite
h : height of the satellite from the surface of the earth
M : mass of the earth
R : radius of the earth
G : gravitational constant
∴ \(v_{\mathrm{c}}^{2}=\frac{G M}{R+h}\)
∴ \(v_{\mathrm{c}}=\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R+h}}\)
Thus, if the value of h changes, the value of υc also changes. It means a satellite needs to be given a specific velocity (in the tangential direction) to keep it revolving in a specific orbit.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 4
As per the formula υc = \(\sqrt{\frac{G M}{R+h}}\) , if the value of h increases, the value of υc decreases. Hence, if the height of the satellite from the surface of the earth increases, its velocity decreases.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 3.
Answer the following questions:
a. What is meant by an artificial satellite? How are the satellites classified based on their functions?
(OR)
Write the importance of artificial satellites in your words. (Practice Activity Sheet – 3)
Answer:
A manmade object orbiting the earth or any other planet is called an artificial satellite. Satellites work on solar energy and hence photovoltaic panels are attached on both sides of the satellite, which look like wings. Satellites are also installed with various transmitters and other equipment to receive and transmit signals between the earth and the satellites.

Classification of satellites depending on their functions:
(1) Weather satellites: weather satellites collect the information regarding weather conditions of the region. It records temperature, air pressure, wind direction, humidity, cloud cover, etc. this information is sent to the space research station on the earth and then with this information weather forecast is made.

(2) Communication satellites: In order to establish communication between different places on the earth through mobile phones or computer assisted internet, communication satellites are used. Many artificial satellites placed at various locations in the earth’s orbit are well interconnected and help us to have communication with any place, from anywhere, at any time and in any form including voicemail, email, photographs, audio mail, etc.

(3) Broadcasting satellites: Broadcasting satel¬lites are used to transmit various radio and television programs and even live programs from any place on the earth to any other place. As a result, one can have access to information about current incidents, events, programs, sports and other events right from his drawing room with these satellites.

(4) Navigational satellites: Navigational satel¬lites assist the surface, water and air transportation and coordinate their busy schedule. These satellites also assist the user with current live maps as well as real time traffic conditions.

(5) Military satellites: Every sovereign nation needs to keep the real time information about the borders. Satellites help to monitor all movements of neighboring countries or enemy countries. Military satellites also help to guide the missiles effectively.

(6) Earth observation satellites: These satellites observe and provide the real time information about the earth. These satellites also help us to collect information about the resources, their management, continuous observation about a natural phenomenon and the changes within it.

(7) Other satellites: Apart from these various satellites, certain satellites for specific works or purposes are also sent in the space. E.g. India has sent EDUSAT for educational purpose; CARTOSAT for surveys and map making. Similarly, satellites with telescopes, like Hubble telescope or a satellite like International Space Station help to explore the universe. In fact, ISS (International Space Station) provides a temporary residence where astronauts can stay for a certain short or long period and can undertake the research and study space activities.
The various functions listed above show the importance of artificial satellites.

b. What is meant by the orbit of a satellite? On what basis and how are the orbits of artificial satellites classified?
Answer:
Orbit of a satellite is its path around the earth.
Orbits of artificial satellites can be classified on various basis.
(1) On the basis of the angle of the orbital plane: Orbital plane of a satellite can be the equatorial plane of the earth or it can be at an angle to it.
(2) On the basis of the nature of the orbit: Orbital plane can be circular or elliptical in shape.
(3) On the basis of the height of the satellite: Orbit of a satellite can be HEO, MEO or LEO.

(i) High Earth Orbit (HEO) satellite: A satellite orbiting at a height equal to or greater than 35780 km above the earth’s surface is called a High Earth Orbit satellite. The critical velocity (υc) of a satellite revolving in an orbit at 35780 km above the earth surface is 3.08 km/s. Such a satellite will take about 23 hours 54 minutes to complete one revolution around the earth. The earth completes one rotation about its axis in the same time. The orbital plane of such a satellite is the equatorial plane of the earth. The satellite’s relative position appears stationary with respect to a place on the earth. This satellite is, therefore, called a geostationary satellite or geosynchronous satellite.

(ii) Medium Earth Orbit (MEO) satellite: A satellite orbiting at a height between 2000 km and 35780 km above the earth’s surface is called a Medium Earth Orbit satellite. The orbital path of such a satellite is normally elliptical and passes through the North and the South polar regions. These satellites take about 12 hours to complete one revolution around the earth.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 5

(iii) Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellite:
A satellite orbiting at a height between 180 km and 2000 km above the earth’s surface is called a Low Earth Orbit satellite. Normally, these satellites take 90 minutes to complete one revolution around the earth. Weather satellites, space telescopes and International Space Station are Low Earth Orbit satellites.

c. Why are geostationary satellites not useful for studies of polar regions? (Practice Activity Sheet – 4)
(OR)
Explain the following statement. A geostationary satellite is not useful in the study of polar regions. (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Answer:
Geostationary satellites have two distinct characteristics:
(1) Geostationary satellites are HEO satellites and are placed at 35780 km above the earth’s surface.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 6

(2) A geostationary satellite revolves in the equatorial plane of the earth, and thus, it can never fly above the polar regions.
Hence, geostationary satellites are not useful for studies of polar regions.

d. What is meant by a satellite launch vehicle? Explain the satellite launch vehicle developed by ISRO with the help of a schematic diagram.
Answer:
A rocket used to carry an artificial satellite to a desired height above the earth’s surface and then project it with a proper velocity so that the satellite orbits the earth in the desired orbit is called a launch vehicle. A satellite launch vehicle needs a specific velocity as well as a thrust to reach the desired height above the earth’s surface. The velocity and the thrust of a satellite launch vehicle depend on the weight and orbital height of the satellite.

Accordingly, the structure of the launch vehicle is decided and designed. The weight of the fuel also contributes a major portion in the total weight of the launch vehicle. This also influences the structure of the launch vehicle. In order to use the fuel optimally, multiple stage launch vehicles are now designed and used.

The Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV) developed by ISRO is shown below in a schematic diagram.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 7

e. Why is it beneficial to use a satellite j launch vehicle made up of more than one stage?
Answer:
Earlier Satellite Launch Vehicles (SLV) used to be of a single stage vehicles. Such SLVs used to be very heavy as well as expensive in terms of its fuel consumption. As a result, SLVs with multiple stages were developed.

In multistage SLVs, as the journey of the launch vehicle progresses and the vehicle achieves a specific velocity and a certain height, the fuel of the first stage is exhausted and the empty fuel tank gets detached from the main body of the launch vehicle and falls back into a sea or on unpopulated land. As the fuel in the first stage is exhausted, the engine in the second stage is Ignited. However, the weight of the launch vehicle is now less than what it was earlier and hence it can move with higher velocity, Thus, it saves fuel consumption. Hence, it is beneficial to use a multistage satellite launch vehicle.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 4.
Complete the following table:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 8
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 9

Question 5.
Solve the following problems:
a. If the mass of a planet is eight times the mass of the earth and its radius is twice the radius of the earth, what will be the escape velocity for that planet?
Answer:
Given:
(1) The mass of the planet (M) is eight times the mass of the earth, i.e., 8 × 6 × 1024 kg
(2) The radius of the planet (R) is twice the radius of the earth, i.e., 2 × 6.4 × 106 km
(3) G = 6.67 × 10-11 N·m2/kg2
Escape velocity for that planet
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 10
= 2.237 × 104 m/s
= 22.37 km/s

b. How much time would a satellite in an orbit at a height of 35780 km above the earth’s surface take to complete one revolution around the earth, if the mass of the earth were four times its original mass?
Answer:
Given: R (Earth) = 6400 km = 6.4 × 106 m,
M (Earth) = 6 × 1024 kg
∴ M’ = 4M = 4 × 6 × 1024 kg
h = 35780 km = 3.578 × 107 m = 35.78 × 106 m,
G = 6.67 × 10-11 N·m2/kg2, T = ?
The time that the satellite would take to complete one revolution around the earth,
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 11
= Approx 4.303 × 104 s
= Approx 11.95 h
or 11 hours 57 minutes 10 seconds.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

c. If the height of a satellite completing one revolution around the earth in T seconds is h1 meters, then what would be the height of a satellite taking 2\(\sqrt{2}\) T seconds for one revolution?
Answer:
Given:
(1) Time: T seconds
(2) Height: h1
Let us assume the height of the satellite completing one revolution in 2\(\sqrt{2}\) T seconds as h2.
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 12
∴ R + h2 = 2R + 2h1
∴ h2 = R + 2h1

Project:

Project 1.
Collect information about the space missions undertaken by Sunita Williams.
Hints:
The following sources can be used to get the information on the above topic:
(1) Google Search Engine
(2) YouTube
(3) E-books on Sunita Williams
(4) English and other regional language books on Sunita Williams available in your library
(5) Newspaper clippings

Based on the information you have collected from the above sources, complete the project in about 5 pages. You can do value addition to your project with the help of suitable photos, clippings, charts, graphs and sketches.

Project 2.
Assume that you are interviewing Sunita Williams. Prepare a questionnaire and also the answers.
Answer:
Points to make a list of a questionnaire for the interview of Sunita Williams :
(1) Primary and higher education
(2) The source of inspiration to become an astronaut
(3) Information about her mentor
(4) General and specific training
(5) Initial experience of being an astronaut
(6) First space mission, its nature, duration and experience
(7) Natureofresearchcarriedoutinspace
(8) Some special memories
(9) Future plans
(10) Tips and guidance for the younger generation.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 135)

Question 1.
What is the difference between space and sky?
Answer:

  1. The visible portion of the atmosphere and outer space seen by simple eyes, without any equipment from the earth, is known as the sky.
  2. The infinite three-dimensional expanse in which the Solar system, stars, celestial bodies, galaxies and the endless Universe exist is known as space.
  3. Both sky and space lack a definite boundary. However, the sky is a very tiny part of space.

Question 2.
What are different objects in the Solar system?
Answer:

  1. Our Solar system is a very tiny part of a huge Galaxy-Milky Way.
  2. The Sun is at the centre of the Solar system. Sun is a star.
  3. Mercury, Venus, Earth, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn, Uranus and Neptune are planets in our Solar system. These planets revolve around the Sun. Some of these planets have their own natural satellites.
  4. Besides, there are asteroids, meteoroids, comets and meteors in the Solar system.

Question 3.
What is meant by a satellite?
Answer:

  1. An astronomical object orbiting any planet of our Solar system is called a satellite.
  2. Mercury and Venus have no satellites.
  3. Some planets have more than one satellite. E.g. Jupiter has 69 satellites.

Question 4.
How many natural satellites does the earth have?
Answer:
The earth has one natural satellite called the moon.

Question 5.
Which type of telescopes are orbiting around the earth? Why is it necessary to put them in space?
Answer:
(1) The following three types of telescopes are orbiting around the earth:

  • Optical Refracting Telescope.
  • Optical Reflecting Telescope.
  • Radio Telescope.

(2) Visible light and radio waves emitted by celestial bodies in space pass through the atmosphere before reaching the earth’s surface. During this journey, some light is absorbed by the atmosphere. Hence, the intensity of the light reaching the earth’s surface decreases. Besides, temperature and air pressure cause the atmospheric turbulence. Hence, light rays change their path, resulting in a change in the position of the image of a celestial body.

City lights during night, and bright sunlight during day also put limitations on usage of optical telescopes on the earth. To minimize these problems, optical telescopes are situated on mountain top, away from inhabited places. However, limitations caused by the atmosphere still persist.

To get rid of these problems scientists have successfully launched telescopes in space. Images obtained by these telescopes are brighter and clearer than those obtained by the telescopes located on the earth’s surface.

Can you recall? (Text Book Page No. 135)

Question 1.
Where does the signal in your cellphone come from?
Answer:
In nearby area of our residence, many mobile towers are installed at various places. Cellphones receive signals from one of these mobile towers.

Question 2.
Where from does it come to mobile towers?
Answer:
All mobile towers are connected to satellites. Cellphone signal reaching the nearest mobile tower in our vicinity is first transmitted to the satellite. The satellite transmits the signal to the mobile tower near the destination.

Question 3.
Where does the signal to your TV set come from?
Answer:
(1) Television Centre or Studio transmits the TV program which first reaches the satellite. The dish antenna of the cable operator in our area receives these signals. The TV programs reach our TV set through a cable connected between the cable operator’s receiving station and our TV set.

(2) Alternatively, a small portable dish antenna fixed on the rooftop is also used to receive the TV signals directly from the satellites. Finally, a cable connected to the dish antenna and TV set brings the programme to our TV set.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 4.
You may have seen photographs showing the position of monsoon clouds over the country in the newspaper. How are these images obtained?
Answer:
Weather satellites take photographs of the sky above the earth’s surface at regular intervals. Some satellites, capable of receiving radio signals, also collect the information of weather conditions and finally images of the sky are built with computers. Territorial boundaries of the states and the country are drawn later on these images. Such satellite images with imposed boundaries are printed in media or shown on the television.

Fill in the blanks:

Question 1.
A man-made object revolving around the earth in a fixed orbit is called …………..
Answer:
A man-made object revolving around the earth in a fixed orbit is called an artificial satellite.

Question 2.
Chandrayaan-I discovered the presence of ………….. on the moon.
Answer:
Chandrayaan-I discovered the presence of water on the moon.

Question 3.
Apart from launching a satellite around the earth, India has been able to launch a satellite around ……………
Answer:
Apart from launching a satellite around the earth, India has been able to launch a satellite around Mars.

Question 4.
All satellites work on …………… energy.
Answer:
All satellites work on solar energy.

Question 5.
……………. are used to carry and place a satellite in a specific orbit.
Answer:
Satellite launchers are used to carry and place a satellite in a specific orbit.

Question 6.
USA has developed ……………. as an alternative to space launch vehicles.
Answer:
USA has developed space shuttles as an alternative to space launch vehicles.

Question 7.
Hubble telescope is a ………….. satellite.
Answer:
Hubble telescope is a Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellite.

Question 8.
……………. executed the first ever mission to the moon in the world.
Answer:
Russia executed the first ever mission to the moon in the world.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 9.
………… executed the first manned mission to the moon in the world.
Answer:
USA executed the first manned mission to the moon in the world.

Select the appropriate answer from given options:

Question 1.
Which one of the following is a Low Earth Orbit (LEO) satellite?
(a) Navigational satellite
(b) Geostationary satellite
(c) International Space Station
(d) All of the above
Answer:
(c) International Space Station

Question 2.
Which of the following satellite launchers is developed by India?
(a) INSAT
(b) IRNSS
(c) EDUSAT
(d) PSLV
Answer:
(d) PSLV

Question 3.
Which of the following astronauts travelled through space shuttle ‘Discovery’ first time? (Practice Activity Sheet – 4)
(a) Kalpana Chawla
(b) Rakesh Sharma
(c) Sunita Williams
(d) Neil Armstrong
Answer:
(c) Sunita Williams

Considering the correlation between the words of the first pair, pair the third word accordingly with proper answer. (OR) Considering the first correlation, complete the second.

Question 1.
IRNSS : Direction showing satellite :: INSAT :………… (Practice Activity Sheet – 1)
Answer:
IRNSS : Direction showing satellite :: INSAT : Weather satellite

Question 2.
Hubble telescope : 569 km high from the earth’s surface :: Revolving orbit of Hubble telescope :………. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2; March 2019)
Answer:
Hubble telescope : 569 km high from the earth’s surface :: Revolving orbit of Hubble telescope : Low Earth Orbit.

Match the column:

Question 1.

Column A Column B
(1) Clouds over India (a) Low Earth Orbit
(2) Global communication (b) PSLV
(3) Launch vehicle made by ISRO (c) Communication satellite
(4) International Space Station (d) EDUSAT
(5) Navigational satellite (e) Weather satellite
(f) Medium Earth Orbit

Answer:
(1) Clouds over India – Weather satellite
(2) Global communication – Communication satellite
(3) Launch vehicle made by ISRO – PSLV
(4) International Space Station – Low Earth Orbit
(5) Navigational satellite – Medium Earth Orbit.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Answer the following questions in one sentence each:

Question 1.
What do you mean by the orbit of a satellite?
Answer:
Orbit of a satellite is its path around the earth.

Question 2.
Which factor decides the orbit of a satellite?
Answer:
The function of a satellite decides the orbit of the satellite.

Question 3.
What is a High Earth Orbit satellite?
Answer:
A satellite orbiting at a height equal to or greater than 35780 km above the earth’s surface is called a High Earth Orbit satellite.

Question 4.
Give two examples of Low Earth Orbit satellites.
Answer:
Weather satellite and International Space Station are Low Earth Orbit satellites.

Question 5.
What is a launch vehicle?
Answer:
A rocket used to carry an artificial satellite to a desired height above the earth’s surface and then project it with a proper velocity so that the satellite orbits the earth in the desired orbit is called a launch vehicle.

Question 6.
Name the launch vehicle developed by India.
Answer:
The launch vehicle developed by India is known as PSLV, i.e., Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle.

Answer the following questions:

Question 1.
Write the proper name of the orbits of satellites shown in the following figure with their height from the earth’s surface. (Practice Activity Sheet – 4)
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 13
Answer:
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 14
(a) Low earth orbits: height above the earth’s surface: 180 km to 2000 km
(b) Medium earth orbits: height above the earth’s surface: 2000 km to 35780 km
(c) High earth orbits: height from the earth’s surface > 35780 km

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 2.
Explain the need and importance of space missions.
Answer:
Man has always been curious about the sun, moon, stars and the world beyond the earth. Initially, man tried to observe space with the help of telescopes. However, later he dreamt to fly into space and finally succeeded to reach into space.

Space missions are now essential to understand the origin and evolution of our solar system as well as to study the Universe beyond the Solar system.

Space missions have given us many benefits and made our life simpler. It is because of space missions that the real-time immediate communication and exchange of information across the globe is now possible. We can receive the abundant information at the desk at our home or office. We also get information about any topic at any time and anywhere at fingertips through the Internet. Besides, the advanced alerts about some natural calamities like cyclones or storms are received through satellites sent as a part of space missions. Satellites have also helped us in entertainment. Programmes, sports events, etc., can be telecast live and can reach millions at a time throughout the world.

Satellite surveillance of the enemy, exploring the reserves of various minerals resources, access to various activities like trade, tourism and navigation, and easy global reach to make world a global village is all possible due to the space missions. Thus, space missions are extremely important in defence, communication, weather forecast, observation, direction determination, etc.

Question 3.
What are space expeditions? Explain their need and importance in your words. (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
A mission planned (i) for establishing artificial satellites in the earth’s orbit, using them for research or for the benefit of life, or (ii) for sending a spacecraft to the various components of the solar system or outside is called a space expedition.

Man has always been curious about the sun, moon, stars and the world beyond the earth. Initially, man tried to observe space with the help of telescopes. However, later he dreamt to fly into space and finally succeeded to reach into space. Space missions are now essential to understand the origin and evolution of our solar system as well as to study the Universe beyond the Solar system.

Space missions have given us many benefits and made our life simpler. It is because of space missions that the real-time immediate communication and exchange of information across the globe is now possible. We can receive the abundant information at the desk at our home or office. We also get information about any topic at any time and anywhere at fingertips through the Internet. Besides, the advanced alerts about some natural calamities like cyclones or storms are received through satellites sent as a part of space missions. Satellites have also helped us in entertainment. Programmes, sports events, etc., can be telecast live and can reach millions at a time throughout the world.

Satellite surveillance of the enemy, exploring the reserves of various minerals resources, access to various activities like trade, tourism and navigation, and easy global reach to make world a global village is all possible due to the space missions. Thus, space missions are extremely important in defence, communication, weather forecast, observation, direction determination, etc.

Question 4.
What are the objectives of the space mission?
Answer:
Man initially tried to satisfy his curiosity to know the world and universe beyond the earth with the help of telescopes. However, it has some obvious limitations and to overcome these limitations, man later ventured into space missions.

Space missions carried out by man were aimed at four specific objectives:

  1. To launch artificial satellites in the earth’s orbit for study and research.
  2. To launch artificial satellites in the earth’s orbit for various purposes like telecommunication, weather forecast, radio and TV programme transmission, etc.
  3. To send artificial satellites beyond the earth’s orbit to observe, study and collect the information from other planets, meteors, meteoroids, asteroids and comets.
  4. To sense and understand space beyond the solar system.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 5.
Write on significant space missions carried out by man.
Answer:
Man has carried out many space missions within and beyond the earth’s orbit. Significant space missions are as follows:
(1) Space missions within the earth’s orbit: Man has so far sent many artificial satellites of various types in the earth’s orbit. These satellites have made the life of man simpler. Besides, it has also helped us in resource management, communication, disaster management, etc.

(2) Moon missions : Moon is the natural satellite , of the earth and it is the nearest celestial body to us. Naturally, our initial space missions were directed to the moon. As of now, only Russia, USA, European Union, China, Japan and India have successfully undertaken . moon missions. Russia executed 15 moon missions between 1959 and 1976. Of these, last 4 missions brought the stone samples from the moon for study and analysis. However all these missions were unmanned. USA executed moon missions between 1962 and 1972. Some of these missions were unmanned.

However, the historic moon mission took place on 20th July, 1969, when American astronaut Neil Armstrong became the first human to step on the moon. India has undertaken the moon mission. Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) successfully launched Chandrayaan-I and placed it in orbit of the moon. It sent useful information to the earth for about a year. The most important discovery made during the mission was the presence of water on moon’s surface. India was the first country to discover this.

(3) Mars mission: The second nearest celestial object to the earth is Mars and many nations sent spacecraft towards it. But only few of them have been successful. However, the performance of Mangalyaan, the Indian spacecraft sent by ISRO towards Mars, was remarkable. Mangalyaan was launched in November 2013 and was placed in the orbit of Mars successfully in September 2014. It has obtained useful information about the surface and atmosphere of Mars.

(4) Space missions to other planets: Other than moon and Mars missions, many other space missions were undertaken for studying other planets. Some spacecraft orbited the planets, some landed on some planets, and some just observed the planets, passed near them and went further to study other celestial bodies. Some spacecraft were sent specifically to study asteroids and comets. Some spacecraft’s have brought dust and stone samples from asteroids for the study.

All these space missions are very useful in getting information and helping us in clarifying our concepts about the origin of the earth and the Solar system.

Question 6.
Bring out the contribution of India’s space missions.
Answer:
Successful space missions as well as scientific and technological accomplishments by India in space technology have made a significant contribution in the national and social development of our country.
India has indigenously built various launchers and these launchers can put the satellites having the mass up to 2500 kg in orbit.

Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) has designed and built two important launchers: Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV) and Geosynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle (GSLV).

Many satellites in INS AT and GSAT series are active in telecommunication, television broadcasting, meteorological services, disaster management and in monitoring and management of natural resources. EDUSAT is used specifically for education while satellites in IRNSS series are used for navigation. Thumba, Sriharikota and Chandipur are Indian satellite launch centers.

Vikram Sarabhai Space Centre at Thiruvananthapuram, Satish Dhawan Space Research Centre at Sriharikota and Space Application Centre at Ahmedabad are space research organizations of India.

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Question 7.
What is meant by space debris? Why is there need to manage the debris? (March 2019)
Answer:
In a space nonessential objects such as the parts of launchers and satellites, revolving around the earth are called the debris in space.

The debris can be harmful to the artificial satellites. It can collide with the satellite or spacecrafts and damage them. Therefore the future of artificial satellites or spacecrafts are in danger.
Hence, it is necessary to manage the debris.

Solve the following examples/numerical problems:
[Note: See the textbook for the relevant data.]

Problem 1.
If the mass of a planet is 8 times that of the earth and its radius is twice the radius of the earth, what will be the escape velocity for that planet? (Escape velocity for the earth = 11.2 km/s) (Practice Activity Sheet – 2)
Answer:
Given:
Mass of the planet = 8ME radius of the planet, Rp = 2RE,
escape velocity for the earth, υescE = 11.2 km/s
escape velocity for the planet, υescP = ?
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 15

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Problem 2.
Calculate the critical velocity (υc) of the satellite to be located at 35780 km above the surface of the earth.
Answer:
Given:
G: 6.67 × 10-11 N·m2/kg2,
M(Earth): 6 × 1024 kg,
R(Earth): 6.4 × 106 m,
h: 35780 km = 35780 × 103 m,
υc = ?
Critical velocity of the satellite
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 16
= 3.08 × 103 m/s
= 3.08 Km/s.

Problem 3.
In the above example (2) how much time will the satellite take to complete one revolution around the earth?
Answer:
Given:
R: 6400mkm = 6.4 × 106 m
h: 35780 km = 3.5780 × 107 m
v: 3.08 km/s = 3.08 × 103 m/s
T = ?
The time required for the satellite to complete one revolution around the earth,
Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions 17
= Approx 86060 s
= 23 hours 54 minutes 20 seconds

Problem 4.
Calculate the critical velocity (υc) of the satellite to be located at 2000 km above the surface of the earth.
Answer:
Refer to the example (2) above.
Here,h = 2 × 106 m
υc = 6902 m/s

Maharashtra Board Class 10 Science Solutions Part 1 Chapter 10 Space Missions

Problem 5.
In the above example (4), how much time will the satellite take to complete one revolution around the earth?
Answer:
Refer to example (3) above.
Approx 7647 s
= 2 hours 7 minutes 27 seconds.
[Note: For more solved problems and problems for practice, refer Chapter 1 (Gravitation)]